Damage Stability (DAM)

© 1992-2009 Napa Ltd. All rights reserved.

NAPA Online Manuals 2009.1Damage Stability (DAM)



Table of Contents

1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3 General calculation methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1 Damage analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3.1.1 Hydrostatic calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1.2 Criteria calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.1.3 Progressive flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.2 Floodable lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3 Subdivision indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.3.1 USSR Register of Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3.2 Other regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.4 Cross flooding pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4 Methods to fill rooms with water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.1 Manual method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4.1.1 One stage damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.1.2 Several stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64.1.3 Filling rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4.1.3.1 Rule 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.1.3.2 Rule 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.1.3.3 Rule 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4.2 Automatic method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74.2.1 Progressive mode, "OPT PROGR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84.2.2 Progressive mode, "OPT WEPROGR". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84.2.3 Progressive mode, "OPT WEPROGR2". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84.2.4 Progressive flooding, "SUCCESSIVE". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

4.3 Definition of a Breach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

5 Liquid loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

6 Stability criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

7 Damage analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117.1 General logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

8 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128.1 Initial condition (loading condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

8.1.1 Definition commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128.1.1.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

8.1.2 Reference to a loading case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158.2 Damage case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

8.2.1 Definition commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168.2.1.1 Explanation of ROOM syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228.2.1.2 Grounding information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

8.2.2 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278.2.3 Use of table in damage definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

8.3 Margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308.3.1 Definition commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308.3.2 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

8.4 Freeboard deck edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308.5 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31



8.5.1 Relevant openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318.5.2 Definition commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318.5.3 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338.5.4 Additional definition data for openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

8.6 Opening Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358.7 Horizontal escape routes according to SOLAS 2009 in NAPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

8.7.1 Barge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368.7.2 Subdivision used for generating SOLAS 2009 damages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378.7.3 Escape definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378.7.4 Relevancy criteria for horizontal escapes in NAPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408.7.5 Definition summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408.7.6 Calculated cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

8.8 Init group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488.8.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

8.9 Damage group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498.9.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

8.10 Room group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498.10.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

8.11 Opening group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508.11.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

8.12 Stability criteria, criterion groups and moments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508.13 Subdivision aided damage case generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

8.13.1 General principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508.13.2 Subdivision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518.13.3 Location of compartments in subdivision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538.13.4 Generation of one zone damages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558.13.5 Generation of multiple zone damages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568.13.6 Generation command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

9 Calculation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639.1 Calculation arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

9.1.1 GZ calculation in the constant direction (for ships). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639.1.2 GZ calculation in the variable weakest direction (for offshore structures). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639.1.3 GZ calculation in the inclination direction (for offshore structures). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649.1.4 GZ calculation in the constant weakest direction (for offshore structures). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649.1.5 Handling of arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659.1.6 Automatic argument storing and restoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659.1.7 Calculation hull. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659.1.8 Heeling angles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659.1.9 Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669.1.10 Watertight arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679.1.11 Compartment connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

9.1.11.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689.1.12 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689.1.13 Other arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

9.2 Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709.2.1 Calculate initial condition - damage case combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709.2.2 Calculate damages as specified in the given table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719.2.3 Calculate the required and attained subdivision index R and A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

9.3 Calculation of dredgers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

10 Output of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7310.1 Output arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7410.2 General list components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

10.2.1 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75



10.2.2 Reference dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7610.2.3 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7610.2.4 Standard header page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7610.2.5 Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

10.3 Components listing and plotting definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7610.3.1 List margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7710.3.2 List freeboard deck edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7710.3.3 Plot margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7710.3.4 List openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7810.3.5 Plot openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7910.3.6 List points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7910.3.7 List initial conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7910.3.8 Plot initial conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8110.3.9 List damage cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8110.3.10 Plot damage cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

10.4 Components listing and plotting calculated results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8310.4.1 General options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8310.4.2 List summary of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8410.4.3 Plot results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8810.4.4 List floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8910.4.5 Plot floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9010.4.6 Plot maximum water surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9210.4.7 List stability curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9210.4.8 Plot stability curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9310.4.9 List liquid loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9410.4.10 Plot liquid loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9510.4.11 List damaged compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9510.4.12 Combined list for loads and flooded water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9610.4.13 Plot damaged compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9710.4.14 List openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9710.4.15 Plot openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9810.4.16 List points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9810.4.17 List margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9810.4.18 Plot margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9910.4.19 List freeboard deck edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9910.4.20 List estimate of outflown cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9910.4.21 T/TR limits for immersion of the margin line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10010.4.22 T/TR limits for immersion of the openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10010.4.23 Stability criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10010.4.24 List limit curves - LIST DLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10110.4.25 Plot limit curves - PLD DLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10110.4.26 List minimum GM table - LIST DMGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10210.4.27 List two-dimensional summary table - LIST DSUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10310.4.28 List loading condition table - LIST DLDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10410.4.29 List criterion table - LIST DCRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10510.4.30 Plot criterion check - PLD DCRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10610.4.31 Plot minimum GM check - PLD DMGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10910.4.32 List IMO Res. A.265, Reg. 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

10.5 Auxiliary list commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11010.6 Auxiliary drawing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11010.7 Assign variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

10.7.1 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11010.7.2 Reference dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11110.7.3 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11110.7.4 Quantities of standard header page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111



10.7.5 Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11210.7.6 Points of margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11210.7.7 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11210.7.8 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11310.7.9 Initial conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11410.7.10 Definition data of damage cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11510.7.11 Assign results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11610.7.12 Assign floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11910.7.13 Stability curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12010.7.14 Liquid loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12110.7.15 Damaged compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12210.7.16 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12310.7.17 Special points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12410.7.18 Margin line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12510.7.19 Freeboard deck edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12510.7.20 Estimate of outflown cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12610.7.21 Assign limit curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12710.7.22 Minimum GM table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12710.7.23 Loading condition table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12810.7.24 Criterion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

10.8 Command SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12910.9 Special considerations about output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

10.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13210.9.2 Where to find more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13210.9.3 The structure of DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13210.9.4 The role of the CR task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13210.9.5 Definitions and arguments in DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13310.9.6 New output functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13310.9.7 Standard output macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13310.9.8 Examples of the lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

10.10 The definition used in the list examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

11 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14811.1 List catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14811.2 List data in input format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14811.3 Edit data in input format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14811.4 Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14911.5 Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14911.6 Rescue results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

12 Probabilistic damage stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14912.1 Input tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

12.1.1 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15112.2 Calculation of probabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

12.2.1 Revised SOLAS CHAPTER II-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15612.3 Removing extra cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15712.4 Calculation of subdivision index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15812.5 Intermediate stages and phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15812.6 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15912.7 Probabilistic damage calculation - work throughs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

12.7.1 MSC 574 (A/Amax) work through:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16112.7.2 REG 25-1 work through:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16212.7.3 Revised SOLAS ch II-1, MSC 194(80). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16312.7.4 Note regarding LIST PRES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164



13 Cross flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16513.1 Cross flooding subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

13.1.1 Definition of cross flooding arrangements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16613.1.2 Calculate equalization time or diameter of the pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16613.1.3 Catalog cross flooding pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

13.2 Renewed cross flooding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

14 Floodable Lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16814.1 Data summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16814.2 Commands at main level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16914.3 Definition commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

14.3.1 Definition of margin line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17014.3.2 Definition of subdivision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

14.4 Calculation arguments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17214.5 Calculation and output functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17414.6 Administration functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17414.7 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

15 Subdivision indices acc. to USSR Register of Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17615.1 Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

16 Flooding Simulation in NAPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17716.1 Arguments in the DAM task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17816.2 Opening definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

16.2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17916.2.2 Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18116.2.3 Opening lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18216.2.4 Changing the opening status during flooding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

16.3 Air flow simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18216.4 Compartment Connection table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18216.5 Damage definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

16.5.1 Time step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18416.6 Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18416.7 Dynamic roll motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18516.8 Waves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

16.8.1 Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18616.8.2 Wave spectrum / post-processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

16.9 Simulation time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18716.10 Checking the simulation results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

16.10.1 Visualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18816.10.2 Diagrams and lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18816.10.3 List of flooding events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

16.11 Typical user errors and problem areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18816.12 Further reading on the theoretical background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

17 DA Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19017.1 Commands for definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19017.2 Argument commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19817.3 Calculation of cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21117.4 Listing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21917.5 Plotting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23517.6 Administration and auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24717.7 Subtasks and connection to other subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254



17.8 Data for subdivision and damage stability of cargo ships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25417.9 Commands related to Onboard-NAPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

18 DA Service Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


1 (272)


1 GeneralThe damage stability subsystem (DA) is intented for the analysis of the subdivision and floatability of a ship in the caseswhere one or several compartments of the ship are damaged and flooded.

The main tasks of the subsystem are:

1. to calculate the hydrostatic properties of the ship before, during and after flooding,

2. to examine progress of flooding by simulating spreading of water in the ship,

3. to calculate GM-requirements for intact conditions to meet given damage stability criteria,

4. to calculate floodable length curves,

5. to calculate the subdivision index according to:

■ IMO A.265 (passenger rules)■ SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1 (dry cargo rules)■ Revised SOLAS II-1, Part B, Part B-1 SLF 47 / MSC 80■ A/Amax, IMO MSC/Circ.574■ USSR rules

6. to calculate the cross flooding times according to IMO, Res A.266

The documents, and the system, are organized according to the tasks stated above.

The following figure shows the hierarchy of the DA subsystem.

The hierarchy of the DA subsystem

See also NAPA User Meeting papers about damage stability

2 ConceptsSome central concepts related to the damage stability calculations are declared below. These concepts are mainly used inthe damage analysis part of the system, but some of them may also be applicable in other parts.

Damage case

List of damaged rooms and declaration how water is flooding into the ship andbetween the rooms during flooding.

../workshops/dam/index.html#umws_damage


2 (272)


Equilibrium condition

In the equilibrium condition, flooding of the ship has proceeded to such asituation, that no water is flooding into or out of the ship, or between the rooms.

Flooding stage

This concept is related to the damage case describing the internal structure of theflooding process. The inflow of water (outflow of cargo) is divided into stagessuch that the flooding will proceed through a set of successive intermediateequilibrium conditions to the final equilibrium condition. Several stages mayoccur, e.g. if counterfilling or progressive flooding is described. Note carefully thedifference between STAGE and PHASE.

Progressive flooding stage

A flooding stage where the program studies how flood water spreads in the shipthrough openings. Note the difference between progressive flooding stage andcalculation of the immersion angle for defined openings. In the progressiveflooding stage the result of flooding through a defined opening is calculated i.e. aGZ curve with a step(s) is obtained.

Calculation phase

All flooding stages, except the progressive ones, can be divided into one or severalintermediate calculation phases, which allow inspection of flooding during theflooding stages. During one stage, flooding of a set of rooms will proceed to theequilibrium condition of that stage through the calculation phases by filling therooms gradually. Note that what in NAPA is called phase is usually called stage inthe vocabulary of the rules.

Filling degree

An upper limit of inflooded water of a room at the end of the flooding stage.

Filling rate

A number defining how fast a room is filled with water relative to the other rooms.

Initial condition An initial condition defines the initial floating position of the ship, its center ofgravity and position and amount of liquid loads. The initial conditions can eitherbe defined explicitly or as a reference to a predefined loading condition.

Calculation case

A calculation case is defined by an initial condition and damage case combination.Hydrostatic results are always based on a calculation case. The 'case' is given inthe form init/dam where init is the name of the initial condition, and dam the nameof the damage case.

Margin line

An immersion limit line defining the highest allowable waterline. The margin lineis defined according to the regulations applied. Several margin lines may occursimultaneously in the same version, but only one at the time is valid for the criteriacalculations.

Opening An opening is a point in the ship, through which water can run into the ship orbetween rooms.

Point of interest

A point in the ship which has some interest often related to stability criteria.

Stability criterion

A stability criterion is a requirement for the stability or floating condition of thedamaged ship. Normally the minimum required GM for the intact condition, thatsatisfies the criterion, is calculated.

Subdivision A subdivision divides the ship into compartments (or zones) by watertightbulkheads. The subdivision is used in calculations of the subdivision index of


3 (272)


IMO A.265, SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1 and USSR rules, in the calculationsof the factors of subdivision and in plotting of floodable length curves.

Full A room is considered full, if it is totally occupied by water or the room is filled upto the external water surface, i.e. no more water can run into the room. See figure.

Permeability That part of the moulded volume of the room that may be filled with water equallydistributed within the room. Note that DA as default only uses the permeability,and not the steel reduction (RED) or capacity (CAP) defined in SM.

Common surface During flooding the water level is at the same height in all flooded compartmentsi.e. one free surface.

Individual filling

Contrary to 'Common surface' the flooded rooms can have individual surfaces.

3 General calculation methods

3.1 Damage analysis

The damage analysis part of the system is intented for examination of stability and floatability of the ship, when part ofthe ship is flooded with water.

The calculation method is real, i.e. the program calculates the real physical behaviour of the ship in the damage casesdoing no approximations in any stage of the calculation, nor interpolating from pre-calculated tables; the free surfaces ofinflooded water or liquid cargoes are always horizontal irrespectively how the ship is floating (trimmed or heeled) andthe current centers of gravity of liquid masses affects the floating position of the ship in every case.

3.1.1 Hydrostatic calculation

Firstly, relevant properties such as displacement, LCB, KG, draught and trim for the ship in its initial condition arecalculated.

Secondly, flood water is allowed to run into (or liquid cargo run out of) the damaged rooms according to data given in thedamage case definition (e.g. number of phases/stages). Displacement, draught, trim and heeling moment are calculatedfor the specified heeling angles.

The basic results are calculated for each intermediate phase of each flooding stage:

■ Draught as a function of heel■ Trim as a function of heel■ Center of buoyancy as a function of heel■ Heeling moment as a function of heel.■ Height of liquid level in each room.■ Description how flood water spreads between rooms (progressive flooding stage).

This set of results is stored permanently and automatically in the database (DB4). All output is based on this data. Becausethe stored data does not contain anything about margin lines, openings, stability criteria or listing or plotting options, theseproperties may be freely changed before output without requiring recalculation of the damage cases. The program keepsrecord whether the results are up to date or not and refuses to print out obsolete data. The results become out of date ifany of the following is changed:

■ damage case■ initial condition■ hull


4 (272)


■ damaged or liquid rooms■ calculation arguments

The results are displayed either with reference to the 'constant displacement method' or with reference to the 'variabledisplacement method'. In the constant displacement method, the GZ-curves and related values are represented so that thedisplacement of the ship is assumed to be constant (= initial displacement). This means that to get the correct uprightingmoments from the GZ-values, GZ must be multiplied by the initial displacement.

In the variable displacement method, the GZ-curves and related values are represented with reference to the changeddisplacement caused by outrunning cargo from the damaged liquid load rooms, i.e. to get the correct uprighting momentsfrom the GZ-values, GZ must be multiplied by the displacement which equals to the initial displacement minus the amountof cargo in the damaged liquid load rooms. Note that the methods result in different values only if there are damagedliquid load rooms.

3.1.2 Criteria calculation

Using the results of the hydrostatic calculations, it is possible to examine the stability criteria and determine whichminimum intact GM (if any) will satisfy each criterion. The GM-requirements are always calculated during output. Thisallows the user to freely change the criteria at any time and how many times as needed, without recalculating the damagecase.

3.1.3 Progressive flooding

Progressive flooding means that an extra stage is added after the final flooding stage defined in the damage definition. Inthe progressive flooding stage, the program studies how the final stage will change, when flood water is allowed to spreadthrough openings. Spreading of water is examined as a function of heeling angle causing steps in the stability curve.

Note, that progressive flooding is an exception to the rule, that openings do not affect on the stored basic results.

3.2 Floodable lengths

The task of floodable lengths is to calculate the maximum length of a compartment as a function of x, which filled withwater still keeps the margin line dry.

There is a unique correspondence between trims and waterlines, which are tangents to the margin line. The systemcalculates by iteration the trim (and thus the corresponding tangent waterline) and the length L, having the property, thatthe part of the ship limited by x0-L, x0+L and the tangent waterline (shadowed area in the figure) makes the ship to floatsuch that the margin line touches the sea.

3.3 Subdivision indices

3.3.1 USSR Register of Shipping

The subdivision indices are calculated according to the chapter 'Probability estimation of subdivision' of the 'Rules for theClassification and Construction of Sea-going Ships', Leningrad 1982. The USSR index is calculated in task SDI, enteredfrom the main level of NAPA with the command SDI.

3.3.2 Other regulations

The following regulations are handled using the table calculation task:

■ 'Regulations on Subdivision and Stability of Passenger Ships', (IMO A265), London 1974, regulations 1 through 7.■ SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1.


5 (272)


■ the simpilified method for the attained subdivision index of ro-ro passenger ships (MSC 574)

3.4 Cross flooding pipes

The task calculates the cross-flooding time in a damage case according to the IMO Reg. A.266, and is accessed by thecommand CROSS under the main damage task DAM.

4 Methods to fill rooms with waterThe damage stability subsystem can use two methods to handle flooding of the ship: manual and automatic. In the manualmethod the user describes the flooding process in detail. The automatic method simulates the flooding process usingopenings to determinate how flood water is spread in the ship as a function of heeling angle i.e. progressive flooding.

The manual method is used in normal damage case calculation, and the automatic method is applied in the progressiveflooding stages.

4.1 Manual method

In the manual method, the user determines which rooms are filled with water and how flooding proceeds in the ship.The concept 'STAGE' divides the flooding process into a set of successive stages, which define when each individualroom starts to flood and to which degree flooding can proceed in each room. The concept 'intermediate phase' or simply'PHASE' divides each stage into a set of successive instants, through which the stage proceeds from the starting conditionto the final condition gradually increasing or decreasing flood water in each room.

In the intermediate phases, the rooms can have a common water surface allowing a free water flow between the rooms,or the rooms can have individual water surfaces at different heights. If the rooms have a common water surface, the totalvolume of inflooded water in the rooms is kept constant as the ship is heeled, causing the amounts of flood water in theindividual rooms to vary as a function of heel. The volume of the inflooded water in the room having an individual waterlevel is kept constant as the ship is heeled. The following cases are possible:

■ every room takes part in the common water surface,■ every room has an individual water surface,■ some rooms take part in the common water surface, while some have an individual surface.

In the equilibrium conditions, i.e. at the end of the stages, the rooms can be filled to the sea level or they can containa constant amount of inflooded water having a different water surface from that of the sea. The rooms having constantvolume of floodwater are handled as if they had liquid loads (i.e. added weight). All the following cases are possible:

■ every room is filled to the sea level,■ no room is filled to the sea level,■ some rooms are filled to the sea level, some having a constant volume of inflooded water.

The default assumption is that the rooms have a common water surface during the intermediate phases and they are filledto the sea level in the equilibrium conditions (i.e. lost buoyancy), if not otherwise stated explicitly. The filling degreesother than 'full' or explicitly given volumes cause constant volumes of flood water in the individual rooms during floodingand in the equilibrium conditions.

4.1.1 One stage damage

The simpliest and most common damage case consists of one stage. If the rooms can be filled with water freely (the upperlimit of inflooded water is the moulded volume multiplied by the permeability), the system assumes, that water can spreadin the damaged rooms so that they have a common water surface during flooding

The following example describes the filling method of the rooms having a common water surface.


6 (272)


Let us assume that the flooding process is divided into two intermediate phases, i.e. the flooding proceeds to the equilibriumcondition in three steps: phase 1, phase 2 and equilibrium.

■ In the beginning, the system calculates the distance d between the external water surface and the lowest point of therooms.

■ In phase 1, the rooms are filled with water up to the waterline which is d/3 above the lowest point of the rooms. Thiswaterline implies a volume and moment of flood water causing a new floating position of the ship.

■ The amount of flood water in phase 2 is got by filling the rooms up to a waterline, calculated by dividing thedistance between the new external water surface and the water surface inside the rooms at the end of phase 1, by 2.The thereby added flood water gives a new floating position of the ship at the end of phase 2.

■ Finally the rooms are filled so, that they become full, which means that the water surface inside and outside the shipwill be common.

The total amount of inflooded water is kept constant during the intermediate flooding phases, as the GZ-curve and ship'sdraught and trim are calculated as a function of heeling angle. (Because of the common water surface inside the rooms,the amount of water in a single room is not constant during heeling). In the equilibrium condition,the amount of infloodedwater varies from one heeling angle to another.

The following figure illustrates this example:

The rooms 1, 2, 3 and 4 are damaged. During flooding, the water surface is common in every damaged room (phase 1and 2). The equilibrium position is reached and the flooding is terminated when either the water surface inside the shipis equal to that outside the ship or the damaged rooms become full.

4.1.2 Several stages

Complicated damage cases can be defined by dividing the flooding process into several flooding stages. Several floodingstages must be used, if some rooms are not flooded until the flooding is proceeded to some certain stage, for instancefilling of some room causing progressive flooding to another room, or crossflooding of tanks.

The flooded rooms and their number can be changed from stage to stage or same rooms can occur in many floodingstages. Filling degrees and explicit volumes of the flooded rooms can vary freely from one stage to another, the amountof inflooded water can even decrease from one stage to another. A room occuring in one stage, will preserve its infloodedwater in the succeeding stages, if not explicitly otherwise stated. For instance a room being 'full' in one stage, is 'full' (=filled to the sea level) also in the next stage even if it is not given in the list of damaged rooms of that stage.

The total volume of inflooded water in the damaged rooms is kept constant during a given phase as the ship is heeled,if the rooms have a common water surface. However, if some rooms have an explicitly given upper limit of infloodedwater at the end of the stage, there is no water flow from or to these rooms and they have an individual constant volumeof flood water as the ship is heeled.

The following figure illustrates the stage concept. In the first stage room 1 is damaged and allowed to be flooded until itis 'full'. In the second stage room 2 is flooded in one intermediate phase, and room 1 remains 'full'.


7 (272)


4.1.3 Filling rules

As a summary, the following rules are valid as the damaged rooms are filled with water.

4.1.3.1 Rule 1

In the INTERMEDIATE PHASES, an individual room has a CONSTANT VOLUME of inflooded water as the ship isheeling if

■ in any stage the room has a filling degree other than 'full' or an explicitly given volume, or■ attribute 'INDIVIDUAL' is given to the room in the damage definition.

In this case the room has an individual water surface and there is no water flow to or from the room.

4.1.3.2 Rule 2

In the INTERMEDIATE PHASES, many rooms have a CONSTANT TOTAL VOLUME of inflooded water as the shipis heeling, if

■ the rooms can be filled freely, i.e. there is not in any stage an upper limit of inflooded water stated by a given fillingdegree other than 'full' or volume given explicitly by the attributes 'VOLUME' or 'PUMP'.

■ no room has the attribute 'INDIVIDUAL'.

In this case the rooms have a common water surface and there is free water flow between the rooms.

4.1.3.3 Rule 3

In the EQUILIBRIUM CONDITIONS, i.e. at the end of any flooding stage, every room is filled to the sea level and thevolume of inflooded water is varying as the ship is heeling, if the amount of inflooded water is NOT limited by a fillingdegree other than 'full' or by an explicitly given 'VOLUME' or 'PUMP'.

In the equilibrium conditions, the sea level and the level of inflooded water inside the damaged rooms usually form acontinuous water surface, but if explicitly stated, some rooms can have even in the equilibrium conditions a constantamount of water and an individual water surface, in which case they are treated like liquid loads in the sense of programlogic.

4.2 Automatic method

The automatic filling method comes in use in the progressive flooding stages, where it is examined how the ship behaves asa function of heeling angle when spreading of flood water to unflooded rooms through openings is allowed. The automatic


8 (272)


method requires opening data which contain information about rooms connected by the opening, and requires the argument'OPT PROGR' or "OPT WEPROGR" is given or the damage case is assigned the type PROGR or WEPROGR.

Please note that when the progressive option is used the MINGM or MAXKG iteration cannot be done. The reason forthis is that when/if the initial GM/KG is changed the set of openings taken into account in the progressive flooding mightchange, and a new stability calculation has to be performed. Therefore the progressive options can be used only to checkthe stability for a fixed KG or GM.

4.2.1 Progressive mode, "OPT PROGR

In the progressive flooding stage, calculation starts in the situation where the rooms stated explicitly in the damagedefinition are flooded. Normal calculation continues as far as the first unprotected opening immerses. When this happensand if the unprotected opening leads to some not yet flooded room(s) from the sea or from some already flooded room, thenew room(s) is (are) added to the list of flooded rooms. The immersion angle is added to the calculation heeling angles andthe new floating position and righting arm of the ship is calculated. The program continues from this heeling angle withnew flooded rooms until the next unprotected opening goes under water, checks the situation and adds the new room(s)to the list of flooded rooms. Checking of unprotected openings continues as far as all unprotected openings are underwater or there are no more calculation angles. The result of this process is draught, trim, and GZ-curves containing stepsat heeling angles where flooding spread to new rooms.

Note, that the program can handle rooms which are directly as well as indirectly connected to the sea or to some floodedroom through unprotected openings; there is no limitation on the length of the chain of unprotected openings whichconnects the room to flood water or in which order the unprotected openings are immersed.

The time factor is ignored in the progressive flooding calculations. That is why there is no need to know the area of theopenings; all unprotected openings defined as relevant are taken into account.

4.2.2 Progressive mode, "OPT WEPROGR"

A special case of progressive flooding can be activated with the option "OPT WEPROGR".

■ If a weather tight or unprotected opening is immersed in the final stage of flooding, the compartments connectedto these openings will be flooded (as in the case of OPT PROGR above) in the progressive stage of flooding.

■ All other openings are taken into account as if no progressive mode is active

The reason for using this option is to take into account progressive flooding through openings already immersed in thefinal equilibrium. This is often used in the calculation of probabilistic damage stability where the immersion of a weathertight opening means the survivability factor s is zero (s=0), but the flooding of the spaces connected by this opening canresult in a positive contribution to the attained index.

4.2.3 Progressive mode, "OPT WEPROGR2"

As there have been requests to change the handling of UNPROTECTED openings after equilibrium, a parallel featureto OPTION WEPROG has been implemented, i.e. OPTION WEPROG2. It works like OPTION WEPROG when itcomes to WETHERTIGHT openings (before and after equilibrium) and UNPROTECTED openings before equilibriumbut immersion at heeling angles also after equilibrium should lead to progressive flooding for UNPROTECTED openingsi.e. a stepped GZ-curve after equilibrium. (Note that the WEPROGRESSIVE opening allows progressive flooding alsoafter equilibrium causing steps in the GZ-curve).

4.2.4 Progressive flooding, "SUCCESSIVE"

There are new possibilities to calculate progressive flooding. In this context, progressive flooding means calculating howwater spreads in the ship through openings in different phases. In the beginning of every phase, the program calculatesheight of the lowest edge of each opening from the internal or external water level. When the opening immerses, waterflows through the opening to the next compartment. If time is present in calculation (phases defined by time step indamage), volume of water through the opening is calculated by Bernoulli's equation or from the explicit rate. If time isnot present, the new volume in the progressively flooded compartment is determined by the water level on the other side


9 (272)


of the opening. Checking of heights of openings and calculation of new volumes of water in the progressively floodedcompartments is done at the equilibrium floating position of the previous phase. The other points of the GZ curve arecalculated assuming that volumes of water in the progressive flooded compartments remain unchanged.

Data needed for progressive flooding calculations are similar to those needed in the cross-flooding calculations (cross-flooding is progressive flooding). A compartment connection table is needed for defining connections between thecompartments and between the compartments and sea, see chapter 'Calculation of cross-flooding time'. The columnSTAGE is not necessary in this context.

Because the compartment connection table defines the connections, the only compulsory data in openings is position iftime is not present. If time is present, rate or area and water resistance coefficient should be added to the definition. Otherdata except OTYPE PIPE are ignored in this context.

If time is present, the user should give option MAXTIME in the calculation command, because using long time steps,calculation is rough and at the end of flooding, calculation may fluctuate endless around the final equilibrium. That is whythe program assigns MAXTIME=1h, if the option is missing.

Progressive flooding calculation starts with option PROGR;

CALC ini/dam ... PROGR

4.3 Definition of a Breach

In normal damages, the location, size and shape of the breach is unknown and the program assumes that the compartmentsare totally damaged. From the point of view of hydrostatic balance, this means that water occupies the submergedcompartments totally or up to the sea level, the compartments above the sea level are empty and all liquid loads in damagedcompartments are lost.

Defining the location and shape of the breach is installed in damage definition. A breach is a set of coordinates definingthe border of the opening or damage. The coordinates are given directly or they are intersection points of a penetrationand the compartments. The penetration has any shape and it breaks into the ship from the port side, starboard side orfrom the bottom.

All the time at each compartment, the program calculates how water is running in or out and how cargo is running outof the compartments trough the highest and lowest points of the breach. The liquid loads and sea water are never mixedwith each other but they form layers. When the breach is under water, the hydrostatic pressure at the highest point shouldbe the same as the pressure caused by water penetrated to the compartment plus liquid cargo having lesser density thansea water (if any) plus overpressure of gas (if any). If the liquid cargo is heavier than sea water, so much of it is left inthe compartment than the lowest point can keep behind. When the breach is initially above the sea level, cargo can runout of the compartment trough the lowest point. When the lowest point immerses, water penetrates to the compartment.Depending on the density of cargo, penetrating water pushes out all cargo or cargo remains below water. When the highestpoint immerses and the compartment is gastight, an air pocket will be formed. Pressurized gas or air escapes from thegastight compartment, if its pressure at the highest point of the breach exceeds the hydrostatic pressure. If the breachcomes out of water, inflooded water becomes liquid load provided the lowest point can keep anything behind.

The damage defined with a breach has flooding history. This means that nothing but amount of sea water can increasein the ship during flooding; what is lost of cargo or pressurized gas, is lost for ever. The history starts at zero heel andcontinues towards bigger listing. The next phase or stage (if any) continues from the situation which was at zero heel ofthe previous phase or stage and proceeds again towards bigger heels and so on.

This feature may be used, for example, for calculating outflow of oil when a tanker gets a bottom damage. One defines abreach to the bottom with few coordinates and the program calculates at every heel angle whether oil is flowing out of orwater is penetrating into the tanks trough the breach taking into account the hydrostatic balance at the highest point of thebreach. The specific lists show all necessary information about outflooded cargo, inflooded water and pressure in the tanks.

Another example how to use the feature is the 'spill out' calculations of the dredgers. One should define the breach to thetop of the hatch coaming (four points at the corners) or to the spillways and the program calculates the spillage of cargoand water as the ship heels. The cargo surface is assumed to be horizontal.


10 (272)


One should note that the concept 'breach' includes any kind of opening: damages, open top cargo holds, hatchways, airpipes, doors etc. The only restriction to use them is that the program handles the breaches in the way that they alwaysconnect compartments directly to the sea.

5 Liquid loadsThe effect of the movement of liquid loads is taken into account in calculating the floating position and stability of theship. The free liquid surface is always horizontal no matter how the ship is heeling or trimming.

In general it is quite seldom that liquids are used (or even should be used) in the definition of the initial conditions. Anexception is e.g. the calculation of damage stability for tankers, and the case where permanent ballast is used or there areheeling water tanks that are always (partly) filled.

What should be noted is that when liquids are used in the initial condition, and a corresponding GM limiting value isattained, the GM limiting value applies ONLY when the tanks in a loading case are really filled in the same way as in theinitial condition. If the filling of these tanks differs in a loading condition it is wrong to compare the GM of the loadingcondition to the calculated GM limiting value. This is why the regulations normally require a permeability of 0.95 (95 %)for all tanks and void spaces, without taking into account any possible outflow of liquid/cargo.

If a damaged room contains a liquid load, it is handled in the manual case as follows:

■ If the surface of the liquid is higher than that of the external water surface, the part of the liquid that is above theexternal water surface, runs out of the room gradually according to the number of phases defined. If the surface ofthe liquid is lower than that of the external water surface, the room is filled gradually according to the number ofphases defined.

■ Simultaneously with outrunning of cargo or inrunning of water, the density of cargo is gradually changed to that ofthe sea water.

■ In the final stage the liquid is totally replaced by sea water.

Note that a volume occupied by liquid cargo is calculated using the steel reduction of the room. If in some stageof calculation, the liquid load room will be damaged, its steel reduction is replaced by permeability. Because thepermeability often differs from the steel reduction, inflooded water occupies a different volume than the cargo. Thismay cause a contradiction, e.g. if a full ballast water room totally under water is damaged. In this case the floatingposition of the ship will be changed even if in reality nothing happens. Contradictions of this kind can be avoided if thesteel reductions are not replaced by permeabilities in the damaged liquid load rooms. The option NOPERM (see thecommand OPT) forces the program to use steel reductions in the damaged liquid load rooms instead of permeabilitiesduring whole the calculation process.

The volume of the liquid load in an intact room is kept constant during calculation.

When liquids are defined in the initial condition, the real physical behaviour/shift of the liquids are taken into accountwhen calculating the GZ curve. I.e. NAPA is using a real physical calculation instead of any approximation using e.g. afree surface moment correction distributed as sin(heel).

See also command GMRED in chapter "Definition" / "Initial Condition".

If liquid load rooms are damaged, the displacement of the ship is changed. The program offers two methods how tostudy the GZ-curves and related quantities: a method which represents the righting arm values with reference to theconstant initial displacement (constant displacement method) and a method which represents the righting arm valueswith reference to the changed displacement caused by outrunning liquid cargo (variable displacement method). In thevariable displacement method, the displacement is less than (or equal to) in the constant displacement method. Thereforethe variable displacement method results in higher righting arm values and in lower GM-requirements than the constantdisplacement method.


11 (272)


The user must be clearly aware of the following convention considering ships having liquid loads: The GM-value beforeflooding defined by the initial condition means GM taking into account the mass of liquid loads but not the effect ofthe free surfaces i.e. the uncorrected GM, also called GM-solid (liquid loads with 'frozen' surfaces). The lists and plotsusually show either corrected or uncorrected GM-requirements, according to the user's choice.

The displacement of the ship contains all masses that the ship is carrying including the liquid loads. Therefore, if onedefines two initial conditions having the same floating position, but one without liquid loads and the other one withliquid loads, then in the latter case, the center of gravity of the ship minus liquids differs from the center of gravity ofthe ship in the former case. This causes different behaviour of the damaged ship, if some liquid load room is damaged(even if the liquid load room is initially full).

6 Stability criteriaThe damage stability criteria and the methods concerning the corresponding calculation are explained in the StabilityCriteria part of these manuals.

7 Damage analysis

7.1 General logic

The commands of the damage analysis part can be grouped into four categories:

1. definition and update of data relevant to damage analysis,

2. calculation control (arguments)

3. output of lists and plots,

4. administration and auxiliary commands.

The above grouping reflects the working logic of damage analysis:

■ generation of material to be analyzed,■ calculation of hydrostatic data and storing it into the data base, (DB4)■ output of results in a desired way.

The material to be analyzed is a set of damage cases and a set of initial conditions. Each initial condition - damage casecombination forms a calculation case defining how the ship floats in the intact condition, and how it is damaged.

The calculation phase attaches the hull form to the calculation cases. Hydrostatic data calculated for each calculation caseare stored permanently in the data base (DB4). The stored data is up-to-date until something that the data is based on, ischanged i.e: - hull or compartment geometry- initial condition- damage case- calculation arguments.

Result lists and plots are generated from the valid hydrostatic data. At this stage the user has full freedom to generateor change aspects affecting the output: openings (flooding points), margin line, stability criteria or GM. Changing theseaspects does not result in the need of recalculation of hydrostatic data. The results can be output in different order andcontext as they were calculated, the only requirement is that the calculation cases have been calculated, and the storeddata are up-to-date.

The program has an automatic 'up to date' control on stored results. This means that the program refuses to handle obsoletecases and that it does not recalculate hydrostatic data without reason even if CALCULATE has been commanded.


12 (272)


8 DefinitionsThe purpose of the definition commands is to permanently store data into the database. The stored data are ready for usewhenever they are needed by simply referring to them by name. The current definition task is terminated if some datarecord not related to the current definition is entered. Misprints do not terminate the current definition task. The datarecords submitted to a definition are called 'parameter records' of the definition.

The initial conditions and damage cases are central things on which all work is based. The openings, margin lines,stability criteria, subdivisions and moments come in use as listing and plotting parameters. The damage case groupsand criterion groups are administrative things that make life easier in many commands and operations.

8.1 Initial condition (loading condition)

INIT name, text

Defines an initial condition with the given name and stores it in the database. The initial condition determines the initialfloating position of the ship, center of gravity of the ship and liquid loads, i.e. how the ship behaves in the intact condition.The parameter 'name' identifies the initial condition and it must not be name of any initial condition group. The optionalparameter 'text' is a description of the initial condition and it is used in result lists and plots.

There are four ways to define the initial condition:

1. to give the floating position of the ship (combination of T, TRIM, GM or KG) and the liquid loads if any,

2. to give the displacement and center of gravity of the ship (combination of DISP, CG) and liquid loads if any,

3. to give the displacement and trim (combination of DISP and TRIM)

4. to refer to a loading condition of LD.

It is not allowed to mix these alternatives with each other. In the case T, TRIM, always give GM or KG and in the caseDISP, always give CG; otherwise, the situation is undefined.

8.1.1 Definition commands

The initial floating position and rooms filled with liquids can be defined with the following parameters.

Draught

T t;

Initial draught of the ship. No default.

Trim

TRIM tr;

Initial trim of the ship (m). Default 0.0.

TRA tr;

Initial trim of the ship in degrees. Alternative of TRIM. Default 0.0.

Heel

HEEL a;

Initial angle of heel of the ship (deg). Default 0.

Displacement

DISPL d;


13 (272)


Initial displacement of the ship. Used in connection with CG-record. No default.

Center of gravity

CG (x,y,z);

Center of gravity of the ship. If this record is given, the initial floating position is that which results from the equilibriumcondition, in which the mass center and the center of buoyancy lies on the same vertical line.

GM

GM gm;

GM of the ship in intact condition. Used if the alternative T, TRIM is given.

If only a limiting/required GM value (based on the relevant criteria) is looked for, the given GM (or KG) has none, ora very small influence. Regardless of the given GM (or KG) NAPA should end up with practically the same requiredminimum GM. The only influence the GM could have is concerning the longitudinal stability. If e.g. the initial GM isextremely high, the ship will also behave slightly differently when the ship is heeled, i.e. it will be "stiffer". The differencecan be seen in the trim angle at different heeling angle, normally resulting in a very small difference in the GZ curve.

If on the other hand a specific "loading case" is checked against the relevant criteria, the correct GM (or KG) shouldbe defined.

The GM given in the initial condition is the uncorrected GM. If liquid loads are defined in the initial condition this GM isthen as default automatically corrected as a result of the free surfaces (See also below for the handling of the GMRED).The GM in the initial condition is therefore equivalent with the GM0 of a loading condition in LD.

KG

KG gm;

Height of the center of gravity of the ship. This is alternative to GM and should be used instead of GM whenever theazimuth angle is not equal to zero.

Azimuth angle

AZI a;

This command defines the stability axis other than the x-axis that will be used in all calculations of this initial condition.All stability quantities are calculated in the plane perpendicular to the stability axis. The input and output heeling angles areinterpreted as angles around the stability axis and input and output trims are trims along the stability axis if not otherwisestated. The argument 'a' is azimuth angle (deg). The stability axis makes an angle 'a' with the x-axis on the xy-plane. 'a'is positive towards the +y-axis and negative towards the -y-axis.

Note! If azimuth is not zero, GM is not accepted for definition of height of the center of gravity. KG or CG shouldbe used instead.

Rooms with liquid loads

LIQUID room, VOL=v, DENSITY=rho, LOAD=load;

or

LIQUID room, WEIGHT=w, DENSITY=rho, LOAD=load;

Add a liquid load into a room. There are three ways to express the amount of load: by filling degree (degree between 0and 1), by volume or by weight. Density is taken from the current arrangement or given explicitly.

Calculation of volume which is occupied by cargo depends on the steel reduction of the room. Whenever liquid loadrooms are damaged, steel reduction is replaced by permeability and cargo occupies a different volume than in the intactrooms (see also OPTION NOPERM).

Sliding cargo


14 (272)


The command SLCAR defines sliding cargo. Sliding cargo is solid, liquid or something between. Sliding cargo has thefollowing properties:

■ Sliding cargo may run out of the compartment over the lower edge of the breach, if there is any defined in thedamage.

■ Sliding cargo may not run out of the compartment through openings (e.g. in the progressive stage of flooding).■ Seawater and cargo are not mixing, but water, if any, flows on the cargo surface.■ The shifting angle of the cargo surface in transverse and longitudinal direction may differ from the horizontal

according to the following law: ac = r*a - d where 'ac' is shifting angle of the cargo surface in any direction, 'a' is angle of the ship to the horizontal in anydirection, 'r' is ratio between 0 and 1 and 'd' is angle difference. If the angle 'd' is greater than angle 'r*a', i.e. -d<r*a<d, the cargo surface is not shifted (ac=0).

The command SLCAR is like the command LIQ with three new options ARAT=r, ADIF=d and OUTFL=c:

SLCAR room FILL=f DENS=dns LOAD=ld ARAT=r ADIF=d, OUTFL=c

SLCAR room VOL=v DENS=dns LOAD=ld ARAT=r ADIF=d, OUTFL=c

SLCAR room WEI=w DENS=dns LOAD=ld ARAT=r ADIF=d, OUTFL=c

There is a possibility to load sea water onto sliding cargo. In defining an initial condition, the command SLCAR, set slidingcargo into a room, accepts the option ADDW=vol which adds 'vol' cubic meter sea water onto the sliding cargo, e.g.

SLCAR HOLD1 VOL=550 DENS=1.9 LOAD=MUD ADDW=120

The options 'ARAT=r' and 'ADIF=d' define the components 'r' and 'd' of the shifting law. Default for 'r' is 1 and for 'd'is 0, i.e. the surface is horizontal. The option OUTFL has two alternatives: OUTFL=Y, outflow over the lower edge ofthe breach may occur (default) or OUTFL=N, outflow may not occur. The other options have the same meaning as inthe command LIQL.

The following examples illustrate the shifting law:

ARAT=1.0, ADIF=0.0 cargo is liquid, surface is horizontal

ARAT=0.0, ADIF=0.0 cargo is solid, surface not shifted

ARAT=0.5, ADIF=0.0 shifting angle of surface is half of angle of heel and trim

ARAT=0.0, ADIF=15.0 surface is at an angle of 15 deg to the horizontal, but between -15 and 15 degsurface is not shifted

ARAT=0.4, ADIF=5.0 between -12.5 and 12.5 degrees, surface is not shifted, but at greater angles,surface is at an angle of 0.4*a-5 to the horizontal.

GMRED method

This GMRED command (in the initial condition) is an option and command that could cause confusion. Please thereforelook carefully through the explanation below. In general one can say that there is no need (and there should be no need)to use this command at all. If liquid loads are used in the definition of the initial condition, NAPA will automatically takeinto account and calculate the influence of the shifting liquids. As default this is made in the following way:

1. The GZ curve of the initial condition (intact case) is first calculated

2. Then the derivative/slope/angle of the GZ curve is calculated at a zero (0) degree heeling angle.

3. The difference of the given GM and the slope of the GZ curve is then considered as the GM-reduction.


15 (272)


The calculation in 3) above is actually independent of the given GM. With any randomly selected given GM this methodshould give the same GM-reduction. What could be good to also remember here is to use enough calculation angles (e.g.Heel= 0, 1, 3, 5, 7, 10, ….) in order to achieve an accurate shape of the GZ curve close to the upright position.

The command GMRED has 3 alternative ways to be given.

1. GMRED SLOPE, which in fact is the default method and explained above. This method is physically the mostcorrect as it takes into account the influence of the shifting liquid directly on the shape of the GZ curve.

2. GMRED FRSM which is an optional method of I) where the GMRED is calculated from the moment of inertiaof the free surfaces of the liquids defined in the LIQ commands of the initial condition. This is more in line withhow the free surfaces are handled in a loading condition (when method ALL REAL is used). In normal cases thismethod should result in a GM-reduction very close to method I), but if the tanks are almost full or almost empty, orthe ship has a large trim, there can be differences between method I) and II)

3. GMRED can also be given explicitly. This method should though be used in very rear cases and has more anacademic use, as the given GMRED could be far away from the realistic values. A given GMRED value will notaffect the GZ curve in any way, as NAPA always calculates the GZ as a real physical lever arm taking into accountthe solid masses and possible shifting masses (i.e. liquids). The GMRED (either calculated or explicit) will only beused to derive the MINGM0.

As a summary methods 1 and 2 above are only controlling the way the GMRED is calculated as method 3 is a way tooverride the calculated result by giving an explicit value and should normally NOT be used.

Lightship weight

LW (clwx,clwy,clwz);

Center of gravity of the lightship. Normally the program calculates the center of the lightship from the displacement andliquid loads, but if exact unity with LD is needed, the LW command may be used.

Other commands

GRO See the explanation text for GRO in damage definition

ADDW=vol adds water to the cargo room.

ODR defines order of cargo and water: ORD=CW, cargo lower, water upper;ORD=WC, water lower, cargo upper. If ORD is missing, the higher density islower.

SKIP cancels the definition of initial condition

OK Explicit end of definition.

8.1.1.1 Examples

INIT MAX 'max load, GM-reserve 0.1'; T 7.1; GM 1.7;

INIT FULL 'full stores'; DISP 12600; CG (52.62,0.0,13.21); LIQUID R10, FILL=0.6, DENS=0.92; LIQUID R20, VOL=112;

8.1.2 Reference to a loading case

LOAD name [INDEPENDENT[


16 (272)


The referenced loading case from LD defines the initial condition. No further data needed. It is possible to use a loadingcase as an initial condition, if the stability calculation is properly done in LD and the data is stored in the data base. Notethat the initial condition is a direct copy from LD, nothing is recalculated in DA.

The system checks the date of the referenced loading condition and refuses to use the initial condition in calculation andoutput, if the date of the loading condition is younger than that of the initial condition. The only way to continue withthis initial condition is to redefine it.

The option INDEPENDENT makes the initial condition independent of the original source, i.e. changes in the loadingcondition do not make the initial condition out of date.

If an initial condition of DA refers to a loading condition of LD where YREF is ON (no steady heeling), the asymmetryof the buoyant hull is taken into account also in DA.

8.2 Damage case

DAMAGE name, text, TAB=model, WTARR, GET=dam

Defines a damage case with the given name and stores it in the database. The parameter 'name' identifies the damage caseand the optional parameter 'text' describes the damage case in plain text (description) and it is used in result lists and plots.The name of the damage case must not be the same as the name of any damage case group.

The damage case determines how the ship is damaged (by a list of damaged compartments) and how flooding proceeds(by dividing the case into several stages & phases). A progressive flooding stage is added after the equilibrium conditionautomatically, if asked for before the CALCULATE-command by OPTION PROGRESSIVE; the damage case definitionitself does not contain any data concerning progressive flooding. The starting point for the progressive flooding stage isthe last stage of the damage case definition, i.e. the compartments flooded in the last stage.

Options:

text Descriptive text of the damage. Can also be given with the command TEXT (seebelow).

TAB=model Start definition by the help of the table editor. If the part '=model' is missing, thestandard model table DAM*DEFMODEL is used, otherwise the given modeltable (prefix DAM* assumed) is read from the database. If the damage will beredefined, the previous contents of damage are loaded to the table.

WTARR (only in connection with the option TAB) show all nondamaged compartmentsfrom the watertight arrangement at the end of the definition table. Default: onlydamaged compartments are shown in the definition table.

GET=dam Load the given damage to the work area and continue its definition. If thedamage name 'dam' begins with prefix 'DAM*',the damage is fetched from tableDAM*dam.

DELETE DAM dgr D DB1 removes the duplicate damages from a damage group. The damages are identicalif their internal formats are identical, i.e. the damages are defined exactly in thesame way. The result of the command is a damage group having no duplicatedamages. The text description of the group (DES DGR) shows the removeddamages with preceding minus sign '-'. dgr: name of the damage group DB1:(optional) the duplicate damages are removed also from the database.


Description

TEXT text

Replace the descriptive text of the damage by a new one (option text of the command DAM).


17 (272)


Flooding stage

STAGE id

Start new flooding stage. The identification 'id' is either a string or a number. The stages are treated in calculations andoutput in their definition order. If the damage case contains only one stage, this command is optional.

Intermediate phases

PHASES n VSTEP

Calculate n intermediate phases in the current stage. Default 0. Note that the number of phases is valid only in the stagewhere it is given, e.g. the command sequence STAGE 1; PHA 3; ... STAGE 2; ... means that stage 1 has three intermediatephases but not stage 2.

Normally, in the intermediate phases water is added to the damaged compartments by dividing the height differencebetween the lowest point of the compartments and the sea level into equidistant steps. The option VSTEP adds water tothe damaged compartments by dividing the volume difference into equal steps. The volume difference is the volume ofwater in the end of the stage minus the volume in the beginning of the stage. If, in the end of the stage, the head of waterin the compartment is equal to the sea level, the added volume may change between the phases because the water linemoves from phase to phase.

Optionally, use an alternative flooding method for rooms open to sea in the intermediate phases. By using this method,the amount of water is not kept constant but it varies with the angle of heel in such a way that in the i'th phase, the waterlevel is i'th part of the distance between the equilibrium sea level and the lowest point of the room at the current angleof heel. In VSTEP mode, the volume below the equilibrium sea level is divided into parts. This method is available onlyfor rooms that do not have a liquid load or if flooding is not controlled by other means (FILL, VOL, PUMP, ACH, ACV,ACVH, AIRP, PRESSURE, RATE, VSTEP=v, BREACH).

PHASES TSTEP=t

Calculate phases in the given time interval. Intermediate phases are generated only if at least one compartment is fillingwith rate (see option RATE=r of the command ROOM). The number of phases is undefined until ended flooding. Thetime interval 't' can be given as:

■ n s : interval n seconds, e.g. 1800 s■ n min: interval n minutes, e.g. 30 min

ROOM

The command defines the damaged space and how it is flooded. The damaged space is a set of compartments inside thewatertight hull. The way how the compartments are flooded is defined by options given in the end of the command line.The compartments having different options must be separated into different ROOM-commands; the number of ROOM-commands is not limited.

ROOM space, space, space ... FILL=r, VOL=v, PERM=p, PUMP=v, ACV=v, ACH=h, ACVH=h, AIRP=(ap,av), PRESSURE=ap, RATE=r,VSTEP=v, BREACH=br

Please see the detailed command syntax explanation

Extent

Extent of the damage is used in calculating estimate of outflooded cargo (LIST OFL) or as additional information in somelists (at the moment OLIST REPORT). If extent is not given, the default extent for the estimate of outflooded cargo is thewhole damage and, for the REPORT list, the default values of the longitudinal extent are the extreme x-coordinates of thedamaged rooms and the default value of the penetration is B/5. This parameter does not effect the calculations in any sense.

EXTENT xmin,xmax,ymin,ymax,zmin,zmax;

Extreme x-, y- and z-coordinates of the damage for estimating volume cargo flown out of the damaged rooms. If thesedata are missing, whole contents is assumed to flown out.

EXTENT xmin,xmax,p;


18 (272)


(Used as additional list information only). Extent of damage by explicit numbers; xmin, xmax state longitudinal extentof the damage and p states penetration.

EXTENT p;

(Used as additional list information only). Penetration is given explicitly, longitudinal extent equals to the extreme x-coordinates of the damaged rooms.

EXTENT text1,text2;

(Used as additional list information only). Penetration in plain text; text1, text2 are two text lines inserted in the list (max.24 characters each).

Side of the calculation

SIDE s;

Normally, the program calculates the stability curve to the weakest side of the ship, i.e to the side to which the shipspontaneously starts to go from the upright. This decision is made in every phase and stage of every damage case. Thecommand SIDE fixes the listing side for all phases and stages of the damage case. Note that this command overrules theeffect of the general forcing command FORCE SB, FORCE PS.

SIDE PS

Force listing to the starboard side.

SIDE SB

Force listing to the port side.

Relevant criteria

In all calculations of stability criteria of this damage case, the set of relevant criteria is replaced by a set modified by thiscommand. If the command is missing, the set of the relevant criteria of the arguments is used as such.

RCR crit, crit...;

Define a new set. The new set is either a fixed set of criteria (no one of the names is ALL) or a set depending on thecurrent set of the arguments (some name is ALL). The argument 'crit' is name of a criterion, name of a criterion groupor ALL. The following alternatives are available for 'crit':

ALL all relevant criteria from the arguments

-ALL no one from the arguments

name add the named criterion or criterion group to the set

+name same as 'name'

-name remove the named criterion or criterion group from the set.

Relevant openings

In all calculations of this damage case, the set of relevant openings is replaced by a set modified by this command. If thecommand is missing, the set of the relevant openings of the arguments is used as such.

ROP ope, ope...

Define a new set. The new set is either a fixed set of openings (no one of the names is ALL) or a set depending on thecurrent set of the arguments (some name is ALL). The argument 'ope' is name of an opening, name of an opening groupor ALL. The following alternatives are available for 'ope':

ALL all relevant openings from the arguments

-ALL no one from the arguments

name add the named opening or opening group to the set


19 (272)



-name remove the named opening or opening group from the set.

Initial condition

In all calculation and output functions, this damage case uses a damage dependent set of initial conditions. If this commandis missing, the set of initial conditions is taken as such from the case argument 'init/dam' of the given calculation or outputcommand.

INIT ini,ini...

Define a new set. The new set is either a fixed set of initial conditions (no one of the names is ALL) or a set depending onthe current case argument 'init/dam' of the given command (some name is ALL). The argument 'ini' is name of an initialcondition, name of an initial condition group or ALL. The following alternatives are available for 'ini':

ALL all initial conditions from the case argument 'init/dam'

-ALL no one from the case argument 'init/dam'

name add the named initial condition or initial condition group to the set


-name remove the named initial condition or initial condition group from the set.

Type of the damage

TYPE type;

NORM normal damage (default).

PROG Progressive flooding occurs. The program calculates and adds, after the final stageof flooding, an extra stage called PROGRESSIVE, even progressive floodingthrough openings is not taking place or the calculation mode PROGRESSIVE isnot set.

ACCW seawater accumulation assumed. The program adds, after the final stage offlooding, an extra stage called ACCWATER, where accumulation is assumedto happen. The stage is added even there is no compartment accumulating water(ACH=*, ACV=* and ACVH=* missing).

In case both accumulation of water on deck and progressive flooding are studied simultaneously, both PROG andACCW are calculated in the same additional stage called PROGRESSIVE.

Grounding data

Please see the detailed explanation in section Grounding information.

Floating position after flooding

GRF ta tf heel xmin,xmax

GRF ta tf heel l

These data define how the ship is aground by defining the floating position after ended flooding. The point of contact (xand y) is calculated from the moment balance, depth of water from the floating position and the z-coordinate of the pointof contact is assumed to be on the bottom of the ship.

The arguments 'ta, tf' are draughts at AP and FP (m). The argument 'heel' is heeling angle of the ship (deg). The optionalarguments 'xmin xmax' or 'l' define the range of the contact; xmin and xmax are the minimum and maximum x-coordinatesof the contact (m) and l is the length of contact centered at the point of contact so that xmin=x-l/2 and xmax=x+l/2. Range


20 (272)


is needed to distribute the grounding force in longitudinal strength calculations. Default range is 10% of the referencelength, xmin=x-0.05*lref, xmax=x+0.05*lref.

Breach

The command defines a breach and adds to the damage the compartments that are in way of the penetration. The penetrationcomes from the port side, starboard side or bottom, opens the compartments that are in the current arrangement, insideDAMHULL and totally or partly inside the penetration and connects the breach to the selected compartments. If thecompartments c1, c2 and c3 are in way of the penetration, this command has the same effect as the command ROOMc1,c2,c3 BREACH=(br.def).

Alternatives of the command are:

BREACH P=y x1,z1,x2,z2,...

The penetration comes from the port side until y and its cross section is x1,z1,x2,z2,...

BREACH S=y x1,z1,x2,z2,...

The penetration comes from the starboard side until y and its cross section is x1,z1,x2,z2,...

BREACH B=z x1,y1,x2,y2,...

The penetration comes from the bottom up to z and its cross section is x1,y1,x2,y2,...

BREACH table

A table is referred that should contain the same information as in one of the three first alternatives: column X, columnY (alt. 3), column Z (alt. 1 and 2) and quantity PENETRATION 'P=y' (alt. 1), quantity PENETRATION 'S=y' (alt. 2) orquantity PENETRATION 'B=z' (alt. 3).

Penetration

The command adds to the damage the compartments which are in way of the penetration. The penetration comes from theport side, starboard side or bottom and opens the compartments which are in the current arrangement, inside DAMHULLand totally or partly inside the penetration. If the compartments c1, c2 and c3 are in way of the penetration, this commandhas the same effect as the command ROOM c1,c2,c3.

PENETRATION P=y x1,z1,x2,z2,...

The penetration comes from the port side until y and its cross section is x1,z1,x2,z2,...

PENETRATION S=y x1,z1,x2,z2,...

The penetration comes from the starboard side until y and its cross section is x1,z1,x2,z2,...

PENETRATION B=z x1,y1,x2,y2,...

The penetration comes from the bottom up to z and its cross section is x1,y1,x2,y2,...

PENETRATION table

A table is referred that should contain the same information as in one of the three first alternatives: column X, columnY (alt. 3), column Z (alt. 1 and 2) and quantity PENETRATION 'P=y' (alt. 1), quantity PENETRATION 'S=y' (alt. 2) orquantity PENETRATION 'B=z' (alt. 3).

NOTE! The difference between breach and penetration!

The difference between breach and penetration, in short, is that

■ penetration defines a damage■ breach defines a geometry for damage

Penetration defines where we have damage. After this compartments taking part to this damage are damaged and geometryof penetration is not anymore used. This means that damaged rooms are used same way as if they would have been defined


21 (272)


traditional way in damage command. So after penetration the geometry of penetration is not used in calculations anddamaged compartments are open to sea.

In case of breach NAPA takes all the time into account the geometry of breach. Interesting points are the lowest and thehighest points of the breach because those points define what comes in or out and when and where it happens.

For example if you have a side tank and damage is defined above water line:

■ In case of penetration water is flooding in.■ In case of breach water is not flooding in unless some heeling happens. If you have some load in this tank it can

come out (above the breach).

Draught range

Calculation of damages may be limited to a certain draught range, i.e. if the initial draught is outside the draught limitsdefined in the damage, the case is not calculated and it does not contribute to any result of damage stability. The damagedefinition command

TLIM tmin,tmax

specifies the draught limits.

Significant wave height

SWH height

Damage-specific significant wave height may be given in a damage definition and it overrules the wave height of thecurrent arguments.

Compartment permeabilities

The command changes permeabilities of compartments. The command effects in the same way as the option PERM of thecommand ROOM. The default permeabilities come from the arrangement. The permeabilities of this command overrulethe permeabilities of the command ROOM.

The syntax of the command is:

PERM comp=perm, comp=perm, ...

comp=perm : assign permeability to the given compartment. If p is a single number,permeability is constant within the whole compartment. The format(p1,z1,p2,z2,...pn) or p1,z1,p2,z2,...pn) or (Z,p1,z1,p2,z2,...pn) means thatpermeability varies as function of height: p1 below z1, p2 between z1 and z2 andso on. Heights should be in ascending order. In the special format (p1,*,p2,...),the asterisk (*) refers to the height of the solid load of the loading condition, p1is permeability within the load and p2 is permeability of the empty space abovethe load. This format is possible only if the initial condition refers to a loadingcondition and the compartment(s) there is (are) loaded with a solid load. Theformat (T,p1,t1,p2,t2,...pn) means that permeability varies as function of initialdraught: if the T of the initial condition is lesser than t1, permeability is equal top1, if the initial T is between t1 and t2, permeability is equal to p2 and so on. TheT-values t1, t2, ... should be in ascending order. A warning arises if at least onez-coordinate where variable permeability changes is outside the vertical range ofthe compartment. This is probably an error because the points where permeabilitychanges are connected to geometry or loading of the compartment and should notbe outside the compartment.

Other commands

RENAME The command assigns a new name to the damage during definition process. Theonly effect of the command is that the damage will be saved to the data base withthe new name. Syntax of the command is RENAME newname text


22 (272)


where 'newname' is the new name of the damage and 'text' is optional descriptivetext for the damage. The 'newname' must not be name of any damage group.

GET The command reads the named damage to the working area of damage definition,renames the current damage and lets the user to continue its definition.

SAVE The command writes the damage to the data base without leaving the damagedefinition task. The name of the saved damage is as given or, if the option 'name'is missing, the current name is used.

DES The command lists the description of the damage in alphanumeric input format.

SKIP Cancel definition.


8.2.1.1 Explanation of ROOM syntax

space Name of a compartment, name of a compartment (room) group or temporarycombined object. The compartments must be totally inside the watertight hull.A temporary combined object is a list of compartments put in brackets (comp,comp, ...). The temporary combined objects have the property that they areflooded with the common surface and the options concern the totality of thecompartments not each compartment separately. The general principle howthe compartments are flooded is that water makes a common surface within allcompartments. However, if originally a compartment contains liquid load or anoption specifies an exceptional way of flooding, then water makes own surfacein the compartment. The compartments belonging to some temporary combinedobject do not take part in the general common surface but they take part in thecommon surface of that temporary combined object. The attribute INDIVIDUALattached to the name of a compartment, as name/INDIVIDUAL, forces own watersurface to that compartment.

FILL=r Filling degree of the compartments at the end of the stage. "Degree" is either areal number between 0 and 1, EMPTY or FULL. Default is FULL (or 1.0). Theoption defines the upper filling limit of flooded water, i.e. the level of water at theend of the stage is at the given filling or at the sea level, whichever is lesser. Thevolume of water is kept constant at every heeling and trimming position of theship. Causes own water surfaces.

VOL=v Like FILL=r but, instead of filling degree, maximum volume (m3) of water isdefined.

PERM=p Permeability of the compartments if it is other than that defined for thecompartments in the ship model. If p is a single number, permeability is constantwithin the whole compartment. The format (p1,z1,p2,z2,...pn) means thatpermeability varies as function of height: p1 below z1, p2 between z1 and z2 andso on. Heights should be in ascending order. In the special format (p1,*,p2,...),the asterisk (*) refers to the height of the solid load of the loading condition, p1is permeability within the load and p2 is permeability of the empty space abovethe load. This format is possible only if the initial condition refers to a loadingcondition and the compartment(s) there is (are) loaded with a solid load. The format (T,p1,t1,p2,t2,...pn) means that permeability varies as function ofinitial draught: if the T of the initial condition is lesser than t1, permeability isequal to p1, if the initial T is between t1 and t2, permeability is equal to p2 and soon. The T-values t1, t2, ... should be in ascending order.


23 (272)


The column PERM of the ship model is suitable for assigning default values forpermeabilities represented by a single number. Default permeabilities that arefunctions of height or draught, may be entered to the system from the columnIPERM. The format of the permeability function is the same as in the commandsROOM and PERM of damage definition (brackets not needed). Also singlenumbers may be entered via the column IPERM. The permeabilities are assignedin the following order: command PERM of damage definition, option PERMof the command ROOM of damage definition, column IPERM of the currentarrangement, column PERM of the current arrangement, perm=1.0

PUMP=v Amount of liquid (m3) pumped to the compartments. If 'v' is a single number,liquid is sea water. If 'v' is a number pair (vol,dens), the first number is volumeand the second one density t/m3. If 'v' is pair (vol,load), the density is taken fromthe 'load'. Causes own water surfaces.

ACV=v Amount of water (m3) accumulated in the compartments. The option defines aconstant volume of water that is accumulated in the compartments in additionto water otherwise flooded in the compartments. Causes own water surfaces.(Volume v may be negative, too). Note the influence of the options VDISP and CDISP: in case CDISP is usedthe GZ curve is calculated taking into account the initial (constant) displacement.In case option VDISP is used, the displacement used to derive the GZ curve istaking into account the addition of water on the deck i.e. both the in-flooded waterand the accumulated water. As VDISP in most cases gives a higher displacementand therefore lower GZ values the VDISP option can be considered to give moreconservative results. It is up to the user to decide which method to use.

ACV=SEM The main result of calculation is the maximum volume of accumulated water inthe specified space which will not capsize the ship but any greater volume willcapsize it. The GZ curve of such a case has zero maximum height and zero rangeprovided no unprotected opening is submerged before accumulated water capsizesthe ship.

ACV=* like ACV=v, but the volume of accumulated water is calculated as v =(bottomarea)*(height h), where h is a function of the significant wave height,SWH, and the residual freeboard in way of damage, FRB. If FRB<0.3m, h=0.5m;if FRB>2.0m, h=0.0m; if 0.3m<FRB<2.0m, h by linear interpolation between0.5m and 0.0m. If SWH<1.5m, h=0.0m; if SWH>4.0m, h as determined by FRB;if 1.5m<SWH<4.0m, h by linear interpolation between 0.0 and h as determinedby FRB. The accumulated water is added to the compartment(s) in an extra stagecalled ACCWATER, placed automatically after the final stage where the effect ofaccumulated water is not taken into account and where FRB is calculated. Note the influence of the options VDISP and CDISP: in case CDISP is usedthe GZ curve is calculated taking into account the initial (constant) displacement.In case option VDISP is used, the displacement used to derive the GZ curve istaking into account the addition of water on the deck i.e. both the in-flooded waterand the accumulated water. As VDISP in most cases gives a higher displacementand therefore lower GZ values the VDISP option can be considered to give moreconservative results. It is up to the user to decide which method to use.

In case both accumulation of water on deck and progressive flooding are studied simultaneously, both PROG andACCW are calculated in the same additional stage called PROGRESSIVE.

ACVH=h like ACV but the volume of accumulated water is calculated as v =(bottomarea)*(height h), h in metres.


24 (272)


Note the influence of the options VDISP and CDISP: in case CDISP is usedthe GZ curve is calculated taking into account the initial (constant) displacement.In case option VDISP is used, the displacement used to derive the GZ curve istaking into account the addition of water on the deck i.e. both the in-flooded waterand the accumulated water. As VDISP in most cases gives a higher displacementand therefore lower GZ values the VDISP option can be considered to give moreconservative results. It is up to the user to decide which method to use.

ACVH=* same as ACV=*.

ACH=h height (m) of accumulated water in the compartments. The level of accumulatedwater is at the given height above the lowest point of the damaged margin line orabove the sea level, whichever is higher. The amount of accumulated water varieswith heeling and trimming. The extent of damage is taken from the commandEXTENT, or if it is missing, from the extreme coordinates of the damagedcompartments. The height h may be negative, too. The case h<0 means thatoverpressure pushes water out of compartments. Causes own water surfaces. Note the influence of the options VDISP and CDISP: in case CDISP is usedthe GZ curve is calculated taking into account the initial (constant) displacement.In case option VDISP is used, the displacement used to derive the GZ curve istaking into account the addition of water on the deck i.e. both the in-flooded waterand the accumulated water. As VDISP in most cases gives a higher displacementand therefore lower GZ values the VDISP option can be considered to give moreconservative results. It is up to the user to decide which method to use.

ACH=* like ACH=h, but the height of accumulated water is a function of the significantwave height, SWH, and the residual freeboard in way of damage, FRB,as specified above by ACV=*. The accumulated water is added to thecompartment(s) in an extra stage called ACCWATER, placed automatically afterthe final stage where the effect of accumulated water is not taken into account andwhere FRB is calculated. Note the influence of the options VDISP and CDISP: in case CDISP is usedthe GZ curve is calculated taking into account the initial (constant) displacement.In case option VDISP is used, the displacement used to derive the GZ curve istaking into account the addition of water on the deck i.e. both the in-flooded waterand the accumulated water. As VDISP in most cases gives a higher displacementand therefore lower GZ values the VDISP option can be considered to give moreconservative results. It is up to the user to decide which method to use.

AIRP=(ap,av) air pocket in the compartments. An air pocket is a space from where air cannotescape. Pressure and volume of air in the compartments changes according tothe depth of the compartments. ap: overpressure of air in the pocket (kPa). Theprogram assumes that the normal pressure of the atmosphere is 101.325 kPa. av:volume of air in the pocket (m3).

AIRP=ap as AIRP=(ap,av) but the air volume 'av' is calculated as av=(total net volume)-(liq.cargo volume)

PRESSURE=ap constant overpressure in the compartments (kPa). As the option AIRP but air ispumped to the compartments for keeping the internal pressure unchanged. Volumeof air or penetrating water changes according to the hydrostatic pressure.

RATE=r filling rate of the compartments (m3/h). The option defines how fast sea wateror cargo is running in or out of the compartments. 'r' is always positive and thedirection of running depends of the initial condition, damage and height of theexternal water surface. The option is ignored if the phases are not defined bytimestep (see command PHASES).

VSTEP=v: water is flooded into (out of) the compartments in equal volume steps. Theprogram calculates for the stage as many intermediate phases as flooding in


25 (272)


steps requires. Different compartments may be flooded in different steps. Thecompartments not equipped with this option are flooded in steps as specified bythe command PHASE. The number of phases in the stage is the number of stepsneeded to flood all compartments until the end or the number of phases specifiedby the command PHASE, whichever is greater. Causes own water surfaces. 'v' is the change of volume (>0) between the phases (m3).

BREACH=br Breach braking the compartments. where 'br' is one of the following alternatives: (P=y,x1,z1,x2,z2,...) (S=y,x1,z1,x2,z2,...) (B=z,x1,y1,x2,y2,...) (x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2,...) table The three first alternatives define a penetration breaking into the ship from theport side until y (P=y), from the starboard side until y (S=y) and from the bottomuntil z (B=z). The coordinate pairs define the cross section of the penetration.The fourth alternative defines the breach directly as three-dimensional curve. Thealternative 'table' refers to a table that should contain the same information as oneof the four first alternatives: column X, column Y (alt. 3 and 4), column Z (alt.1, 2 and 4), quantity PENETRATION 'P=y' (alt. 1), quantity PENETRATION'S=y' (alt. 2) or quantity PENETRATION 'B=z' (alt. 3). If the compartments of theROOM-command form a temporary combined object (compartments in brackets),the compartments are flooded as if there would be no bulkheads between them, i.e.the highest and lowest points of the breach are common to all compartments. If the compartments are not in brackets, the compartments are treated as if thebulkheads between the compartments would be intact, i.e. the program calculatesfor each compartment own highest and lowest point. Examples: Bottom damage on the port side penetrating up to 2 m. ROOM BT1P,BT2P,TK1P,TK2P, BREACH=(B=2,125,41,146,41,146,0, 125,0) Cargo hold open on the top. ROOM HOLD1, BREACH=(22,8,7.5,32,8,7.5,32,-8, 7.5,22,-8,7.5) Hatch and room open to sea. DAM HOPPER STA 1 ROOM HOPPER @@ HOPPER flooded over the hatch edge STA 2 ROOM HOPPER BREACH=OFF @@ HOPPER open to sea

8.2.1.2 Grounding information

GRO


26 (272)


The command GRO defines how the ship is aground. The number of contact points is one or two. In the one point contact,there is one fixed point around which the ship is free to rotate in all directions. In the two point contact, the ship can berotated only around the axis going through the contact points. When the heeling angle of the ship changes, the number ofcontacts may change, too. There are two alternative ways to give the grounding data: the floating position after groundingor the coordinates of the points of contact. The points of contact may be situated anywhere in the ship and the groundmay have any penetration.

The alternatives

GRO 1F ta tf heel xmin,xmax tide=td time=tm

GRO 1F ta tf heel l

define one point grounding by the floating position.

ta draught aft

tf draught fore

heel angle of heel (degrees)

xmin minimum x of the contact

xmax maximum x of the contact

l length of the contact

tide height of tide. The current depth of water at the point of contact is d+td where d isnormal depth of water and td is tide.

time is an alternative way to give tide provided the tide is defined as function of time,see LD.DEFTIDE. Time 'tm' may be given in seconds (pure number xxx ornumber ending with s, xxxs), in minutes (xxxmin) or in hours (xxxh).

The alternatives

GRO 1C x y z d xmin xmax tide=td time=tm

GRO 1C x y z d l

define one point grounding by the point of contact. The arguments x, y, z, d, xmin, xmax and l are:

x x coordinate of the contact

y y coordinate of the contact

z z coordinate of the contact

d depth of water at the contact

xmin minimum x of the contact

xmax maximum x of the contact

l length of the contact

Two point grounding by the floating position is defined by the command

GRO 2F ta tf heel x1 x2 l1 l2

where:

ta draught aft

tf draught fore

heel angle of heel (degrees)


27 (272)


x1 and x2 x-coordinates of the contacts in the ship coordinate system (m). It is assumed thatthe contacts have same y-coordinates and the z-coordinates are on the bottom ofthe ship.

l1 and l2 ranges of the contacts at x1 and x2 (m). The ranges are centered at x1 and x2. Thedefault ranges are 10% of the reference length, l1=l2=0.1*LREF.

Two point grounding by the points of contact is defined by the command

GRO 2C x1 y1 z1 d1 x2 y2 z2 d2 l1 l2 tide=td time=tm

where

x1, y1 and z1 coordinates of the first point of contact in the ship coordinate system (m)

d1 depth of water at the first point of contact (m)

x2, y2 and z2 coordinates of the second point of contact in the ship coordinate system (m).

d2 depth of water at the second point of contact (m)

l1 and l2 ranges of the contacts at x1 and x2 (m).The ranges are centered at x1 and x2. Thedefault ranges are 10% of the reference length, l1=l2=0.1*LREF.

8.2.2 Examples

DAMAGE C1 'machine room & double bottom damaged, counterfill to BW-tank' STAGE 1; ROOM R1,FILL=0.5; ROOM R2; PHASES 3;STAGE 2; ROOM R1,R3; STAGE COUNTERFILL; ROOM R10;

8.2.3 Use of table in damage definition

It is possible to use the table editor as definition aid of damages. The table is purposed to show and accept data related tothe damaged compartments: the commands ROOM, STAGE, PHASE and PERM are seen in the table immediately and,vice versa, the changes in the table will go to the damage definition. The table contains one column for compartments,one column for each option of the command ROOM, a column for stages, a column for phases, a column to show whetherthe compartment is damaged or not and a column for definition of temporary combined object. For format of data in thecolumns, see the explanations of the commands ROOM, STAGE and PHASE. The commands and table input may befreely mixed.

The definition table should contain the columns COMP, DAM, STAGE, COMB, PHASES, IVSTEP, IPERM, IACCH,IACCV, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL, and all of them should have the calculation rule DA.The model table, called DAM*DEFMODEL, is found in the NAPA data base. Seldom all columns are necessary. Use thecommand SEL of the table editor for showing only the columns that are relevant for your need and do formatting by thecommand FORMAT. Own model tables may be stored in the system and project data bases. The command:

DAM name text TAB WTARR

or

DAM name text TAB=mod.tab WTARR

starts damage definition by the help of the table editor. The first alternative reads the standard model tableDAM*DEFMODEL and second one reads the given model table (prefix DAM* assumed). Reading is first tried in the


28 (272)


project data base, then in the system data base and lastly in the NAPA data base. If the damage already exists, itscontents are dumped to the table. Definition continues normally by entering commands or filling columns of the table.The dependencies between the columns and rows are handled automatically by the calculation rule DA. When storing thedamage into the data base, data not related to the compartments is connected with compartment data. The source of thecompartment dependent data is always the table. Even if definition is done by a table, the damage has also alphanumericinput format seen by 'DES DAM' or 'EDI DAM'. There is no matter how the damage is defined, its redefinition may bedone by the commands, with the help of the table or mixing commands and table input.

If the option 'WTARR' is missing, only the damaged compartments are shown in the table. If the option is given, allnondamaged compartments from the watertight arrangement are added to the end of the table.

Meaning the columns and how they work:

COMP Name of compartment. The column is compulsory. Same compartment may occurmore than once if the stage is different in every occurrence. The columns DAM,STAGE, PHASES, COMB and IPERM are automatically filled with defaultvalues when a new line is created. For the default values of these columns, seebelow for explanations of the corresponding columns.

DAM The column controls whether the compartment is damaged (Y) or not (N). Thedefault value of DAM is Y. The column offers an easy way to add and removecompartments. The rows will be so arranged that the damaged compartments(DAM=Y) are first in the table. Recommended column.

STAGE Name of stage where the compartment is damaged. If a new line is entered to thetable, the default stage is that given by the last STAGE command or, if no STAGEcommand is given, that of the previous line (or that of the next line if the line isinserted to the beginning of the table), or '1' if the line is the first one in the table.The order of the stages is the same in which they appear in the table (from thetop downwards). The rows will be arranged according to the stages. This columncorresponds to the command STAGE and it is recommended if there are manystages.

COMB The column controls how the compartment is flooded together with the othercompartments. If 'INDV' is assigned to a compartment, it is flooded individually.In all compartments of the stage having the same symbol 'COMM', water makesa common surface. If some other symbol than 'INDV' or 'COMM' is assigned toa compartment, the compartment will form a temporary combined object withall other compartments of the stage having the same symbol (means same as thecompartments in brackets in the command ROOM). All compartments of the sametemporary combined object will have the same value in the columns IVSTEP,IACCH, IACCV, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL. Thedefault value of COMB is 'COMM'.

PHASES Intermediate phases of the stage. Contents of the column is either 'n', 'n(V)'or 'vstep'. The integer 'n' means that the compartments are flooded in n heightsteps (corresponds to the command PHASE n). The notation 'n(V)' means thatthe compartments are flooded in n volume steps (corresponds to the commandPHASE n VSTEP). The notation 'vstep' tells that the compartment will be filledin the compartment specific volume steps, value of which is shown in the columnIVSTEP (corresponds to the option VSTEP=v of the command ROOM). If 'n' or'n(V)' is assigned to one compartment, the same value is assigned automatically toall other compartments of the stage provided 'vstep' is not given. The default valueof PHASES is '0'.

IVSTEP Size of volume step. Value in this column means that water is flooded into (outof) the compartment in equal volume steps (corresponds to the option VSTEP=vof the command ROOM). The same value is assigned automatically to all


29 (272)


compartments belonging to the same temporary combined object and 'vstep' isassigned to the column PHASES. No default value.

IPERM Permeability of the compartment. Permeability is either a constant p, a function ofheight p1,z1,p2,z2,...,pn or a function of draught T,p1,t1,p2,t2,...,pn. The columncorresponds to the option PERM of the command ROOM or to the permeabilityassigned to the compartment by the command PERM. The default permeability isthat given in the ship model SM.

IACCH Height of accumulated water in the compartment. Height is a number or * andit corresponds to the option ACH of the command ROOM. The same value isassigned automatically to all compartments belonging to the same temporarycombined object. If a value is assigned to the column IACCH, empty is assignedto the columns IACCV, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL.No default value.

IACCV Volume of accumulated water in the compartment. Volume is a number or * andit corresponds to the option ACV of the command ROOM. The same value isassigned automatically to all compartments belonging to the same temporarycombined object. If a value is assigned to the column IACCV, empty is assignedto the columns IACCH, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL.No default value.

IACVH Volume of accumulated water by height. Volume is a number or * and itcorresponds to the option ACVH of the command ROOM. The same value isassigned automatically to all compartments belonging to the same temporarycombined object. If a value is assigned to the column IACVH, empty is assignedto the columns IACCH, IACCV, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL.No default value.

IAIRP Air (gas) pocket in the compartment. Air pocket is a single number 'ap' or a pair'ap,av' where ap is overpressure of gas and av is gas volume. The same value isassigned automatically to all compartments belonging to the same temporarycombined object. Contents of the column correspond to the option AIRP of thecommand ROOM. If a value is assigned to the column IAIRP, empty is assignedto the columns IACCH, IACCH, IACVH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL. No defaultvalue.

BREACH Breach to the compartment. Breach is name of a table, port side penetrationP=y,x1,z1,x2,z2..., starboard side penetration S=y,x1,z1,x2,z2..., bottompenetration B=z,x1,y1,x2,y2... or border curve x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2... The columncorresponds to the option BREACH of the command ROOM. The same breachis assigned automatically to all compartments belonging to the same temporarycombined object. If a breach is assigned to the compartment, empty is assigned tothe columns IACCH, IACCV, IACVH, IFLIM, IVLIM and IPVOL. No defaultvalue.

IFLIM Filling limit of the compartment. Filling limit is a number between 0 and 1 orEMPTY or FULL and it corresponds to the option FILL of the command ROOM.The same value is assigned automatically to all compartments belonging to thesame temporary combined object. If a value is assigned to the column IFLIM,empty is assigned to the columns IACCH, IACCV, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH,IVLIM and IPVOL. No default value.

IVLIM Volume limit of the compartment. Volume limit is the maximum amount of waterthe compartment can take at the end of the stage. The column corresponds to theoption VOL of the command ROOM. The same value is assigned automaticallyto all compartments belonging to the same temporary combined object. If a value


30 (272)


is assigned to the column IVLIM, empty is assigned to the columns IACCH,IACCV, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM and IPVOL. No default value.

IPVOL Volume of pumped water in the compartment. The column corresponds to theoption PUMP of the command ROOM. The same value is assigned automaticallyto all compartments belonging to the same temporary combined object. If a valueis assigned to the column IPVOL, empty is assigned to the columns IACCH,IACCV, IACVH, IAIRP, BREACH, IFLIM and IVLIM. No default value.

8.3 Margin line

MARGIN name/DEFAULT, text;

Define a margin line with the given name. The margin line is defined by dividing the length of the margin line into one orseveral parts in the direction of the x-axis and applying one defining method (POLYGON or CURVE) in each interval.There may be several margin lines simultaneously defined. The additional qualifier DEFAULT connected to the name,marks this margin line to be used as the default margin line where the margin line name is not explicitly stated. Theoptional text describes the margin line in plain text and is used in the result lists and plots.

The margin line comes into use in output lists and plots when the margin line immersion or the reserve to immersion ofthe margin line is needed. The margin line has no effect on the calculation of hydrostatic data.

The command MAR without parameters tells the name of the current margin line. The current margin line is changed by'MAR name'; without definition data.


INTERVAL x1,x2 Definition interval. If there is no record of this kind, the margin line is supposedto consist of one part. The combination -,x2 means 'from the aft end of the ship tox2' and x1,+ 'from x1 to the fore end of the ship'. In the combination x1,x2 the x-coordinates are explicit.

POLYGON (x1,y1,z1),(x2,y2,z2),...

The margin line or part of it is defined by explicitly giving its polygon points.

CURVE name/(x1,...,xn) In the current interval, the margin line follows the given curve. To prevent verygreat number of points on the margin line, one can give the x-coordinates where tostore the margin line points. If '/(x1,...,xn)' is missing, every polygon point on thecurve is taken to the margin line.



8.3.2 Example

MARGIN MARG1 '10 cm below bulkhead deck';INTERVAL -,102.5;CURVE BLKHD/(0.0,12.1,15.8,30.6,60.8,90.6,102.5);INTERVAL 102.5,+;POL (102.5,10.5,11.2) (110.5,6.6,11.2) (119.0,0.0,11.2)

8.4 Freeboard deck edge

The freeboard deck is used in calculation of accumulated water and in certain stability criteria referring to the freeboarddeck edge.


31 (272)


The freeboard deck edge is defined as the margin line.

8.5 Opening

OPENING name, text;

An opening is a point in the ship through which water can run into the ship or between the rooms connected by it. Openingsare used in two ways in the damage analysis: in the progressive flooding stages the openings have effect on spreadingof the flood water in the ship, in other parts of the system (output commands) the openings have effect on the stabilitycriteria and the progressive flooding angle.

The openings are identified by names given by the parameter 'name'. Name of the opening must not be same as nameof any opening group. The optional parameter 'text' describes the opening in plain text (description) and it is used in theresult lists and plots.

All openings defined and stored in the data base are not automatically relevant, i.e. taken into account in calculations andoutput. The set of relevant openings is handled by the commands ROP (relevant openings) and IRO (irrelevant openings).The command CAT OPE tells the current situation.

Openings are calculation arguments only if progressive flooding stages are calculated, otherwise they are outputparameters and may be freely changed after calculation.

8.5.1 Relevant openings

The program follows the underlying logic in taking relevant openings into account.

The opening is taken into account if:

■ it leads from the sea to an undamaged compartment,■ it leads from a damaged compartment to an undamaged compartment,■ data about connection is missing (no record CONNECT).

The opening is ignored if

■ it connects damaged compartments,■ it connects undamaged compartments,■ it leads from the sea to a damaged compartment.


Type of an opening

TYPE type;

There are five types of openings: UNPROTECTED, WEATHERTIGHT, WATERTIGHT, WEPROGRESSIVE andUNNOPROGRESSIVE. The default type is UNPROTECTED. The different opening types are handled in the followingway:

■ UNPROTECTED : unprotected openings are taken into account in all calculations, lists and plots, whereveropenings are referenced.

■ WEATHERTIGHT: weathertight openings do not restrict the calculation of the GZ curve and area calculations, butmay not be submerged in the equilibrium floating position. In the progressive (OPT PROGR) stage, water is notspreading through this opening unless option WEPROGRESSIVE is used, in which case water can spread through aweathertight opening ONLY if it is immersed in the final equilibrium floating position.

■ WATERTIGHT : watertight openings are ignored in all calculations. These openings appear only in some lists asadditional information.


32 (272)


■ UNNOPROGRESSIVE: unprotected but progressive flooding is not spreading through the opening. The openingcontributes to the angle of unprotected flooding but, in the progressive flooding stage, water is not spreadingthrough this opening.

■ WEPROGRESSIVE: like WEATHERTIGHT but in the progressive stage, water is always spreading through thisopening.

Position

POSITION (x,y,z)

Position of the lowest point of the opening. See also section Additional definition data for openings.

Connection

CONNECT room1, room2

The opening connects the given two rooms to each other. The room name SEA is interpreted as the outer side of the ship.These data are used in the progressive flooding stages to examine spreading of sea water in the ship and in deciding if theopening is considered relevant in the specific damage case and stage (see above).

The alternative

CONNECT room1 -> room2;

connects the rooms room1 and room2 in the way that water can run only from room1 to room2 not in the opposite direction.

Stage

STAGE

Define the relevant stage for the opening.

Drawing commands

COLOUR col1, col2, col3, col4

The command defines the filling colour of the opening. The logical fill code'col1' will be used when the opening is above the water line and it is not relevant(default GREEN), the optional code 'col2' is for the relevant openings abovethe water line (default GREEN), the optional code 'col3' is for the irrelevantopenings below the water line (default RED) and the optional code 'col4' is for therelevant openings below the water line (default RED). Here relevant means thatthe opening connects an undamaged compartment to a damaged compartment oran undamaged compartment to sea and irrelevant means that the opening connectstwo damaged compartments, two undamaged compartments or a damagedcompartment and sea. The alternative 'COLOUR col1' is same as 'COLOUR col1 col1 col1 col1','COLOUR col1 col2' is same as 'COLOUR col1 col1 col2 col2' and 'COLOURcol1 col2 col3' is same as 'COLOUR col1 col2 col3 col3'.

SIZE s The command defines the size of the square visualizing the opening. Theparameter 's' is the size of the square in the ship scale. A preceding asterisk definesthe size directly in the dimensions of the drawing (default current text height).

'TPX pos','TPY pos','TPZ pos'

Position of text relative to the opening. The commands 'TPX pos', 'TPY pos' and'TPZ pos' define the position of the text (name, id) relative to the center of thesquare. TPX is for the x-sections, TPY for y-sections and TPZ for z-sections. Theparameter 'pos' has the following alternatives: AL: above, to the left (northwest) AC: above, centered (north) AR: above, to the right (northeast) L: to the left (east) O: over the square


33 (272)


R: to the right (west) UL: under, to the left (southwest) UC: under, centered (south) UR: under, to the right (southeast)

Reflection

REFL name

The result of the command is that the y-coordinate is taken from the parent opening and it is reflected about the planey=0. The other properties (except connection) are copied from the parent opening and they cannot be changed separately.Changes of the parent opening (except connection) will go automatically to the reflected opening.

Other commands



8.5.3 Examples

OPENING DOOR5 'door to eng. room from R8'; POSITION (41,-2.0,3.1); TYPE WEATHERTIGHT RELEVANT DAM,CRIT; CONNECT R8,R81;

8.5.4 Additional definition data for openings

For needs of cross-flooding calculation, progressive flooding and damage simulation, additional data items are includedin opening definitions.

Two definition points

An opening may have two end points. Depending on the type of opening, OTYPE, the points are treated differently. Ifthe opening is a pipe (word PIPE included in type), progressive flooding starts when both ends are submerged. For othertypes, progressive flooding starts when either end is immersed.

In the opening arrangement, two end points need two rows, see example in chapter 'Calculation of cross-flooding time'.In the command based definition, command POS has two points

POS ((x1,y1,z1) (x2,y2,z2)

Area of opening

Column or command AREA defines the cross-sectional area (m2) of the opening. Area will be used in cross-floodingcalculations and in progressive flooding calculations when time is present. Alternative column or command DIAM definesthe cross-sectional area of cross-flooding pipes.

Speed reduction factor

Column or command KSUM defines sum of k's excluding the pipe friction 0.02*l/D. This value will be used for calculationof the dimensionless factor of reduction of speed F. See 'RECOMMENDATION ON A STANDARD METHOD FORESTABLISHING COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS FOR CROSS-FLOODING ARRANGEMENTS INPASSENGER SHIPS', resolution A.266.

Length of pipe

Column or command L defines length of pipe. As default, length is the distance between the ends. This data is neededin cross-flooding time calculations.


34 (272)


Type of opening

Column or command OTYPE defines type of opening that is not related to watertightness (column WT or commandTYPE). There are two important types which have effect on calculation: pipe and escape. Immersion of a pipe happenswhen both ends are immersed. An escape remains valid or relevant though it connects two flooded rooms or it is insidea flooded room. The other types have no special treatment in normal calculations.

An opening is a pipe if word PIPE is a part of the string and it is an escape if word ESCAPE is a part of the string.

Water resistance coefficient

Column or command WRCOEF defines water resistance coefficient or coefficient of discharge through theopening. This coefficient will be used in Bernoulli's equation for calculating flooding rate through the opening(rate=wrc*area*sqrt(2*g*h), where wrc is water resistance coefficient, area is cross-sectional area of opening, g isacceleration of gravity, h is pressure height at the opening and sqrt is square root). WRCOEF is needed in progressiveflooding calculation if time is present and rate is based on height of water at the opening.

Flooding rate

Column or command RATE defines flooding rate through the opening. Flooding rates may be used in progressive floodingcalculations when time is present. If rate is given, it replaces the rate based on area, coefficient of of discharge and pressureheight (Bernoulli's equation).

HCOLL, HLEAK and ARATIO

These data are not in use in normal damage stability calculations.

Diameter of pipe

Column or command DIAM. An alternative way to give cross sectional area of the pipe. This data is needed in crossflooding time calculations.

Coefficient of discharge

Column or command ARC.

Flooding stage where the opening is taken into account

Column or command STAGE defines the stage(s) where the opening is taken into account in calculation of probabilisticdamage stability for SOLAS II-1. The factor s will be zero if the opening is immersed in the specified stage.

Geometry of opening

Column GEOMOBJ or command GEOM defines geometry of the opening and it overrules data given by POSITION andAREA. Geometry may be a point object, a 3d curve, a surface object or an intersection of a surface or room with a plane.The lowest point is considered unless the type of the object is PIPE,in which case the highest point is that matters. If theobject is surface object without intersection, the border of the object is used as an opening.

GEOM point point: name of point object

GEOM curve curve: name of curve

GEOM surface_object surface_object: name of surface object

GEOM surface/axis=coord surface: name of surface axis=coord: intersection of surface with a plane. axis: X, Y or Z. coord: x-, y- or z-coordinate of the plane.

GEOM room/axis=coord name of room axis=coord: axis=coord: intersection of room with a plane. axis: X, Y or Z. coord: x-, y- or z-coordinate of the plane.

Reserve to immersion


35 (272)


Column or command RES defines reserve to immersion. Whenever the vertical distance to the water plane or immersionangle is calculated, the reserve is subtracted from the vertical height of the opening preventing the opening to go tooclose to water.

Vertical escapes on the escape route

Column or command ESCAPE defines the vertical escapes along the route if the opening is a horizontal escape route.Note that the opening is treated as a horizontal escape route if this command is given although the type (OPYPE) doesnot contain the words ESCAPE and ROUTE.

Evacuation arrangement

Column or command EVACARR defines the name of the evacuation arrangement the horizontal escape route belongs to.The evacuation arrangement defines the rooms the route is serving together with the other escape routes and the locationsof the entries from the rooms. The evacuation arrangement is a table having the columns COMP, OPENING, X Y andZ. The rooms in COMP are served by the horizontal escape routes in OPENING the entries being at X,Y,Z. Note that aroom may occur many times in COMP if it is served by several routes or there are many entries to the route.

Time span for closing the opening in flooding simulation

Column or command TSPAN defines the time after the start of the simulation when the closing starts and the time spanthat it takes to close the opening. This definition is not effective if the opening is initially closed.

8.6 Opening Arrangement

There are two ways to define openings:

1. by defining the openings in a separate definition task (command OPEN nn... see above)

2. by a so-called opening arrangement table.

There may be only one definition method active at a time; if an opening arrangement is active, all separately definedopenings and the commands OPEN, EDI OPE, DEL OPE and COPY OPE are ignored. If the arrangement is made inactive,again all separately defined openings are available as well as the related commands. The commands CAT OPE, DES OPE,ROP, IRO and OGROUP work normally in both environments. The argument

OPARR name

activates an opening arrangement. Opening arrangement is a table with prefix OPE*, each row defining one opening. Thearrangement is deactivated by

OPARR OFF

The following columns should be available in the arrangement table:

ID identification of the opening

DES description of the opening

WT type of opening regarding its severity in progressive flooding. See the alternativesfrom opening definition commands

REFX,REFY,REFZ x-, y- and z-coordinate of the opening (check point of immersion).

CONN Pair of compartments connected by the opening. The syntax comp1,comp2defines the connection in both directions, the syntax comp1 -> comp2 defines one-directional connection from comp1 to comp2. Either of the names may be SEA.See the current relevancy of the opening from opening definition commands.

COL Filling colour(s) of opening in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA.Up to four logical fill codes col1 col2 col3 col4 may be given : col1 = openinghas become irrelevant and above the water line, default GREEN; col2 = openingis relevant and above the water line, default GREEN; col3 = opening has become


36 (272)


irrelevant and is under the water line, default RED; opening is relevant and underthe water line, default RED.

SIZE Size of the square marker in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA.A preceding asterisk defines the size directly in the dimensions of the drawingotherwise it is in the ship scale.

STAGE Define the relevant stage for the opening.

OTYPE Additional definitions not concerning watertightness, for example, pipe, escape.

TPX,TPY,TPZ

Text position in x-, y- and z-sections relative to the center of the markerrepresenting the opening. See the alternatives opening definition commands

A model table OPE*MODEL has been stored in DB7.

8.7 Horizontal escape routes according to SOLAS 2009 in NAPA

8.7.1 Barge

The following barge has been used in the examples below:


37 (272)


8.7.2 Subdivision used for generating SOLAS 2009 damages

8.7.3 Escape definitions

Seven horizontal escape routes on main deck are defined to serve seven compartments. One entry and one vertical escapeattached to each route.

Dry feet escape possibility for compartment 1CP:

CUR ROUTE1; Z 6.05 XY * <> (5,2), (10,2) + Entry at position (5 2 6.05) V Vertical escape at position (10 2 6.05)

Dry feet escape possibility for compartment 2P:

CUR ROUTE2; Z 6.05XY * <> (30,2), (15,2), (15,9), (10,9), 10,2) + Entry at position (30 2 6.05)V Vertical escape at position (10 2 6.05)


38 (272)



CUR ROUTE3A; Z 6.05XY * <> (55,2), (70,2) + Entry at position (55 2 6.05)V Vertical escape at position (70 2 6.05)

Dry feet escape possibility for compartment 3PIN:

CUR ROUTE3B; Z 6.05 XY * <> (55,5), (55,2), (70,2) + Entry at position (55 5 6.05)V Vertical escape at position (70 2 6.05)


39 (272)


Dry feet escape possibility for compartment 3POUT:

CUR ROUTE3C; Z 6.05XY * <> (55,9), (55,2), (70,2)+ Entry at position (55 9 6.05)V Vertical escape at position (70 2 6.05)


CUR ROUTE4; Z 6.05XY * <> (78,2), (70,2)+ Entry at position (78 2 6.05) V Vertical escape at position (70 2 6.05)


CUR ROUTE5; Z 6.05 XY * <> (85,2), (70,2)+ Entry at position (85 2 6.05)V Vertical escape at position (70 2 6.05)


40 (272)


8.7.4 Relevancy criteria for horizontal escapes in NAPA

■ The escapes need to be included in the calculations with the ROP command in the arguments of subtask DA■ The parts of the routes, which locate inside the flooded area, serving unflooded compartments are relevant (= will be

taken into account in the calculations)■ No need to arrange a dry feet escape from a flooded compartment■ Unflooded compartments should have a dry feet access from entry to a vertical escape■ If a part of a route is relevant and if it is the only access (from entry to vertical escape):

■ immersion before equilibrium causes s=0

8.7.5 Definition summary

Horizontal escapes

Attached entries in evacuation arrangement


41 (272)


After calculation the following one zone damages obtained a lower index because of the influence of the escape routes.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE SIDE HEEL SFACSOL RANGESOL FAWE FLWEOP degree degree degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------DS/SDSP1.1.0 1 EQ PS 13.0 0.0000 16.0 0.0 ROUTE2DP/SDSP1.1.0 1 EQ PS 9.5 0.0000 16.0 4.0 ROUTE2 DL/SDSP1.1.0 1 EQ PS 4.6 1.0000 16.0 13.6 ROUTE2DP/SDSP2.1.0 1 EQ PS 7.8 0.9480 16.0 11.2 ROUTE3C DS/SDSP3.1.0 1 EQ PS 5.0 1.0000 16.0 9.2 ROUTE3B DS/SDSP3.2.0 1 EQ PS 12.8 0.5197 16.0 13.5 ROUTE2 DP/SDSP4.1.0 1 EQ PS 7.8 0.9480 16.0 10.5 ROUTE3C -------------------------------------------------------------------------

All damage cases where the escape routes cut the range of the GZ curve are the vertically unlimited cases as the escaperoute has to be inside the flooded area in order to be considered relevant.

8.7.6 Calculated cases

Damage case SDSP1.1.0

Calculated case DS/SDSP1.1.0

Floating position at HEEL=0 deg.


42 (272)


(equilibrium at 13.0 deg.)

ROUTE1 and ROUTE2 inside the flooded area. ROUTE1 is irrelevant as it serves a flooded compartment 1CP.

Escape route ROUTE2 is relevant (red colour) inside the flooded area as the route from 2P from the entry (30 2 6.05) tothe vertical escape at (10 2 6.05) goes along ROUTE2. Point (10 9 6.05) immersed at 0.0 deg. of heeling. Route immersedat equilibrium -> s=0.

LIS DROP DS/SDSP1.1.0RELEVANT OPENINGS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DS/SDSP1.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE2 10.00 9.000 6.050 - RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Calculated case DP/SDSP1.1.0

Floating position at HEEL=4.0 DEG.

(equilibrium 9.5 deg.)


43 (272)



As in case DS/SDSP1.1.0 the escape route ROUTE2 is relevant (blue colour) inside the flooded area. In this case itimmerses at 4.0 deg. heeling. First point to immerse is (10 9 6.05). Route immersed at equilibrium -> s=0.

LIS DROP DP/SDSP1.1.0RELEVANT OPENINGS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP/SDSP1.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE2 10.00 9.000 6.050 4.0 RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Calculated case DL/SDSP1.1.0

Floating position at HEEL=13.6 deg.



As in case DP/SDSP1.1.0 the escape route ROUTE2 is relevant (blue colour) inside the flooded area. In this case itimmerses at 13.6 deg. heeling. First point to immerse is (10 9 6.05).


44 (272)


LIS DROP DL/SDSP1.1.0RELEVANT OPENINGS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DL/SDSP1.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE2 10.00 9.000 6.050 13.6 RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------





ROUTE2, ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B, ROUTE3C, ROUTE4 and ROUTE5 inside the flooded area. ROUTE5 is relevantinside the flooded area as it serves the unflooded compartment 5CP. ROUTE2 is irrelevant as it serves a floodedcompartment 2P.

Escape routes ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B and ROUTE3C are relevant (blue colour) as their entries (55 2 6.05), (55 5 6.05)and (55 9 6.05) serve the unflooded compartments 3CP, 3PIN and 3POUT to the vertical escape at (70 2 6.05). First pointto immerse is (55 9 6.05).


45 (272)


Escape route ROUTE4 is relevant (blue colour) as the route from 4CP from the entry (78 2 6.05) to the vertical escape at(70 2 6.05) goes along ROUTE4. First point to immerse is (70 2 6.05).

Escape route ROUTE5 is relevant (blue colour) inside the flooded area as the route from 5CP from the entry (85 2 6.05)to the vertical escape at (70 2 6.05) goes along ROUTE5. First point to immerse is (70 2 6.05).

LIS DROP DP/SDSP2.1.0RELEVANT OPENINGS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP/SDSP2.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3A 55.00 2.000 6.050 31.5 RELEVANT DP/SDSP2.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3B 55.00 5.000 6.050 18.1 RELEVANT DP/SDSP2.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3C 55.00 9.000 6.050 11.2 RELEVANT DP/SDSP2.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE4 70.00 2.000 6.050 35.5 RELEVANT DP/SDSP2.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE5 70.00 2.000 6.050 35.5 RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Damage case DS/SDSP3.1.0


Floating position at HEEL=9.2


ROUTE2, ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B, ROUTE3C, ROUTE4 and ROUTE5 inside the flooded area. ROUTE5 is relevantinside the flooded area as it serves the unflooded compartment 5CP. ROUTE3C is irrelevant as it serves a flooded


46 (272)


compartment 3POUT. Escape routes ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B are relevant (blue colour) as their entries (55 2 6.05) and(55 5 6.05) serve the unflooded compartments 3CP and 3PIN to the vertical escape at (70 2 6.05). First point to immerseis (55 5 6.05).

Escape route ROUTE2 is relevant (blue colour) inside the flooded area as the route from 2P from the entry (30 2 6.05) tothe vertical escape at (10 2 6.05) goes along ROUTE2. First point to immerse is (20 2 6.05).

Escape route ROUTE4 is relevant (blue colour) as the route from 4CP from the entry (78 2 6.05) to the vertical escape at(70 2 6.05) goes along ROUTE4. First point to immerse is (74 2 6.05).


LIS DROP DS/SDSP3.1.0RELEVANT OPENINGS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DS/SDSP3.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE2 20.00 2.000 6.050 16.6 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3A 62.50 2.000 6.050 16.6 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3B 55.00 5.000 6.050 9.2 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE4 74.00 2.000 6.050 16.6 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE5 75.00 2.000 6.050 16.6 RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Floating position at HEEL=13.5



47 (272)


ROUTE2, ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B, ROUTE3C, ROUTE4 and ROUTE5 inside the flooded area. ROUTE5 is relevantinside the flooded area as it serves the unflooded compartment 5CP. ROUTE3C and ROUTE3B are irrelevant as theyserve the flooded compartments 3POUT and 3PIN.

Escape routes ROUTE3A is relevant (blue colour) as its entry (55 2 6.05) serves the unflooded compartment 3CP to thevertical escape at (70 2 6.05). First point to immerse is (62.50 2 6.05).




LIS DROP DS/SDSP3.2.0RELEVANT OPENINGS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DS/SDSP3.2.0 EQ 1 ROUTE2 20.00 2.000 6.050 13.5 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.2.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3A 62.50 2.000 6.050 13.5 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.2.0 EQ 1 ROUTE4 74.00 2.000 6.050 13.5 RELEVANT DS/SDSP3.2.0 EQ 1 ROUTE5 75.00 2.000 6.050 13.5 RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------



48 (272)





ROUTE2, ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B, ROUTE3C, ROUTE4 and ROUTE5 inside the flooded area. ROUTE5 is relevantinside the flooded area as it serves the unflooded compartment 5CP. ROUTE4 is irrelevant as it serves the floodedcompartments 4CP.

Escape routes ROUTE3A, ROUTE3B and ROUTE3C are relevant (blue colour) as their entries (55 2 6.05), (55 5 6.05)and (55 9 9.05) serve the unflooded compartments 3CP, 3PIN and 3POUT to the vertical escape at (70 2 6.05). First pointto immerse is (55 9 6.05).



LIS DROP DP/SDSP4.1.0RELEVANT OPENINGS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA RELE m m m degree-------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP/SDSP4.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE2 30.00 2.000 6.050 35.5 RELEVANT DP/SDSP4.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3A 70.00 2.000 6.050 26.4 RELEVANT DP/SDSP4.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3B 55.00 5.000 6.050 17.0 RELEVANT DP/SDSP4.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE3C 55.00 9.000 6.050 10.5 RELEVANT DP/SDSP4.1.0 EQ 1 ROUTE5 80.00 2.000 6.050 24.6 RELEVANT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8.8 Init group

IGROUP name, text;


49 (272)


Define a group of initial conditions. This definition allows referencing to a group of initial conditions instead of singleones. There is no restriction how the groups are formed. Name of the group must not be same as name of any initialcondition.

INITS name, name,...; Initial conditions included in the group.

SELECT crit, crit,...; The command SEL searches for the initial conditions in the database using thesame selection criteria as the command !SEL .

8.8.1 Examples

DGR IALL SELECT NAME>I

8.9 Damage group

DGROUP name, text;

Define a group of damage cases. This definition allows referencing to a group of damage cases instead of single cases.There is no restriction how the groups are formed. Name of the group must not be same as name of any damage case.

Damage groups may be defined by giving explicitly the names of the damages (command DAM) or picking the namesfrom the database (command SEL), from a table (command TAB) or from a variable (command VAR).

DAMAGES name, name,...; Damage cases included in the group.

SELECT crit, crit,...; The command SEL searches for the damages in the data base using the sameselection criteria as the command !SEL. DGR DALLSELECT NAME>D3

TAB table SORT SUBS=wildcard

The command fetches the damages from column DAM of the given table. If thiscolumn is missing, column CASE is used instead. The option SORT sorts thenames in alphabetic order. The option SUBS=wildcard takes to the group alldamages matching with the string 'wildcard'. The string 'wildcard' may containwildcards ? (replaces single character) and * (replaces any number of characters).E.g. SUBS=DA1* takes to the group all damages beginning with 'DA1'.

VAR arr SORT SUBS=wildcard

The command works as TAB but the names are taken from a string array.

8.9.1 Examples

8.10 Room group

RGROUP name, text;

Define a group of rooms. This definition allows referencing to a group of rooms instead of single ones. There is norestriction how the groups are formed.

ROOMS name, name,...;

Rooms included in the group.

8.10.1 Example

RGR RALL


50 (272)


ROOMS R1 R2 R3 R4

8.11 Opening group

OGROUP name, text;

Define a group of openings. This definition allows referencing to a group of openings instead of single ones. There is norestriction how the groups are formed. Name of the group must not be same as name of any opening.

OPENINGS name, name,...;

Openings included in the group.

SELECT crit, crit,...; The command SEL searches for the openings in the data base using the sameselection criteria as the command !SEL .

8.11.1 Examples

OGR OALL1OPENINGS OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4

OGR OALL2SEL NAME>OI

8.12 Stability criteria, criterion groups and moments

The stability criteria, criterion groups and moments are defined either in the CR or in the DAM tasks. See the documentsof CR how to define criteria and how to handle administration concerning them.

8.13 Subdivision aided damage case generation

8.13.1 General principles

The program provides a method to generate damage cases on the basis of the watertight subdivisions of the ship. Thetransversal subdivisions limit the longitudinal extent of damage dividing the ship into parts called zones. The longitudinalsubdivisions limit the penetration of damage from the shell inward. The horizontal subdivisions limit the extent of damageupward and downward. A basic damage extends over one zone or several adjacent zones, from the shell to the center lineand from the base to the uppermost deck. The procedure generates the basic damages and the damages where the basicdamages are limited by all possible ways by longitudinal and horizontal subdivisions.

Generation of damage cases proceeds through four steps. Input and output of the process and data transfer between thesteps have the form of tables. In every step, the tables may be manipulated by the user. The four steps are:

1. Definition of subdivisions. The subdivision system is a grid of transversal, longitudinal and horizontal surfacesdefining the internal structure of the ship as far as necessary for getting sufficiently different damage cases.The variety of different damages in each zone results from the number of combinations of the longitudinal andhorizontal subdivisions in the zone. The table defining the subdivisions is mainly user input. The six columns X1, X2, BP, BS, HHSU and HHSDare automatically generated and updated. X1 and X2 are x-coordinates of the transversal subdivisions giving theminimum distance between the surfaces. BP and BS are the mean transverse distances at the deepest subdivisionload line between the longitudinal subdivisions and the port side and the starboard side shell.

2. Locating the compartments in the subdivision system. There is a special type of table that automatically selectsfrom the arrangement the compartments that are inside the watertight hull and locates them in the grid of surfaces.The location of the compartment is defined by the nearest transversal, longitudinal and horizontal subdivisions thecompartment is not penetrated.

3. Generate damage cases of one zone. The damage cases of one zone are generated by the help of the subdivisionsystem and the locations of the compartments in the subdivision system. In each zone, there will be as many


51 (272)


damage cases as there are different longitudinal and horizontal subdivision combinations in the zone. Thecompartments are selected to the damage case by comparing the limiting subdivisions of the damage case withthose of the compartments.

4. Generate damage cases of more than one adjacent zones. The cases where more than one adjacent zones aredamaged will be generated by combining the one zone damages having mutually the same penetration and verticalextent. The b- and h-values (columns BP, BS, HHSU and HHSD) in the subdivision system define the order amongthe longitudinal and horizontal subdivisions with respect to depth of transverse penetration and vertical extent ofdamage. There will be as many damage cases as there are different combinations of b- and h-values.

The generated damage cases of one zone contain only the list of damaged compartments. If other aspects are needed, likestages and phases, they must be added manually to the cases of one zone. The damages of several adjacent zones copy thestructure of one zone damages, i.e. they contain as many stages and phases as the one zone damages have.

8.13.2 Subdivision system

The subdivision system is generated in table calculation (TAB) by a special type table. The format of the table is following:

NEW SUBD*SOLAS NMCOL ZONE KEYCOL TBA=CTCOL TBF=CTCOL LBP=CTCOL LBS=CTCOL DDN=CTCOL DUP=CTCOL X1 DACOL X2 DACOL BP DACOL BS DACOL HHSD DACOL HHSU DAAU ONFORMAT BP TEXTFORMAT BS TEXTFORMAT HHSD TEXTFORMAT HHSU TEXT

The prefix of the table is SUBD*. The default name of the table comes from the reference system (SUBD among variousparameters, use the command ADD for assigning SUBD) A model table will be found in the NAPA data base (DB7)under name SUBD*MODEL.

The table can be created with the command:

SUBD name

which enters the table calculation, assigns the prefix SUBD* and fetches the given table into the work area. If the tableis not existing, the program loads the model table into the work area and renames it. The task does not provide automaticsaving of the definition at exit from the table calculation.

The column ZONE is key column. Each zone has a name for identification. The zones in the table must be in ascendingorder, i.e. the aftmost zone in the first line, the foremost one in the last line.

The columns TBA, TBF, LBP, LBS, DDN and DUP contain the limits of the subdivisions. A limit is either a surface,local plane definition, a coordinate, a frame number or compartment. The surfaces must be defined in the task DEF. Alocal plane definition is an expression 'name=coord', where 'name' is any name not appearing elsewhere in the subdivisionand 'coord' is the coordinate of the plane, e.g. TB1=#34. If the same local plane occurs many times, it is not necessary torepeat the coordinate. A compartment as a limit means the plane through the extreme point of the compartment, where theextreme point is taken in the direction of the limit (TBA, minimum x; TBF, maximum x; LBP, y of the outermost pointon the port side; LBS, y of the outermost point on the starboard side; DDN, minimum z; DUP, maximum z).


52 (272)


The columns TBA (transverse bulkhead aft) and TBF (transverse bulkhead forward) contain the aft and forward ends ofthe zones. The limits must be in ascending order.

The columns LBP (longitudinal bulkhead on port side) and LBS (longitudinal bulkhead on starboard side) contain thelongitudinal subdivisions in each zone. In LBP, there are the longitudinal subdivisions from the port side shell inward tothe centerline excluding the shell and the bulkhead at the centerline, if any. In LBS, there are the longitudinal subdivisionsfrom the starboard side shell inward to the centerline excluding the shell and the bulkhead at the centerline, if any. Ifthere are many subdivisions at the certain zone, the subdivisions must be separated by slash ( / ) and they must be givenso ordered that the outermost is in the first place and the innermost is in the last place. For example, LB1/LB2/LB3 inthe column LBP means that, at the zone specified by the line, the outermost longitudinal subdivision on the port side issurface LB1, the next one inward is LB2 and the innermost longitudinal subdivision is surface LB3. The empty string ''indicates that there is no longitudinal subdivision at that zone.

The columns DUP (deck upward) and DDN (deck downward) contain, in each zone, the horizontal subdivisions that limitthe extent of damage upward and downward. If there are many subdivisions at the certain zone, the subdivisions must beseparated by slash ( / ) and they must be given so ordered that the lowermost subdivision comes first and the uppermostone comes last. For example, DK0/DK1 in the column DUP means that, at the zone specified by the line, the extent ofdamage may be limited upward by two horizontal subdivisions DK0 and DK1 where DK0 is the lower one and DK1 isthe upper one. The empty string '' indicates that there is no horizontal subdivision at that zone.

The columns X1, X2, BP, BS, HHSU and HHSD are automatically calculated and updated provided the calculation ruleDA is specified for them and the values are not given manually.

X1 is x-coordinate of the foremost point of the aft end of the zone. X2 is x-coordinate of the aftmost point of the forwardend of the zone.

BP and BS are mean transverse distances between the longitudinal subdivisions specified in the columns LBP and LBSand the shell. The values of BP and BS are calculated following the guidelines of the Explanatory notes to the SOLASregulations on subdivision and damage stability of cargo ships, Appendix 2, Chapter III. For calculation of BP andBS, the program needs to know the height of the subdivision load line, HSD. The value of HSD is fetched from thereference system or it may be given as constant for the table with the command CONSTANT in the table calculation task(CONSTANT HSD=h).

BP and BS are measures of depth of penetration of damage. In each line, there are as many BP- and BS-values separated byslash as there are longitudinal subdivisions in LBP and LBS. However, if values are same for all longitudinal subdivisions,only one value is shown.

In the columns DUP and DDN. HHSU is height of the lowest point of the horizontal subdivision that limits damageupward in the specified zone. that limits damage downward in the specified zone. vertical extent of damage. In each line,there are as many subdivisions in DUP and DDN. However, if values are same for all horizontal subdivisions, only onevalue is shown.

Note that BP, BS, HHSU and HHSD are character data. Therefore inputting manually one single number, it must be putin the apostrophes.

The calculated values have two roles. If the subdivision system will be used in probabilistic damage stability, thecorrectness of the values X1, X2, BP, BS and HHSU should be checked from this point of view. The second role of BP,BS, HHSU and HHSD is to define order among the longitudinal and horizontal subdivisions. They will be used in creatingmultiple zone damage cases from one zone cases (see chapter 'Generation of multiple zone damages').

Example

ZONE TBA TBF LBP LBS DUP DDN-------------------------------------------------Z1 AE=#-5 BH1 DK0/DK1Z2 BH1 BH2 P1=1.7 S1=-1.7 DK0 TTOPZ3 BH2 BH3 LBH1 SLBH1 TTOPZ4 BH3 TBH4 LBH1 SLBH1 TTOP


53 (272)


Z5 TBH4 BH5 LBH1 SLBH1 TTOPZ6 BH5 BH6 LBH1 SLBH1 TTOPZ7 BH6 BH7 LBH3 SLBH3Z8 BH7 FE=#126 DK0

ZONE X1 X2 BP BS HHSU HHSD--------------------------------------------Z1 -3.00 5.40 0 0 4.7/6.7 0Z2 5.40 16.80 4.34 4.34 4.7 1Z3 16.80 29.58 1.4 1.4 0 0.8Z4 29.58 42.36 1.4 1.4 0 0.8Z5 43.78 57.27 1.4 1.4 0 0.8Z6 57.27 72.18 1.35 1.35 0 0.8Z7 72.18 76.38 3.38 3.28 0 0Z8 76.38 84.18 0 0 4.7 0

The several zone damages are combinations of one zone damages. Because of this feature, the compartments which are inthe gaps between adjacent zones will not be damaged. Now the new logic in the compartment limit table checks also thegaps and marks with letter G in the zone column the compartments which are totally within the gaps between the zones.The compartments marked with 'G' are added to the several zone damages if the gap is inside the limits of the damage. Ifonly recess of a compartment is in the gap, one should divide the compartment into two parts, recess + rest, and define apermanent connection between the parts in the compartment connection table. Doing like this, the compartment will beflooded through the recess in the several zone damages but the compartment may be ignored in the one zone damages.

The easiest way to check the subdivision system is to plot it on the setup background. The command DRW SUBD drawsthe surfaces of the subdivision so that they are limited in the zone(s) they belong to. The command is of the form

ZRAN=(z1,z2), PEN=p, CLOSE=OFF

DRW parts SUBD NAME=tab, XRAN=(x1,x2), YRAN=(y1,y2)

where

■ the option 'parts' specifies what parts of the setup are concerned (default all)■ NAME=tab specifies the table where to find the subdivision (name without prefix)■ the options XRAN=(x1,x2), YRAN=(y1,y2), ZRAN=(z1,z2) range the surfaces between the given limits■ the option PEN=p selects the logical pen code for the surfaces■ the opening and closing operations are not done if the option CLOSE=OFF is given.

8.13.3 Location of compartments in subdivision system

The table calculation provides a service that automatically decides the location of the compartments with respect to thesubdivisions of the subdivision system. One can get the full service using the following table definition:

NEW TAB*CLIMITS NM COL NAME KEY COL ZONE SM COL ALIMIT SM COL FLIMIT SM COL PLIMIT SM COL SLIMIT SM COL LLIMIT SM COL ULIMIT SM REF SUBD*subdiv ALOAD ARR*CURRENT 'GM.INSIDE("DAMHULL",NAME)'


54 (272)


The table of this format is called compartment limit table. The table is automatically loaded with the compartments of thecurrent arrangement that are inside the watertight hull (DAMHULL in this case). The subdivisions system is given by thecommand 'REF SUBD*subdiv', where 'subdiv' is the name of the subdivision. A model of this table, TAB*CLIMMODEL,will be found in the NAPA data base. Note that the rules SM and ALOAD causes an automatic update of the table.Therefore, if you want to fix the compartment selection, take away the command ALOAD, and if you want to fix somecolumn, take away the rule SM.

The columns of the table are:

NAME Names of the compartments that are inside the watertight hull. The selectionof the compartments is done automatically if the loading command ALOAD isgiven. The user should check carefully that there is no compartment or part ofcompartment outside the watertight hull, the compartments cover the whole spaceof the watertight hull and there are no overlapping compartments or overlappingparts of compartments.

ZONE Number(s) of the zone(s) the compartment belongs to, wholly or partly. Thecolumn is automatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and thecolumn is not filled manually. If there are many zones the compartment belongsto, the numbers are expressed by Zn-m where 'n' is the number of the aftmost zoneand 'm' is the number of the foremost zone. The different transverse subdivisionson the port and starboard side are shown in the column ZONE by separating witha slash (/) the different zone numbers. The port side limits are to the left from theslash and the starboard side limits are to right.

ALIMIT Name of the aft limit of the compartment. The aft limit is the nearest transverseaftward subdivision the compartment is not penetrated. The column isautomatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and the column is notfilled manually. The different transverse subdivisions on the port and starboardside are shown in the column ALIMIT by separating with a slash (/) the differenttransverse bulkhead names. The port side limits are to the left from the slash andthe starboard side limits are to right.

FLIMIT Name of the fore limit of the compartment. The fore limit is the nearesttransverse forward subdivision the compartment is not penetrated. The column isautomatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and the column is notfilled manually. The different transverse subdivisions on the port and starboardside are shown in the column FLIMIT by separating with a slash (/) the differenttransverse bulkhead names. The port side limits are to the left from the slash andthe starboard side limits are to right.

PLIMIT Name(s) of the port side limit(s) of the compartment. The port side limit is thefirst outward longitudinal subdivision between the compartment and the portside shell the compartment is not penetrated. A minus sign '-' appears into thecolumn if there is no longitudinal subdivision between the compartment and theport side shell or the compartment is wholly on the starboard side of the ship.There are many names or minus signs separated by slash, if the compartmentbelongs to many zones and the limit is not same in every zone. The column isautomatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and the column is notfilled manually.

SLIMIT Name(s) of the starboard side limit(s) of the compartment. The starboard side limitis the first outward longitudinal subdivision between the compartment and thestarboard side shell the compartment is not penetrated. A minus sign '-' appearsinto the column if there is no longitudinal subdivision between the compartmentand the starboard side shell or the compartment is wholly on the port side of theship. There are many names or minus signs separated by slash, if the compartmentbelongs to many zones and the limit is not same in every zone. The column is


55 (272)


automatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and the column is notfilled manually.

LLIMIT Name(s) of the lower limit(s) of the compartment. The lower limit is the firsthorizontal subdivision downward the compartment is not penetrated. A minussign '-' appears into the column if there is no horizontal subdivision downwardfrom the compartment. There are many names or minus signs separated by slash,if the compartment belongs to many zones and the limit is not same in every zone.The column is automatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and thecolumn is not filled manually.

ULIMIT Name(s) of the upper limit(s) of the compartment. The upper limit is the firsthorizontal subdivision upward the compartment is not penetrated. A minus sign'-' appears into the column if there is no horizontal subdivision upward from thecompartment. There are many names or minus signs separated by slash, if thecompartment belongs to many zones and the limit is not same in every zone. Thecolumn is automatically loaded if the calculation rule SM is specified and thecolumn is not filled manually.

As there is, in complicated arrangements, a small risk to locate compartments wrongly, it is suggested to check the tablecarefully; error in the compartment limit table automatically causes erroneous one zone damage cases and, on the contrary,the correct compartment limit table guarantees error free generation of one zone damage cases.

Example:

NAME ZONE ALIMIT FLIMIT PLIMIT SLIMIT LLIMIT ULIMIT-------------------------------------------------------------...R00021 Z1 AE BH1 - - DK0 -R00023 Z1-2 AE BH2 - - DK0 -R01011 Z1-2 AE BH2 - - - -R01001 Z2 BH1 BH2 - - - TTOPR01002 Z2 BH1 BH2 P1 S1 - TTOPR02001 Z3 BH2 BH3 LBH1 - - TTOPR02002 Z3 BH2 BH3 - SLBH1 - TTOPR02003 Z3 BH2 BH3 - - - -...

8.13.4 Generation of one zone damages

In each zone, the program generates the following damage cases:

■ whole space of the zone is damaged■ the extent of damage is limited by every longitudinal subdivision■ the extent of damage is limited upward by the horizontal subdivisions of the column DUP■ the extent of damage is limited downward by the horizontal subdivisions of the column DDN■ the extent of damage is limited inward and upward by all combinations of the longitudinal subdivisions and the

horizontal subdivisions of the column DUP■ the extent of damage is limited inward and downward by all combinations of the longitudinal subdivisions and the

horizontal subdivisions of the column DDN■ the extent of damage is limited inward, upward and downward by all combinations of the longitudinal subdivisions

and the horizontal subdivisions of the columns DUP and DDN

For example, if in a zone there are two longitudinal subdivisions LB1 and LB2, two horizontal subdivisions DK0 andDK1 limiting damage upward and one horizontal subdivision TTOP limiting damage downward, there will be 18 damagecases in that zone:

■ whole zone


56 (272)


■ zone limited by LB1■ zone limited by LB2■ zone limited by DK0■ zone limited by DK1■ zone limited by TTOP■ zone limited by LB1 and DK0■ zone limited by LB1 and DK1■ zone limited by LB2 and DK0■ zone limited by LB2 and DK1■ zone limited by LB1 and TTOP■ zone limited by LB2 and TTOP■ zone limited by DK0 and TTOP■ zone limited by DK1 and TTOP■ zone limited by LB1 and DK0 and TTOP■ zone limited by LB1 and DK1 and TTOP■ zone limited by LB2 and DK0 and TTOP■ zone limited by LB2 and DK1 and TTOP

As seen from this example, the number of longitudinal and horizontal subdivisions should be kept as small as possible,because the total number of different damage cases increases rapidly with the number of subdivisions.

The method to generate damage cases is simple. From the subdivision system, the program gets the zone and the namesof the longitudinal and horizontal subdivisions and from the compartment limit table, the program gets the compartments.From the compartment limit table, the program picks those compartments that have the same zone as the damage caseand that are not beyond the limiting longitudinal or horizontal subdivisions.

The empty damages, i.e. damages without compartments, are skipped.

8.13.5 Generation of multiple zone damages

A multiple zone damage case means that two or more adjacent zones are damaged. What zones are adjacent is definedby the order of zones in the subdivision system.

The multiple zone damage cases are combinations of adjacent one zone damage cases. The one zone damage cases thatare combined must be of the same type, i.e. the inward penetration of the damages must be the same or the nearest greaterone and the upward and downward extents must be the same or the nearest greater ones.

The calculated BP, BS, HHSU and HHSD values of the subdivision system define the order among the longitudinal andhorizontal subdivisions of different zones; BP defines the order among the longitudinal port side subdivisions, BS definesthe order among the longitudinal starboard side subdivisions, HHSU defines the order among the horizontal subdivisionslimiting damage upward and HHSD defines the order among the horizontal subdivisions limiting damage downward. Thelongitudinal subdivisions having the same BP or BS values have the same penetration and the greater BP or BS value is,the greater is penetration. The horizontal subdivisions having the same the greater downward extent.

The standard method to generate multiple zone damages starts by taking all BP (or BS) values, HHSU values and HHSDvalues from the adjacent zones, sorting them and removing duplicates. To every combination of BP (or BS), HHSU andHHSD values corresponds a damage case. The advantage of the method is that all possible contribution to A is availablebut the number of damages may become very large.

An optional method is to advance in all zones parallel according to the index of subdivision, the first damage extends tothe first subdivision, the second one to the next subdivision and so on. The b- and h-values of the damages made in thisway are the minimum values of all subdivisions having the same index. The following damage cases are generated foreach combination of adjacent zones:

■ whole space of the adjacent zones is damaged■ penetration is limited by every different BP (or BS)


57 (272)


■ upward extent is limited by every different HHSU■ downward extent is limited by every different HHSD■ penetration and upward extent are limited by all combinations of different BP (or BS) and HHSU■ penetration and downward extent are limited by all combinations of different BP (or BS) and HHSD■ penetration, upward extent and downward extent are limited by all combinations of different BP (or BS), HHSU and

HHSD

In each adjacent zone, the program selects from the table of one zone damages that damage which best corresponds toBP (or BS), HHSU and HHSD of the case to be generated. The damage case best corresponding to the requirements isthe one having the same BP (BS) or the least greater one, the same HHSU or the least greater one and the same HHSDor the greatest lesser one. Note that, in the subdivision system table, zero means 'no limitation' and therefore it alwaysmeans the greatest penetration and vertical extent.

Because of the method to generate multiple zone damages, some compartments may occur more than once in some cases.This does not cause any harm.

If there are stages and phases in one zone damages, the multiple zone damages also contain stages and phases. The stagesare copied from the one zone damage having the greatest number of them. In each stage, the number of phases is thegreatest one occurring in the one zone damages. Rooms to the first stage are taken from the first stages of the one zonedamages, rooms to the second stage are taken from the second stages and so on.

Example: The damage of three adjacent zones D123 is combined from the one zone damages D1, D2 and D3 in thefollowing way:

DAM D1STAGE 1 PHASES 1 ROOM R11,R12STAGE 2 PHASES 1 ROOM R13

DAM D2STAGE 1 PHASES 2 ROOM R21

DAM D3STAGE INT PHASES 0 ROOM R31STAGE FIN PHASES 2 ROOM R32,R33STAGE CROSS PHASES 0 ROOM R34

DAM D123STAGE INT PHASES 2 ROOM R11,R12 ROOM R21 ROOM R31STAGE FIN PHASES 2 ROOM R13


58 (272)


ROOM R32,R33STAGE CROSS PHASES 0 ROOM R34

8.13.6 Generation command

The damage cases are generated by the command

GEN DAM SUB=subd, WTC=clim, SIDE=sd, ADJ=z, PREF=prf, STO=names, OZD=name, BADV=way, HADV=way, LADV=way, BLIM=l, HLIM=l, STAGE=(sta1, sta2...), ACLASS=class, ADD='com1', ADD=('com2',zoneselection), ALL, LOCK=dam, BOX

Options:

SUB=subd: (opt.) name of the table defining the subdivision system (without prefix). Defaultthe one found in the reference system.

WTC=clim: name of the compartment limit table (without prefix). No default. This option isnecessary only if one zone damages are generated.

SIDE=sd : (opt.) side of penetration. Alternative P or S. Default P.

ADJ=z : (opt.) number of adjacent damaged zones. Default 1 and maximum 20. If z is asingle number, only damages of z adjacent zones are generated. If z is of the formn-m, the program generates the damages of n adjacent zones, the damages of n+1adjacent zones, ... the damage of m adjacent zones. For example, ADJ=2 means'only damages of two adj. zones' and ADJ=1-3 means 'damages of one zone, twoadj. zones and three adj. zones'.

PREF=prf: (opt.) beginning of the names of the generated damage cases. Default empty. prfshould not exceed 8 characters.

STO=name: (opt.) name(s) of the table(s) where to store information about the generated cases(without prefix). Default DAM1 for the damages of one zone, DAM2 for thedamages of 2 adjacent zones, DAM3 for 3 adjacent zones and so on. If only onename is given, information of all generated damage cases is put into that one table.If there are more than one names given, as STO=(name1,name2,...), the optionmust be interpreted with the option ADJ=n-m; the first name is the storage ofdamages of n adj. zones, the second one is the storage of damages of n+1 adj.zones,... and the last one is the storage of damages of m adj. zones.

OZD=name: (opt.) name of the table where one zone damages are stored (without prefix).Default DAM1. This option is needed if the command generates only multiplezone damages.

BADV=way (opt.) way how damage advances inward in multiple zone damages. Normally,the longitudinal subdivisions are penetrated from b to b. This method may causemuch damages but all possible contribution to A is available. An optional methodis to advance in all zones parallel to the first subdivision, to the next one and soon, despite are the b-values same or not. The b-value of such a damage is equal tothe smallest b-value of all subdivisions having the same index. Note: it is possiblethat all contribution to A is not available generating damages in this way. Thealternatives of 'way': B: advance by different b-values (default). IND: advance bysubdivision indices.

HADV=way (opt.) way how damage advances upward in multiple zone damages. Normally,the horizontal subdivisions are penetrated from h to h. This method may causemuch damages but all possible contribution to A is available. An optional methodis to advance in all zones parallel to the first subdivision, to the next one and soon, despite are the h-values same or not. The h-value of such a damage is equal to


59 (272)


the smallest h-value of all subdivisions having the same index. Note: it is possiblethat all contribution to A is not available generating damages in this way. Thealternatives of 'way': H: advance by different h-values (default). IND: advance bysubdivision indices.

LADV=way (opt.) way how damage advances downward in multiple zone damages. Normally,the horizontal subdivisions are penetrated from h to h. This method may causemuch damages but all possible damages of lesser extent are generated. Anoptional method is to advance in all zones parallel to the first subdivision, tothe next one and so on, despite are the h-values same or not. Note: it is possiblethat all different damages of lesser extent are not generated in this way. Thealternatives of 'way': H: advance by different h-values (default). IND: advance bysubdivision indices.

BLIM=l (opt.) penetration limit of damages. Normally, the transversal extent of damagesis from the shell to the center line. This option defines a lesser transversal extentbeyond of which compartments are not opened. From the point of view ofprobabilistic damage stability, the damage extending to the limit gets the r-factor1-r (or 1 if the damage is at the same time the outermost one). This option isuseful, for instance, if one wants to define only the damages outside B/5. Thealternatives of 'l': b: penetration limit is the given b-value (m) Ii: penetrationlimit is the i:th longitudinal subdivision. As default the maximum transversalpenetration of damages is up to the center line. The option BLIM=l definesanother maximum penetration. The limit may be between the shell and the centerline or beyond the center line. Limit 'l' may be also a surface. This surface shouldbe in the subdivision table as longitudinal subdivision limit in those zones whereone wants to limit penetration. Another way to define penetration limit is to addcolumns PLIMIT and/or SLIMIT to the subdivision table. By this way the limitingsurface may change from zone to zone. If the generated damages extending to thepenetration limit will be used in probabilistic damage stability, the r-factors arecalculated using the actual b-values of the limits (previous release assumed r=1).Damages for the revised probabilistic rules of SOLAS II-1 should be generatedalways up to a penetration limit, to B/2 surface or to a surface between the shelland B/2. If the surface does not exist in the subdivision table, it will be added tothe LBP or LBS column temporarily.

HLIM=l (opt.) limit of vertical extent of damages. Normally, the vertical extent of damagesis up to the maximum height of watertight hull. This option defines a lesservertical extent beyond of which compartments are not opened. From the point ofview of probabilistic damage stability, the damage extending to the limit gets thev-factor 1-v. This option is useful, for instance, if the compartments above Hmaxare not opened. The alternatives of 'l': h: vertical limit is the given height (m) Ii:vertical limit is the i:th horizontal subdivision.

LOCK=dam: (opt) damages that should not be regenerated. If the damage does not exist, itis normally generated. If the damage exists, its regeneration is skipped. 'dam'is a single name or a name list (name,name,...) where 'name' is name of a table(column DAM expected), name of a damage group or name of a damage.

STAGE=(sta1, sta2...): (opt) The option STAGE=(sta1,sta2,...) of 'GEN DAM' renames the first stage as'sta1' and adds stages 'sta2',... to the end of the generated damages. The defaultnumber of phases is zero in the stages of the generated damages. More phasesis generated by adding in option STAGE, number of phases to the name of thestage separated by slash e.g. STAGE=(FINAL/5,CROSS/1). If an additionalstage 'sta2',... is put in brackets [], the stage is optional. This means that thestage is added to the damage only if it opens new compartments. Does thestage open new compartments is checked from the compartment connectiontable (see column STAGE in the compartment connection table, argument


60 (272)


CCONN). This feature is useful e.g. in defining cross flooding stages. ExampleGEN DAM ... STAGE=(FINAL,[CROSS])

ACLASS=class (opt) All possible scenarios will be generated taking into account how progressiveflooding may proceed through A-class boundaries, which are defined in thesubdivision table. A-class boundaries should also be marked in the compartmentconnection table by the letter 'A' in the column CLASS. In case of ACLASS=DAM, the program generates the scenarios as separatedamages adding #n, n=1,2,..., to the name of the parent damage. The generated#n named damages will have the same control number in the damage and resulttables. As there can be only one control number for each damage in the finalcalculation, the one leading to the smallest s-factor will be chosen to be includedfor the final index calculated by the command CAL TAB…..SRULE=SOLASII-1.The final rule for factor s will be applied for the last stage and the intermediaterule for possible preceding stages according to normal practice. In case of ACLASS=STA, the program adds the scenarios to one single damage asseparate stages, having the names #n, n=1,2,... The A-class boundaries divide thedamage into several intermediate stages following the spreading of water. The laststage is the largest one, i.e. having the greatest number of damaged compartments.The #n named stages are independent stages meaning that rooms listed in possiblepreceding stages are ignored. Also in these damages the final rule for factor s will be applied for the last stageand the intermediate rule for the other stages according to normal practice whencalculating by CAL TAB…..SRULE=SOLASII-1.

ADD='command1, 'ADD='command2', ADD='command3'...:

(opt) If there is need to add commands only to damages which belongto a limited set of zones, this may be done by the following formatADD=('command',zoneselection) The zone selection is any set of zonenumbers Zi or zone ranges Zi-j. The zones are either positive or negative integers,e.g. Z3, Z4-6, Z-5, Z-4-7. If nothing is specified in the ADD command, or, if allspecified zone numbers are negative, it is assumed that all (other) zone numbersbelong to the selection as positive numbers. The command is added to the damageif any damaged zone appears as positive number in the zone selection but noneof damaged zones appears as negative number in the zone selection. Examples:ADD='command' command is added to every damage ADD=('command')ADD=('command',Z3,Z7-11) command is added to the damages whereany of zones 3,7,8,9,10,11 is damaged ADD=('command',Z-2-5,Z-9)command is added to the damages where none of zones 2,3,4,5,9 is damagedADD=('command',Z2-12,Z-9) command is added to the damages whereany of zones 2...12 is damaged but not 9.

ALL (opt) If there are more than one lesser extent damages belonging to the samemain damage (having same control number) and some of them define the samedamage, the identical ones are discarded. However, if the user wants to calculateall generated damages, the option ALL is available for the purpose The several zone damages are combinations of one zone damages. Because ofthis feature, the compartments which are in the gaps between adjacent zones willnot be damaged. Now the new logic in the compartment limit table checks alsothe gaps and marks with letter G in the zone column the compartments which aretotally within the gaps between the zones. The compartments marked with 'G' areadded to the several zone damages if the gap is inside the limits of the damage. Ifonly a recess of a compartment is in the gap, one should divide the compartmentinto two parts, recess + rest, and define a permanent connection between the


61 (272)


parts in the compartment connection table. This way, the compartment will beflooded through the recess in the several zone damages but the compartment maybe ignored in the one zone damages. The user should not create a table for storing information about the damage cases;the program generates a suitable one. The description of the table is:

NEW TAB*DAM1 NMCOL DAMCOL ZONECOL X1COL X2COL IBCOL NBCOL MBCOL MB1COL IHUCOL NHCOL HSUCOL HSU1COL SIDECOL IHDCOL HSDCOL NR

BOX Normally, the rooms are selected according to the data in the compartment limittable (option WTC). If this option is specified, the rooms that are totally or partly(at least 10 cm) inside the penetration box are selected. The penetration box isdefined by x1, x2, height of the horizontal subdivision limiting damage upwards(if any) and downwards (if any) and the longitudinal subdivision limiting depth ofpenetration inwards.

DAM Name of damage case. The names are built from the following components: <prefix><side><zone><ls><hsu><hsd> where <prefix> is prefix of the name as specified by the option PREF=prf <side> side of penetration P or S <zone> is ordinal number of the zone from the aft end of the ship (one zonedamages) or <zone> is n-m where n is the ordinal number of the aftmost zone andm is the ordinal number of the foremost zone (damages of more than one zone) <ls> is of the form .i where i is the index of the longitudinal subdivision limitingdamage or <ls> is 0 if damage extends to the center line <hsu> is of the form .i where i is the index of the horizontal subdivision limitingdamage upward or <hsu> is 0 if damage extends without limit upward <hsd> is of the form -i where i is the index of the horizontal subdivision limitingdamage downward or <hsd> is empty if damage extends without limit downward.The program does not make any interpretations of the names of the damage cases,so the user has free choice to change names of damage cases.


62 (272)


ZONE Number(s) of damaged zone(s) with prefix Z. If several zones are damaged, thenumbers are expressed by Zn-m, where 'n' is the number of the aftmost zone and'm' is the number of the foremost zone.

X1 X-coordinate of the foremost point of the aft end of the damage.

X2 X-coordinate of the aftmost point of the forward end of the damage.

IB Index of longitudinal subdivision limiting damage inward. IB is the index of theoutermost longitudinal subdivision that is not penetrated. Zero means that damageextends without limit to the center line.

NB Total number of longitudinal subdivisions in the damaged zone(s).

MB Mean transverse distance of longitudinal subdivision IB. The values are takenfrom the subdivision system. If IB is 0, also MB is 0.0.

MB1 Mean transverse distance of the longitudinal subdivision next to IB outward.

IHU Index of horizontal subdivision limiting damage upward. IHU is the index of thelowermost horizontal subdivision that is not penetrated. Zero means that damageextends without limit upward.

NH In the damaged zone(s), total number of horizontal subdivisions limiting damageupward.

HSU Height of horizontal subdivision IHU. The values are taken from the subdivisionsystem. If IHU is 0, also HSU is 0.0.

HSU1 Height of the horizontal subdivision next to HSU downward

SIDE Side of penetration, P (port) or S (starboard).

IHD Index of horizontal subdivision limiting damage downward. IHD is the indexof the uppermost horizontal subdivision that is not penetrated. Zero means thatdamage extends without limit downward.

HSD Height of horizontal subdivision IHD. The values are taken from the subdivisionsystem. If IHD is 0, also HSD is 0.0.

NR Number of damage. Each damage case is assigned a number 10000*(numberof adj. zones) + serial number. All damage cases having the same number areconsidered as variations of the same damage. The damage cases that differ onlyby different downward limits are assigned the same number. For example, inprobabilistic damage stability, from all damage cases that have the same number,the one giving least 's' is selected to contribute to the index.

Example:

DAM ZONE X1 X2 IB NB MB MB1 IHU NH HSU HSU1----------------------------------------------------------------P1.1.0 Z1 -3.00 5.40 0 0 0.00 0.00 1 1 4.70 0.00P1.0.0 Z1 -3.00 5.40 0 0 0.00 0.00 0 1 0.00 0.00P2.1.1-1 Z2 5.40 16.80 1 1 4.34 0.00 1 1 4.70 0.00P2.1.1 Z2 5.40 16.80 1 1 4.34 0.00 1 1 4.70 0.00P2.1.0-1 Z2 5.40 16.80 1 1 4.34 0.00 0 1 0.00 0.00P2.1.0 Z2 5.40 16.80 1 1 4.34 0.00 0 1 0.00 0.00...

DAM SIDE IHD HSD NR


63 (272)


---------------------------------P1.1.0 P 0 0.00 10001P1.0.0 P 0 0.00 10002P2.1.1-1 P 1 1.00 10003P2.1.1 P 0 0.00 10003P2.1.0-1 P 1 1.00 10004P2.1.0 P 0 0.00 10004...

9 Calculation controlThe calculation control commands are CALCULATE and a set of related commands defining arguments for thecalculation. Because calculation of a large set of cases usually takes quite a long time, it is important that the argumentsare correctly defined; changing of any argument requires recalculation of the hydrostatic data. Therefore be sure that

■ the hull is correct and the bulkhead deck is at right height, (i.e. DAMHULL is correctly defined).■ the set of calculation heeling angles is sufficient, which means that the range of angles is large enough and angles

are at correct places (needs of criteria, authorities),■ arrangement is correct,■ openings are OK if progressive flooding will be studied.

The result material stored in the data base is divided into individual units called calculation cases. The calculation casesare identified by the initial condition name and the damage case name separated by a slash, e.g. INI/DAM. Calculationcommands as well as output commands refer to the calculation cases by the parameter 'case', which is a single calculationcase or a combination of cases formed by the help of initial condition and damage case groups, see the CALCULATE-command.

9.1 Calculation arguments

Every calculation argument has a default value taken from the system database or from the project database. Often defaultvalues are chosen so that there is no need to change the arguments.

9.1.1 GZ calculation in the constant direction (for ships)

OPT CDIR @@calculate GZ in the constant direction (default).

The stability curves of NAPA are traditionally calculated on a plane perpendicular to the stability axis. This means thata point in a GZ curve is obtained in the following way:

1. The ship is rotated the given angle around the stability axis (given angle from the arguments).

2. The ship is balanced so that the displacement equals to the mass and the centre of buoyancy equals to the centre ofmass in the direction of the stability axis.

3. GZ is the difference between the centre of buoyancy and the centre of mass in the direction perpendicular to thestability axis and in the direction of the sea level.

4. The given angle (see 1) and the calculated GZ form one point of the GZ curve.

Normally the stability axis is the x-axis but other axes are available by the argument AZIMUTH.

9.1.2 GZ calculation in the variable weakest direction (for offshore structures)

A new additional option to calculate GZ curves was introduced in NAPA in release 2003.1. This method calculates GZvalues to the weakest direction. The weakest direction is the direction where the moment of inertia of the water planeintersection is minimum (the moving liquids in the ship are also taken into account). Because the weakest direction changes


64 (272)


with heeling, the GZ curve is no more on a plane, i.e. the difference between the centre of buoyancy and the centre ofmass is no more perpendicular to a constant stability axis but perpendicular to a varying stability axis.

The method to calculate the GZ curve is selected in the arguments by

OPT VDIR @@calculate GZ in the variable weakest direction

Calculation of the GZ curve in the weakest direction proceeds in the following way:

1. The steady equilibrium floating position and the weakest direction in that position is calculated. GZ is zero at thispoint.

2. The ship is rotated to the weakest direction by an argument angle which is next greater than the angle of thefloating position.

3. The rotated ship is balanced so that the displacement equals to the mass and the centre of buoyancy equals to thecentre of mass in the direction perpendicular to the weakest direction.

4. The new weakest direction is calculated in the balanced floating position.

5. GZ is the difference between the centre of buoyancy and the centre of mass in the weakest direction of the balancedfloating position and in the direction of the sea level.

6. Points 2-5 are repeated for all argument angles greater than the steady floating equilibrium position.

7. If there are argument angles lesser than the steady floating position, these are treated in the same way than theangles greater than the steady equilibrium floating position.

After calculation of the GZ curve, we have a set of floating positions and GZ values. Each floating position may berepresented in many (infinite number of) ways. The current NAPA outputs and treats the GZ curve as a function of theargument heeling angle. This way is selected because, if there is no twisting, i.e. the weakest direction is constant; theGZ curve meets the curve calculated around the stability axis which is perpendicular to the weakest direction. There aregood reasons to represent the GZ curve in some other way, too, e.g. as a function of the angle between the vector ofthe z-axis of the ship coordinate system and the normal vector of the sea level. Because the quantities calculated fromthe stability curves are used as measures of stability and the authorities set limiting values for these measures (stabilityrequirements), it is important to recognize the definition of the argument axis and be assured that the default choice ofNAPA is the correct one.

Note 1. Use a dense set of argument angles to get enough accuracy.

Note 2. The default wind direction used with the wind model is always perpendicular to the stability axis, also incases which are calculated using option VDIR. This means that the wind direction changes according to the weakestdirection. The constant wind direction is available by option 'dir' of the command WMOD in CR.

The request for VDIR option came from offshore industry and it should not be used when calculating ships.

9.1.3 GZ calculation in the inclination direction (for offshore structures)

OPT HDIR @@heel in inclination direction

The GZ curves of NAPA are calculated on a plane perpendicular to the inclination direction.

9.1.4 GZ calculation in the constant weakest direction (for offshore structures)

OPT WDIR @@heel in constant weakest direction

The GZ curves of NAPA are calculated on a plane perpendicular to the direction where the water plane inertia momentis at its minimum.


65 (272)


9.1.5 Handling of arguments

ARG List current arguments

ARG SAVE name text Save the current arguments in the data base in the named set. The option 'text' isdescription of the set and it is shown in the catalog of argument sets. The name'STD' has special meaning - every time DA is entered the arguments from this setare assigned (if found).

ARG GET name Assign arguments from the set 'name'.

ARG CAT List catalog of stored argument sets. Alternative command CAT ARG.

ARG UNS name Unsave the set 'name'. Alternative command DEL ARG name.

ARG COPY name ver/proj Copy the set from another version and/or project. Alternative command COPYARG name ver/proj.

ARG LIST name List arguments of the set 'name'. The arguments are not assigned.

9.1.6 Automatic argument storing and restoring

There is a mode in DA that stores the current arguments every time the user leaves DA and again restores the samearguments the user next time enters DA. The command

AAS name

puts on the automatic storing and restoring mode. The mode is working for that user who is active at the call of thecommand. The argument set 'name' is registered for the active user; every user may have own set of arguments for storingand restoring or he may share the same set with other users.

For the active user, the mode is put off by calling AAS OFF.

9.1.7 Calculation hull

The calculation hull is changed by the command

HULL hull;

If a nonstandard hull is used in the calculations, results from these damage cases can be put out only under the sameargument hull. If you get a warning 'results rejected because of new or changed hull', the reason may be that results arecalculated for another hull than the current one. The name of the default hull is DAMHULL, but it can be changed inthe reference system, task REF.

9.1.8 Heeling angles

The set of heeling angles that will be used in calculations is defined by one of the following command alternatives:

HEEL h1,h2,...;

HEEL DB1;

HEEL SYSDB;

HEEL NAPADB;

In the first alternative, the heeling angles h1, h2, ... are given in the standard NAPA way (single values or series). Thealternatives HEEL DB1, HEEL SYSDB and HEEL NAPADB take into use the set stored in the project data base (defaultset), the set stored in the system data base or the set stored in the NAPA database (see the command STDHEELS).


66 (272)


If the initial condition is fetched from the loading condition subsystem (LD), the displayed values of the stability curvebefore flooding are interpolated from the curve of LD. The range of heeling angles of the loading case must cover therange of DA to make interpolations possible.

The commands

STDHEELS a1,a2,...;

STDHEELS DB1 a1,a2,...;

STDHEELS SYSDB a1,a2,...;

STDHEELS NAPADB a1,a2,...;

store the standard sets in the data bases; the first two ones store the set in the project data base, the third one stores theset in the system data base and the last one stores the set in the NAPA data base. The commands without angles showthe stored set.

If the set of heeling angles starts form 0 (angles are not ranging over zero), the program selects automatically the sideto which the ship spontaneously starts to heel (the 'weakest' side) and normally this is what is wanted. However, if forsome reason the user wants the ship to heel to some specific direction (SB or PS), the program must be forced to do soby the argument command

FORCE alt;

or by the command of damage definition

SIDE side;

where 'side' is SB or PS. The alternative FORCE AUTO overrules the effect of FORCE PS or FORCE SB (but notthe definition command SIDE). Note, that in stability criteria calculations, studying of the GZ-curve always starts from0.0 continuing to the selected direction. If the selected direction is not the 'weakest' one, the GM-requirements are notnecessary what is wanted.

It happens sometimes that 'symmetric' cases are not quite symmetric. The standard logic of the program selects for theheeling angles that side the ship spontaneously starts to go to. This is not always what is wanted and the user forces theship to heel to the opposite direction. This has the drawback that, on the 'wrong' side, the ship probably has no equilibriumheeling angle. Because the missing equilibrium floating position is an unsatisfactory situation and NAPA does not makeany guessing, the program refuses to calculate cases to the 'wrong' direction arising the error 6113.

To go around this error, a command SYTOL, symmetry tolerance, is installed

SYTOL tol;

where tol is tolerance in meters. The default value for the symmetry tolerance is 1 mm, i.e. if GZ at the upright is morethan 1 mm, the calculation cannot be forced to the 'wrong' direction. The user may take responsibility of making moreasymmetric cases symmetric by giving a bigger value to the symmetry tolerance; when a case is forced to the 'wrong'side and GZ at the upright is less than the symmetry tolerance, the GZ curve is so changed that it becomes symmetric.The symmetry tolerance is purposed only for making slight asymmetric cases symmetric and the user should carefullyconsider how big symmetry tolerance may be safely used.

The really asymmetric cases cannot be forced to the 'wrong' side. The only way to get results for these cases from the sidethe ship does not spontaneously go to, is to use a set of heeling angles that ranges from the starboard side to the port side,calculate both sides at the same time and select from the results the desired side.

9.1.9 Arrangement

Changing of the arrangement version is done by

ARR name/DEFAULT;


67 (272)


From the arrangement the program fetches the room parameters (permeabilities, steel reductions, color codes) and uses it asplotting background in different drawings. The additional parameter DEFAULT marks the arrangement to be permanentlydefault in DA, otherwise the default arrangement is the one permanently registered one in SM.

The program stores in the damages the source of permeabilities. It may be the current arrangement or damage definition.This makes it possible to check permeabilities every time the results are needed. If the source of permeability is thearrangement and the value in the arrangement differs from that in the damage, the results are rejected. In calculation ofdamages, the changed values are automatically stored and used, redefinition of damages is not necessary.

9.1.10 Watertight arrangement

A watertight arrangement can be defined to prevent definition of damage cases which contain rooms outside the watertighthull.

The damaged rooms or any parts of them should never be situated outside the watertight hull.

The room parameters are still fetched from the current arrangement selected by the command ARR.

WTARR name/DEFAULT

Select arrangement that forms the 'watertight' arrangement. Only the rooms which are named directly in this arrangementcan be accepted in the damage cases.

The option DEFAULT makes the arrangement to be used permanently.

WTARR NONE

This form switches off the effect off WTARR, i.e. every geometric object is accepted into the damage cases whereverit is situated.

9.1.11 Compartment connections

Often there is need to combine rooms so that, if one room is flooded, water is spreading also to other ones. Answer tothis need is the argument CCONN, compartment connections. Compartment connections is a table which defines thecompartments or rooms which are connected together in flooding process.

There are two applications of the table:

1. To define watertight compartments consisting of several rooms. The compartment is assumed to be surroundedby watertight bulkheads and decks but the bulkheads and decks between the rooms are not watertight causing allrooms to be flooded if any one of them is flooded.

2. To define connections between watertight compartments or rooms. If the connection is open, water may spreadthrough it from one watertight compartment to another. If the connection is closed, the compartments are floodedseparately.

The compartment connections are checked every time the user or the program is defining damages. If a compartment orroom is damaged and it appears in the table, the compartments which are connected to it are added automaticly to thedamage so that water makes a common surface within them (they form a temporary combined object). There is up-to-date check for the connections: if in command CALC the results are younger than the connection table, the damage isredefined and the results are recalculated if the changes in the table cause changes in the damage. This feature may beused, for example, defining easily condition 'watertight door open/closed'.

The compartment connections are activated by the argument command

CCONN name

and deactivated by


68 (272)


CCONN OFF

The compartment connections are defined in the table CCONN*name. A model table CCONN*model is stored in DB7.

The table has to contain at least the column COMP. Every row of this column defines one watertight compartmentconsisting of the named geometric rooms. The names are separated by commas or spaces.

In the optional column WTCOMP, one may name the watertight compartments. The name must not be name of anygeometric room defined in DEF. These names may be used in damages or in the column CONN of this table (see below),not in the column COMP.

The optional column CONN is reserved for definition of connections between compartments. If there is a name, let say'A', on a row of column CONN, there is an _one-directional_ connection from 'A' to the room(s) stated in the columnCOMP. 'A' may be a name stated in the column WTCOMP or name of a geometric room. If 'A' is a geometric room andit is a member of a wt-compartment, all other member rooms of the compartment are connected to the room(s) of COMP.Also in COMP, it is not necessary to state all members of the wt-comartment, one is enough. Two-directional connectionrequires two rows, one row for each direction.

The optional column OPEN defines the status open/closed of the connection. If there is 'N' in the column OPEN, theconnection of that row is currently closed, otherwise the connection is open.

All rooms which are directly or undirectly connected, no matter how long the chain is, are flooded together.

9.1.11.1 Example

WTCOMP COMP CONN OPEN ----------------------------------------WT11 R10 R20 R21 R40 R41 WT11 Y R30 R31 R20 Y R41 R42 R43 R42 Y R50 R51 R60 Y R43 R401

If WT11 is given in the command ROOM of damage definition, so

■ R10, R20 and R21 are flooded because they are members of WT11■ R40 and R41 are flooded because there is an open connection from WT11■ R30 and R31 are flooded because there is an open connection from R20 which is flooded as member of WT11■ R42 is flooded because it forms the same wt-compartment with R41

which is flooded through an open connection from WT11■ R43 is flooded because it is flooded through an open connection from R42 wich forms the same wt-compartment

with R41 which is flooded through an open connection from WT11■ R401 is flooded because it forms the same wt-compartment with R43 which is flooded through an open connection

from R42 which forms the same wt-compartment with R41 which is flooded through an open connection fromWT11

Outcome is the same if, instead of WT11, R10, R20 or R21 is given in the damage definition.

9.1.12 Options

The command

OPTION opt,opt,...;

assigns various options controlling calculation. The option alternatives are (concerning calculation):


69 (272)


NOPERM Do not replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities inflooded conditions.

PERM Replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities inflooded conditions (default).

PROGR Study progressive flooding through unprotected openings.

WEPROGR Special case: as PROGR but progressive flooding occurs through ALLunprotected AND weathertight openings that are immersed in the final equilibriumthough only if the option CONT is used in the calculation command. No otheropenings will be considered in the calculation of progressive flooding.

NOPROGR Studying of progressive flooding not allowed (default).

NOLOG Do not print flooded rooms and heeling angles in the calculation log.

LOG Print the whole calculation log (default).

CDISP Print and plot the results with reference to the constant displacement method(default).

VDISP Print and plot the results with reference to the variable displacement method.

DB Keep results in the database removing them from the memory immediately afteruse. This option ensures large runs also in small computers (default).

MEM Keep results in the memory during the whole run without removing them afteruse. This option may be used if connection to the database is slow and there isenough memory space in the computer to keep all results in the memory at thesame time.

CDIR calculate GZ curves in the constant direction (default).

VDIR calculate GZ curves in the variable weakest direction.

INDIV all rooms open to sea are filling individually.

COMM rooms open to sea are filling with a common surface provided they are not markedto flood individually (default).

9.1.13 Other arguments

Relevant openings

The openings are significant at the calculation phase only if studying of progressive flooding is required (OPT PROGRor WEPROGR). The current status of the openings (relevant/irrelevant) can be asked by CAT OPE. The set of relevantopenings is handled by the commands ROP and IRO (for more information, see the section OUTPUT).

Draugth limit

Calculation of damages may be limited to a certain draught range, i.e. if the initial draught is outside the draught limitsdefined in the damage, the case is not calculated and it does not contribute to any result of damage stability. The damagedefinition command

TLIM tmin tmax

specifies the draught limits.

Trim limit

Normally, if the ship trims over 80 degrees, it is considered lost. It takes much time to iterate the floating position beoyondthe 80 degrees limit. If there are many damages leading to the case 'ship trims upside down', the user may save time byassigning a smaller trim limit by the argument


70 (272)


TRLIM tr

where 'tr' is the trim limit in degrees stopping iteration and beoyond of which the ship is considered lost. Default 80 deg.'tr' must not exceed 88 deg or be negative.

Significant wave height

The significant wave height will be used, when the program calculates the amount of assumed accumulated seawater asa function of the wave height and the residual freeboard. The argument

SWH h

defines the wave height (m).

Freeboard deck edge

The freeboard deck edge is defined and used in output as the margin line but, in calculation of the amount of assumedaccumulated seawater, the residual freeboard is calculated from the freeboard deck edge instead of the margin line.However, if the freeboard deck edge is missing, the margin line is used also in calculation of accumulated seawater. Theargument

FRBD name

defines the freeboard deck edge.

9.2 Calculations

The CALCULATE command carries out calculation of basic hydrostatics for the damage cases according to the controlof the calculation arguments and command parameters.

9.2.1 Calculate initial condition - damage case combinations

CALC init/dam FORCE CONT PREV INTERM EQP PROGR EQL MAXTIME=time LL CROSS=tRHO=r SINT=n PRIPERM=sel FINTIME=t SIM DSIM DYNPAR=tab RTAB=restab

The command starts calculation of damage stability of the given calculation case(s). Inflooding and outflooding of waterhappens in the way described in the definition of the damage case(s). The results of every stage and phase are automaticallystored in the data base for future use i.e. output. The CALCULATE-command causes calculation of the case(s) if resultscannot be found in the data base or they are not up-to-date. The results are considered to be out of date, if the damagedefinition, initial condition definition, hull or any room participating in the damage has a later definition date than the dateof the stored results. The option FORCE forces the results to be recalculated even if they would be up to date.

The command options are as follows:

init/damage (opt) set of initial condition - damage case combinations to be calculated. Thedefault set is that defined by the command SEL CASE or that given in theprevious CALC, LIST, PLD or DRW command. In the option 'init/dam', 'init'is name of an initial condition or name of an initial condition group and 'dam' isname of a damage or name of a damage group.

FORCE force recalculation of damages even they are up to date.

CONT Causes calculation of each stage and phase to start at the equilibrium angle of heelof the previous stage or phase. From this angle calculation proceeds in turn toboth sides. If the original set of calculation heeling angles is not ranging to bothsides of zero, the set is made symmetrical about zero. This calculation methodmay effect on the results if there are breaches or seawater overflows or calculationhappens in the progressive mode. This option should be used in simulation typecalculations.


71 (272)


PREV works like the option CONT but, if the case was previously calculated, the startingangle of the first stage and phase is the equilibrium angle at the end of flooding ofthe previous calculation.

INTERM store results in the data base after each intermediate phase and stage. This optionmakes it possible to study the results in some other process even if calculation isunfinished.

EQP starts the calculation of every stage and phase by first calculating the final floatingposition and after that the other angles of heel.

PROGR calculates the cases assuming progressive flooding through the openings asdefined in the compartment connection table.

EQL calculates only the equilibrium floating position, not GZ curve.

MAXTIME=time has effect only if calculation proceeds in time steps. This option sets the maximumtime limit for the time predictions. If the equilibrium is reached before the timelimit, calculation stops when flooding ends. 'time' may be given in secondse.g. MAXTIME=1800s, in minutes e.g. MAXTIME=30min or in hours e.g.MAXTIME=0.5h.

LL calculates damages as specified in Load Line Convention.

CROSS=t if the cross-flooding time of the last stage exceeds the given time t, the programadds to the end of the case a new stage which corresponds to the cross-floodingsituation at time=t. Cross-flooding time is calculated according to ResolutionA.266(VIII) and the cross-flooding arrangement is defined in the compartmentconnection table (argument CCONN). The added stage is called CROSS<time>s,e.g. CROSS600s. t: time in seconds.

RHO=r use the given sea water density (t/m3) instead of the value from the referencesystem.

SINT=n store every n:th phase in the data base. This option is useful if there is very largenumber of phases and the floating position of the ship is not changed muchbetween phases (e.g. in simulation with short time step).

PRIPERM=sel select primary source of permeability PERM: primary source is column PERM of the ship model. IPERM: if existing, primary source is column IPERM of the ship model (default).

FINTIME=t start time of the final stage. S-factor for SOLASII-1 will be calculated acc. toformulas of the final stage after the given time limit. Useful e.g. in simulation. t: elapsed time in secods.

SIM calculate the case using the quasi-static simulation method.

DSIM calculate the case using the dynamic simulation method.

DYNPAR=tab table for parameters used in dynamic simulation. The table should contain columnID for identification of parameters and column COEF for values of parameters.

RTAB=restab store results in the given table immediately after calculation of each phase. restab: receiving table. The quantities to be stored are those having predefinedcolumn in the table. The quantities available are the same as in LQ DRES exceptthose needing calculation of mass distribution (flooded water, liquid loads).

9.2.2 Calculate damages as specified in the given table

CALC TAB=tab FORCE


72 (272)


Calculate damages as specified in the column CASE of the given table.

TAB=tab name of the table where to find the column CASE (name of the table withoutprefix). The column CASE should contain initial conditions and damage cases inthe form 'init/dam' where 'init' is name of an initial condition and 'dam' is name ofa damage case.

FORCE force recalculation of damages even they are up to date.

CALC TAB=tab STO=tab SRULE=r PRULE=r RRULE=r VRULE=r SKIP=lim PONLY CROSS=t

Calculate damages as specified by a table and associated probability data s, p, r, v and a.

TAB=tab name of, so called, summary table (name without prefix). The table must havecontents suitable for calculation of probibilities (see the chapter 'Probabilisticdamage stability' in the documents of DA).

STO=tab (opt) name of table where to store the probability data (name without prefix). Ifthis option is missing, only the damages are calculated, not the probabilities.

SRULE=r (opt) rule how to calculate s. The alternatives of r are: REG25: the SOLASregulations for cargo ships (default). A265: the IMO regulations for passengerships A.265. M574: MSC/Circ.574. SOLASII-1: SOLAS Chapter II-1, part B-1.macro: name of a macro.

PRULE=r (opt) rule how to calculate p. Default: the rule of s. The alternatives are same asfor SRULE.

RRULE=r (opt) rule how to calculate r. Default: the rule of s. The alternatives are same as forSRULE.

VRULE=r (opt) rule how to calculate v. Default: the rule of s. The alternatives are same asfor SRULE.

SKIP=lim (opt) skipping limit of damages. Default 0. The probability data of the damageshaving p lesser than lim are not stored in the table.

PONLY (opt) calculate only p-, r- and v-factors, not s-factor.

CROSS=t if the cross-flooding time of the last stage exceeds the given time t, the programadds to the end of the case a new stage which corresponds to the cross-floodingsituation at time=t. Cross-flooding time is calculated according to ResolutionA.266(VIII) and the cross-flooding arrangement is defined in the compartmentconnection table (argument CCONN). The added stage is called CROSS<time>s,e.g. CROSS600s. t: time in seconds.

9.2.3 Calculate the required and attained subdivision index R and A.

CALC PROB TAB=tab RSI=r MINGM FIX=(init,init,...)

TAB=tab name of table where to find probability data of the damages. The table of thisargument should be generated by the commands 'CAL TAB=sum STO=tab...' and'SEL CASE TAB=tab STO=tab ONLY=...'.

RSI=r (opt) rule how to calculate the required subdivision index R. Default: the ruleused in calculation of s. The alternatives of r are: REG25: the SOLAS regulationsfor cargo ships (default). A265: the IMO regulations for passenger ships A.265.M574: MSC/Circ.574 (in this case R is equal to Amax). macro: name of a macro.SOLAS II-1.

MINGM (opt) start calculation of the minimum GM values which result in A = R.


73 (272)


FIX=(init,init,...) (opt) change and/or fix GM of initial conditions. If 'init' is of the form 'name=gm',GM of the initial condition is changed to 'gm' and it is kept fixed during iterationof min. GM. If 'init' is just name of the initial condition, GM is fixed to its initialvalue during iteration of min. GM.

9.3 Calculation of dredgers

The program is capable to calculate intact and damage stability for dredgers.

There are three concepts that are needed for stability calculations:

1. Breach for describing the spill-out edge. The inflow of seawater and outflow of seawater and cargo may occur overthe spill-out edge.

2. Sliding cargo for defining dredgings. The sliding cargo has the property that it may flow out over the spill-out edgeand the shifting angle of its surface may differ from the horizontal.

3. Openings for defining the seawater overflows. The seawater overflows are openings through which seawater mayflow in and out but sliding cargo may not. Any relevant unprotected opening that connects the sea and the hopper istreated as seawater overflow.

Both intact and damage stability calculations are carried out in DA. All functions of DA are available when using breaches,sliding cargoes and seawater overflows.

Breaches are defined in damages by the option BREACH of the command ROOM.

Sliding cargoes are defined in initial conditions by the command SLCAR.

Seawater outflows are normal openings connecting the sea and the hopper.

If a compartment contains sliding cargo and it has at least one breach, any opening which is relevant, unprotected andwhich connects the compartment to the sea, is considered seawater overflow to that compartment. Through seawateroverflows water may flow in and out but cargo not. Seawater overflows effect on the results in all stages, progressivemode is not needed.

There is up-to-date check of the relevant openings if the damage has seawater overflows: if the command CALC is calledand any relevant opening is younger than the results or the set of relevant openings is changed, the results are recalculated.It is recommended to define the set of seawater overflows inside the damage definition task by the command 'ROP swofl1,swofl2,...' to prevent irrelevant changes of the openings to disturb calculation.

10 Output of resultsOutput in DA is a set of list and plot components of different contents. Every listing and plotting command - LIST, PLDand DRW - makes one component. An output document in DA is a set of output components listed and plotted in adesired order.

The size of one component, i.e. how much data is listed or plotted in one output command, may vary very much. The sizeof one component is controlled by the command parameters.

There are three types of output components:

1. general list components

2. components listing and plotting definitions

3. components listing and plotting calculated results

The components listing general data have fixed layout and they are usually called once per output document.

The components that list and plot data definitions use the table output function and arrangement oriented drawing function(DRW) thus having flexible contents and layout.


74 (272)


The components that list and plot calculated results use the table output function, the diagram plotting function and thearrangement oriented drawing function. The flexibility of the lists and plots may be increased by a large number ofcommand options.

Every command, that makes a component listing or plotting results, accepts so called case parameter 'init/dam'. The caseparameter defines the extent of the results, i.e. how many initial conditions and damage cases are listed, plotted or takeninto account in one component. The default assumption is that all possible initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phasesand heeling sides are listed, plotted or taken into account. Any subgroup of the extent, selected by the case parameter, ispossible using suitable options in output commands.

Macros are suitable for making large output documents. To make it easier to build output macros, the command SELECTis installed. This command creates and assigns a set of variables containing arrays of selected calculation cases, initialconditions, damage cases, stages, phases and sides.

Result lists and plots are generated from the precalculated and stored cases. Output commands do not cause calculationof cases which cannot be found in the result data base; calculation must always be started by the explicit commandCALCULATE.

The results can be put out in any combination of calculation cases; initial condition and damage case groups need not tobe the same as in the calculation phase and new groups can be generated and used any time as long as the independentcases exist and are up-to-date.

It is possible to make lists and plots only from results which are up to date, otherwise the cases are rejected. Trying touse obsolete calculation cases does not cause automatic recalculation. To handle rejected cases, start calculation or, inspecific conditions, rescue the results by the command RESCUE. If you use RESCUE, be sure that you can do it safelywithout any harm; there is always some good reason to reject the results.

10.1 Output arguments

Output is not pure listing and plotting, as many items are not calculated until in the output phase, e.g. GM-requirements ofthe stability criteria. Therefore, as the calculation phase contains calculation arguments, the output phase contains outputarguments. Different arguments come in use in different lists and plots, e.g. if some list do not contain any informationabout the margin line, it does not matter what it is.

The commands related to output arguments

The current situation of the output arguments is asked by the command ARG (lists also calculation arguments):

ARG;

The margin line is selected by the command

MARGIN name;

Omitting this command, the default margin line, if any, is used.

Openings are used in connection related to the critical heeling angle calculations. The set of relevant openings, i.e. the setof openings taken into account, is handled by the commands

ROP opening,opening,...;

and

IRO opening,opening,...;

The command ROP makes the named openings relevant and the command IRO makes them irrelevant. If the keywordALL is given instead of name list, all openings are made relevant or irrelevant. Even if an opening is relevant, it is nottaken into account in critical angle calculation of the specific damage case and stage if

■ it connects damaged rooms,■ it connects undamaged rooms,■ it leads from the sea to a damaged compartment,


75 (272)


■ it is watertight,■ it is weathertight and calculation concerns SOLAS II-1, Part B-1,Reg. 25-1.

The status relevant/irrelevant of each defined opening is written by the command CAT OPE.

The list of stability criteria, which must be studied for the current project, comes usually from the demands of theauthorities. For each relevant criterion, the program calculates GM-requirements in connection with output. The set ofrelevant stability criteria is handled by the commands RCR and ICR.

RCR crit,crit,...;

and

ICR crit,crit,...;

The command RCR makes the named criteria relevant and the command ICR makes them irrelevant. If the key wordALL is given instead of a list of names, all criteria are made relevant or irrelevant. The status relevant/irrelevant of eachdefined criterion is written by the command CAT CRI.

For checking purposes, one can change the initial GM and print and plot results using the new GM-value. The changedGM affects on the stability curves and floating positions but not on the GM-requirements. GM is changed by

CGM newgm

Because CHANGE GM is an output parameter, it cannot change hydrostatic results stored in the data base. If youwant to know, what the changing of GM (which is same as changing the height of the center of gravity) really means,change the initial condition and recalculate.

The following parameters of the OPTION command control output of some lists and plots:

OPTION NOMRG

(In old lists only) Do not print information about margin line points (needed if the margin line contains very many points),

OPTION NOHEADER

(In old lists only) Do not print header page(s).

OPTION CDISP

List and plot results with reference to the constant displacement method (default), i.e. the GZ values are calculated bydividing the uprighting moment by the initial displacement.

OPTION VDISP

List and plot results with reference to the variable displacement method, i.e. the GZ values are calculated by dividing theuprighting moment by the initial displacement reduced by the possible outflow of liquid loads.

Most of the lists of DA are based on the table output module. For these lists, the selection of quantities is done by thestandard NAPA-command LQ. The command LQ subj ALT gives the list of quantities available.

Standard table output options are available by the command TOO.

10.2 General list components

The layout and contents of the following components are fixed and they do not depend on calculated cases.

10.2.1 Object

LIST OBJ

■ Function: lists general data about the current argument hull■ Layout: fixed


76 (272)


■ Contents: hull, extreme x-coordinates and parts of the hull■ Options: none

10.2.2 Reference dimensions

LIST REF

■ Function: lists main dimensions of the ship■ Layout: fixed■ Contents: length, breadth, design draught, reference coordinates, thickness of shell plating and keel plate and density

of water■ Options: none

10.2.3 Symbols

LIST EXPL subj

■ Function: lists explanation texts of the quantities currently selected by LQ for the given subject■ Layout: fixed■ Contents: current quantity selection, explanations and units■ Options:

subj subject of list available in LQ

10.2.4 Standard header page

LIST HDP subj

■ Function: lists standard header page, i.e. the components REF, OBJ and EXPL together in this order. Thecomponent EXPL is listed only if the option 'subj' is given.

■ Layout: fixed■ Contents: main dimensions of the ship, general data about the current hull and (optionally) explanation texts of the

quantities■ Options:

subj subject of list (see LIST EXPL).

Needed only if explanation texts are wanted.

10.2.5 Arguments

LIST ARG

■ Function: lists current calculation and output arguments■ Layout: fixed■ Contents: arguments and current values■ Options: none

10.3 Components listing and plotting definitions

The following components are purposed for listing and plotting how different data are defined. The list components usethe table output module and they are controlled by LQ, !FORM and table output options. The plot components use a setupfor controlling layout and contents of drawings.


77 (272)


10.3.1 List margin line

LIST MARG NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt

■ Function: lists definition points of the current margin line■ Layout: table controlled by LQ MARG, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ MARG:

■ X : x-coordinate■ FR: frame number■ Y : y-coordinate■ Z : z-coordinate

■ Options :

NOH do not print header line.

X=(x,x,...) list points at given x's; x is either a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series(min,max,step). Default = list all points defining the margin line.

D=d list points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aftend, if d is negative, the intervals start from the fore end.

t-opt standard table output options.

10.3.2 List freeboard deck edge

LIST FRDB NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt

■ Function: lists definition points of the current freeboard deck edge■ Layout: table controlled by LQ MARG, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ MARG:

■ X : x-coordinate■ FR: frame number■ Y : y-coordinate■ Z : z-coordinate

■ Options :


X=(x,x,...) list points at given x's; x is either a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series(min,max,step). Default = list all points defining the freeboard deck edge.

D=d list points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aftend, if d is negative, the intervals start from the fore end.


10.3.3 Plot margin line

DRW parts MARG PEN=p ZRANGE=rng CLOSE=OFF

■ Function: plots the current argument margin line on a setup. In the y-projection, the whole margin line is shown. Inthe x-projection, the intersection points of the margin line and the x-section are illustrated by circle markers (sizecontrolled by text height TH). In the z-projection, that part of the margin line is shown, which is within the rangeof the section. The range of the z-section is 0.2 m below the section and 2 m above the section or that given by theoption ZRANGE.

■ Layout : controlled by the command SETUP


78 (272)


■ Contents: margin line shown in different parts of the setup■ Options :

parts n: the n:th part of setup n,m: parts n to m of setup Default: all parts

PEN=p logical pen code for margin line in y- and z-projections

ZRANGE=rng range of the z-section. Default 0.2 m below and 2 m above the section. (z1,z2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dz: range is dz meters on both sides of the section

CLOSE=OFF the drawing is left open to make it possible to add other drawing components to it

10.3.4 List openings

LIST ROPE OPE=(op,op,...) NOH SOP=(s1,s2) t-opt

■ Function: lists definition data of relevant openings■ Layout : table controlled by LQ ROPE, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ ROPE:

■ NAME : name of opening■ TEXT : description of opening■ X : x-coordinate of position of opening■ FR : frame of opening■ Y : y-coordinate of position of opening■ Z : z-coordinate of position of opening■ OTYPE : type of opening■ DATE : definition date of opening■ CONN : compartments connected by opening

■ Options :

OPE=(op,op,...) restrict the set of openings to the given ones or to the given type(s) op = name ofopening, name of opening group or type of opening UNP, WEA, WAT or UNN. Ifthere is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default allfrom the arguments.

NOH no header line(s)

SOP=(s1,s2) sort openings acc. to given properties X = x-coordinate Y = y-coordinate Z = z-coordinate A = alphanumeric T = type of opening s1 is the primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted. s2 is thesecondary property for sorting openings having the same position after theprimary sorting. If only SOP is given, program assumes s1=A. If only oneproperty is given (SOP=s1 accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A.If this option is missing, the order is that defined by the command ROP.

t-opt standard table output options


79 (272)


10.3.5 Plot openings

DRW parts OPEN OPE=(op,op...) XRAN=xrng YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng IDO=i CLOSE=OFF

■ Function: plots openings on a setup. In different parts, only the openings that are within the range of the section areshown (see options XRAN, YRAN and ZRAN).

■ Layout : controlled by the command SETUP■ Contents: openings shown in different parts of the setup■ Options :

parts n: the n:th part of setup n,m: parts n to m of setup Default: all parts

OPE=(op,op...) restrict the set of openings to the given ones or to the given type(s); op = name ofopening, name of opening group or type of opening UN, WE or WA. If there isonly one element in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default: all fromthe arguments.

XRAN=xrng range of the x-sections. Default 2 m on both sides of the sections. (x1,x2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dx: range is dx meters on both sides of the sections

YRAN=yrng range of the y-sections. Default is the whole breadth of the ship. (y1,y2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dy: range is dy meters on bothsides of the sections

ZRAN=zrng range of the z-sections. Default 0.2 m below and 2 m above the sections. (z1,z2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dz: range is dz meters on both sides of the sections

IDO=i i=ON, show id. of openings; i=OFF show openings without identification. DefaultON.

CLOSE=OFF the drawing is left open to make it possible to add other drawing components to it.

10.3.6 List points

LIST POIN POI=(p,p,...) NOH SOP=(s1,s2) t-opt

Like LIST ROPE but, instead of the openings, the object of listing are the special points. The sorting alternative T (type)is not available.

10.3.7 List initial conditions

LIST INIT init NOH GLO t-opt

■ Function: lists how initial conditions are defined■ Layout : table controlled by LQ INIT, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ INIT. Note that many quantities are not assigned before the initial conditions

are calculated together with a damage case. To get calculated quantities, one has to use the parameter 'init/damage',instead of the parameter 'init'. Available quantities:■ INIT : name of initial condition■ TEXT : description of initial condition■ T0 : initial draught■ TR0 : initial trim■ HEEL0 : initial heeling angle


80 (272)


■ AZI : azimuth angle■ TRA : initial trim angle■ TRX : initial trim along x-axis (m)■ TRXA : initial trim angle along x-axis■ HEELX : initial heeling angle around x-axis■ DSP0 : displacement■ XCD0 : x-coordinate of the center of gravity of displacement■ YCD0 : y-coordinate of the center of gravity of displacement■ ZCD0 : z-coordinate of the center of gravity of displacement■ LCB : x-coordinate of the center of buoyancy■ TCB : y-coordinate of the center of buoyancy■ VCB : z-coordinate of the center of buoyancy■ GM0 : uncorrected GM■ GMRED : GM reduction by free surfaces■ GM : corrected GM■ KMT : height of transverse metacenter■ WSOL : solid mass■ XCS : x-coordinate of center of gravity of solid mass■ YCS : y-coordinate of center of gravity of solid mass■ ZCS : z-coordinate of center of gravity of solid mass■ WLIQ0 : total mass of liquid loads■ XCL0 : x-coordinate of center of gravity of WLIQ0■ YCL0 : y-coordinate of center of gravity of WLIQ0■ ZCL0 : z-coordinate of center of gravity of WLIQ0■ TAGR : measured aft draught of grounded ship■ TFGR : measured fore draught of grounded ship■ HEELGR : measured heeling angle of grounded ship■ X1GR : aft end of the ground contact■ X2GR : fore end of the ground contact■ LGR : length of ground contact■ LGR/1 : length of ground contact at the first contact■ LGR/2 : length of ground contact at the second contact■ XCNT : x-coordinate of point of contact■ XCNT/1 : x-coordinate of point of contact at the first contact■ XCNT/2 : x-coordinate of point of contact at the second contact■ YCNT : y-coordinate of point of contact■ YCNT/1 : y-coordinate of point of contact at the first contact■ YCNT/2 : y-coordinate of point of contact at the second contact■ ZCNT : z-coordinate of point of contact■ ZCNT/1 : z-coordinate of point of contact at the first contact■ ZCNT/2 : z-coordinate of point of contact at the second contact■ DEPTH : depth at point of contact■ DEPTH/1 : depth at point of contact at the first contact■ DEPTH/2 : depth at point of contact at the second contact■ GRF : grounding force in equilibrium floating position■ GRF/1 : grounding force in equilibrium floating position at the first contact■ GRF/2 : grounding force in equilibrium floating position at the second contact


81 (272)


■ Options :

init name of a single initial condition, name of an initial condition group or init/dam. Default = initial condition(s) given by the command SEL or those used in theprevious CALC or output command.


GLO list x-, y-, and z-coordinates in the global coordinate system. Default = shipcoordinate system.


10.3.8 Plot initial conditions

For example, the command

DRW FLO cases STAGE=INTACT

produces drawings about initial conditions. See the command DRW FLO, plot floating position.

10.3.9 List damage cases

LIST DDAM dam FOCC DEF NOH SEP t-opt

■ Function: lists how damage cases are defined■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DDAM, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DDAM:

■ DAM : name of damage case■ DDES : description of damage case■ COMP : name of damaged compartment■ DES : description of damaged compartment■ PERM : permeability of compartment as stored in def.■ VOL : total moulded volume of compartment■ XCG : x-coordinate of the center of volume of compartment■ YCG : y-coordinate of the center of volume of compartment■ ZCG : z-coordinate of the center of volume of compartment■ VLIM : upper volume limit of inflooded water (opt. VOL=)■ FLIM : upper filling limit of inflooded water (opt. FILL=)■ PVOL : pumped volume (opt. PUMP=)■ DATE : definition date of compartment■ STAGE : name of stage where compartment starts to flood■ ACCH : height of accumulated water■ ACCV : volume of accumulated water■ AIRP : air pressure in air pocket■ AIRV : air volume■ PRESSURE : constant overpressure of gas■ PHASES : number of the intermediate phases for flooding a compartment to the equilibrium: 0, immediately

in the equilibrium; n>0, flooding divided into n height steps; n(V), flooding divided into n volume steps; vstep,water is flooded in equal volume steps, number of steps undefined

■ VSTEP : amount of water (m3) flooded into (out of) the compartment between the successive phases. Definitiondata of the damage

■ RATE : filling rate


82 (272)


■ IPERM : permeability of compartment in input format. The type of the quantity is character string and itrepresents permeability as it was entered to the system (as single number or function)

■ NOTE : note

■ Options :

dam name of a single damage case or name of a damage case group. Default = damagecase(s) given by the command SEL or those used in the previous CALC or outputcommand. (Instead of 'dam', one may use also the form 'init/dam').

FOCC show each compartment only once, in that stage where it first occurs in damagedefination

DEF show compartments according to damage definition (that is all stages where theyare explicitely mentioned)

NOH do not print header lines. Default = print

SEP Print each damage case as a separate table inserting an intermediate headerbetween each damage case.


10.3.10 Plot damage cases

DRW parts DAM damcases FFIL=c STA=st ASTA=st CLOSE=c SEP=s

■ Function: plots damaged compartments on a setup.■ Layout : controlled by the command SETUP■ Contents: damaged compartments shown in different parts of the setup. Optionally, the compartments that may be

flooded through openings in the stage PROGRESSIVE, are shown in the same drawing if the parameter 'damcases'is replaced by the case parameter 'init/dam',

■ Options :

parts n: the n:th part of setup, n,m: parts n to m of setup, Default: all parts

damcases name of a single damage case, name of a damage case group or init/dam forshowing compartments that may be flooded progressively.

FFIL=code make the program to use the same logical fill code for damaged and progressivelyflooded compartments.

FFIL=(code1,code2) assign s the first logical fill code for the damaged compartments and the secondcode for the progressively flooded compartments. The default fill code is FLW.

STA=st shows the compartments that are damaged in the given stage 'st' and in the stagesbefore it. For instance, if the damage has three stages 1, 2 and 3, STAGE=2 showsthe damaged compartments in the stages 1 and 2.

ASTA=st shows only those compartments that occur explicitly in definition of the specifiedstage.

CLOSE=c c=ON, close the drawings; c=OFF, leave the drawing(s) open to make it possibleto add other components to the drawing(s) or to draw all plots in the samedrawing. Default = ON.

SEP=s s=ON, all plots are separate drawings; s=OFF, all plots are subdrawings.


83 (272)


Default = OFF. Note that this option is ignored if CLOSE=OFF.

Before plotting a damage case, the program assigns the variables DADAM - name of damage case, DADDES - descriptionof damage case and DXMID - x-coordinate of the center of damage.

10.4 Components listing and plotting calculated results

The components represented in this chapter list or plot calculated results in the form of tables made by the general tableoutput module, in the form of diagrams made by the general diagram output module or in the form of arrangement orienteddrawings (DRW).

10.4.1 General options

The scope of results is defined by the case-parameter 'init/dam'. The results of all possible combinations of initialconditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling sides are listed or plotted unless the sets of initial conditions, damagecases, stages, phases and heeling sides are not restricted by the specific options. If the 'case' parameter is missing in thecommand, the scope of results is defined by the command SEL, or if no such command is given, by the 'case' parameterwhich was last given in a calculation or output command.

The options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restrict the scope of results to be listed or plotted in onecommand. The options have the following form and meaning:

INIT=ini; INIT=(ini,ini,...)

restrict output to the given initial condition(s); ini is either name of an initialcondition or initial condition group.

DAM=dam; DAM=(dam,dam,...)

restrict output to the given damage case(s); dam is either name of a damage caseor damage case group.

STAGE=sta; STAGE=(sta,sta,...)

restrict output to the given stage(s); the stage before flooding is called INTACTand the progressive stage is called PROGRESSIVE. The name *LAST means thelast stage of the damage case no matter what its name is.

PHASE=pha; PHASE=(pha,pha,...)

restrict output to the given phase(s); the intermediate phases are called 1,2,... andthe last phase of the stage is called EQ (equilibrium phase of the stage), LAST or*LAST.

SIDE=side restrict output to port side (side=PS) or to starboard side (side=SB).

NOT=no; NOT=(no,no,...) no: INTA, do not list or plot results of the stage 'before flooding' INTE, do not list or plot results of the intermediate phases (others than EQ) EQ, do not list or plot results of the equilibrium phases of stages PROG, do not list or plot results of the stage PROGRESSIVE

The default way to list results is to put results of all initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and sides in onecombined table. The default way to plot results is to put drawings of all initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phasesand sides into one drawing as subdrawings. However, many of the LIST and PLD commands accept the option SEP whichcauses the results to be divided into separate tables or individual drawings. Each separate table begins with intermediateheader line(s) unless the option NOH is given. The option SEP separates the results into different tables or drawings inthe following way:

SEP=INI divide results so that each initial condition forms own table or individual drawing

SEP=DAM divide results so that each damage case forms own table or individual drawing

SEP=CASE divide results so that each initial condition- damage case-combination forms owntable or individual drawing


84 (272)


SEP=STAGE divide results so that each initial condition-damage case-stage-combination formsown table or individual drawing

SEP=PHASE divide results so that each initial condition-damage case-stage-phase-combinationforms own table or individual drawing

SEP=SIDE divide results so that each initial condition-damage case-stage-phase-side-combination forms own table or individual drawing

SEP divide results down to the lowermost level

When results are listed or plotted separately, the program assigns the following variables before the next table is printedor the next drawing is opened:

DACASE name of case 'init/dam' (if SEP = CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE)

DAINIT name of initial condition (if SEP = INI, CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE)

DAIDES description of initial condition (if SEP = INI, CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE)

DADAM name of damage case (if SEP = DAM, CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE)

DADDES description of damage case (if SEP = DAM, CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE)

DASTAGE name of stage (if SEP = STAGE, PHASE or SIDE)

DAPHASE name of phase (if SEP = PHASE or SIDE)

DASIDE side (if SEP = SIDE)

The option NOH causes that the tables are printed without the general header line and intermediate header line(s) betweenseparate tables. The table headers are handled by the table output options.

The lists which contain x-, y- and z-coordinates accept the option GLO, which causes the coordinates to be expressed in theglobal coordinate system (z-axis pointing to the center of Earth, xy-plane parallel with the surface of the sea). Normally,the coordinates are expressed in the ship coordinate system.

10.4.2 List summary of results

LIST DRES cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists summary of calculated results■ Layout: table controlled by LQ DRES, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DRES:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam■ DAM : name of damage case■ DDES : description of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ IDES : description of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB Equilibrium floating position■ T : draught in the equilibrium floating position■ TA : draught at AP■ TF : draught at FP■ TR : trim in the equilibrium floating position■ HEEL : equilibrium heeling angle■ AZI : azimuth angle■ TRA : trim angle along stab. axis


85 (272)


■ TRX : trim along x-axis (m)■ TRXA : trim angle along x-axis■ HEELX : heeling angle around x-axis■ GM0 : uncorrected intact GM■ GMRED : GM-reduction due to free surfaces■ GMCORR : GM-correction due to free surfaces (=-GMRED)■ GM : corrected intact GM■ KMT : transverse metacenter of intact ship■ MINGM : minimum corrected GM requirement■ MINGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement■ MAXKG : maximum allowed KG■ DCRI : name of determining criterion■ GMACT0 : actual GM at the upright (zero heeling angle)■ GMACT : actual GM at the equilibrium heeling angle■ MMS : GM reduction as a result of flooding■ GMINGM : global minimum GM of damage case (incl. all stages and phases)■ GMINGM0 : global minimum GM0 of damage case (incl. all stages and phases)■ GMAXKG : global maximum KG of damage case (incl. all stages and phases)■ GDCRI : name of determining criterion of the global minimum GM■ STAT : status of stability criteria■ REQ : requirement of the stability criterion. The name of the criterion is required as qualifier, REQ/crit■ ATTV : attained value of the quantity defined by the stability criterion. The name of the criterion is required as

qualifier, ATTV/crit■ MOMNT : extermal moment. MOMNT/a gives the moment at the angle 'a' (default 0). The name of the criterion

is required as qualifier, MOMNT/crit■ FA : heeling angle at which the first unprotected or weathertight opening immerses■ FA/STA : heeling angle at which the first unprotected or weathertight opening immerses with a matching stage■ FLOPEN : name of unprotected or weathertight opening first immersing■ FLOPEN/STA : name of unprotected or weathertight opening first immersing with a matching stage■ FAUN : heeling angle at which the first unprotected opening immerses■ FLUNOP : name of unprotected opening first immersing■ FAWE : heeling angle at which the first weathertight opening immerses■ FLWEOP : name of weathertight opening first immersing■ RESFLD : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected or weathertight openings at equilibrium■ RESFLD/STA : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected or weathertight openings at equilibrium with a

matching stage■ OPEN : name of unprotected or weathertight openings having minimum reserve to immersion■ OPEN/STA : name of an opening resulting from RESFLD/STA■ MRGIMA : immersion angle of margin line■ XMRGIM : x where margin line first touches water■ RESMRG : minimum reserve to immersion of margin line at equilibrium■ XRESMRG : x where minimum reserve occurs■ F1 : effective mean freeboard acc. to IMO A265 (from area)■ RMRGD : minimum reserve to immersion of margin line in way of damage■ XRMRGD : x-location where RMRGD occurs■ RMRGED : minimum reserve to immersion of margin line except in way of damage■ XRMRGED : x-location where RMRGED occurs■ FRB : minimum freeboard


86 (272)


■ XFRB : x-location of minimum freeboard■ FRBDAM : minimum freeboard in way of damage■ XFRBDAM : x-location of FRBDAM■ FRBED : minimum freeboard except in way of damage■ XFRBED : x-location of FRBED■ FRBIMA : immersion angle of the freeboard deck edge■ XFRBIM : x-location of FRBIMA■ AGZ : total area under (the greatest hump of) the GZ curve■ AFA : area under (the greatest hump of) the GZ curve between equilibrium and angle of unprotected flooding■ AGZR : area under (the greatest hump of) the GZ curve between equilibrium and lesser of angle of unprot.

flooding or 22 deg for 1-comp. damages or 27 deg for several comp. damages■ AREASOL :area of the GZ curve as defined for calculation of 's' in chapter II-1, regulation 7 of the draft

amendments to SOLAS (SLF 42/5)■ TAREA : value of Tarea corresponding to the optimal Trange (chapter II-1, regulation 7 of the draft amendments

to SOLAS, SLF 42/5)■ RANGE : range of the greatest hump■ RANGEF : range of the greatest hump between equilibrium and angle of unprotected flooding■ PHI_V : angle of vanishing stability (second intercept of the greatest hump)■ RANGES : range of positive stability as defined in calculation of 's'■ RANGESOL : range of the GZ curve as defined for calculation of 's' in chapter II-1, regulation 7 of the draft

amendments to SOLAS (SLF 42/5)■ TRANGE : the optimal value of Trange between 10 and 15 degrees giving the greatest 's' (chapter II-1,

regulation 7 of the draft amendments to SOLAS, SLF 42/5)■ MAXGZ : maximum height of GZ curve■ AMAXGZ : angle where the maximum occurs■ GZMAXR : maximum height of GZ between equilibrium and angle of unprotected flooding■ MAXGZR : maximum height of GZ in 15 deg range beyond the equilibrium■ MAXGZS : maximum height of GZ curve as defined in calculation of 's'■ GZMAXSOL : maximum righting lever GZmax as defined for calculation of 's' in chapter II-1, regulation 7 of

the draft amendments to SOLAS (SLF 42/5)■ TGZMAX : maximum righting lever TGZmax as defined for calculation of 's' in chapter II-1, regulation 7 of the

draft amendments to SOLAS (SLF 42/5)■ GRF : grounding force at equilibrium■ GRF/1 : grounding force at equilibrium at the first contact■ GRF/2 : grounding force at equilibrium at the second contact■ XCNT : x-coordinate of the point of contact■ XCNT/1 : x-coordinate of the first contact■ XCNT/2 : x-coordinate of the second point of contact■ YCNT : y-coordinate of the point of contact■ YCNT/1 : y-coordinate of the first contact■ YCNT/2 : y-coordinate of the second point of contact■ ZCNT : z-coordinate of the point of contact■ ZCNT/1 : z-coordinate of the first contact■ ZCNT/2 : z-coordinate of the second point of contact■ DEPTH : depth at the point of contact■ DEPTH/1 : depth at the first contact■ DEPTH/2 : depth at the second point of contact■ WSOL : solid mass


87 (272)


■ XCS : x-coordinate of the center of solid mass■ YCS : y-coordinate of the center of solid mass■ ZCS : z-coordinate of the center of solid mass■ WLIQ : total mass of liquid loads■ XCL : x-coordinate of the center of mass of liquid loads■ YCL : y-coordinate of the center of mass of liquid loads■ ZCL : z-coordinate of the center of mass of liquid loads■ DISP : displacement (at equilibrium)■ XCD : x-coordinate of the center of displacement■ YCD : y-coordinate of the center of displacement■ ZCD : z-coordinate of the center of displacement■ DSP0 : initial displacement■ WFL : total mass of water in damaged compartments at the equilibrium floating position■ XCF : x-coord. of the center of mass of inflooded water■ YCF : y-coord. of the center of mass of inflooded water■ ZCF : z-coord. of the center of mass of inflooded water■ FLW : mass of inflooded water minus outflooded cargo at the equilibrium floating position■ BUOY : buoyancy of the intact hull at equilibrium■ LCB : x-coordinate of the center of buoyancy■ TCB : y-coordinate of the center of buoyancy■ VCB : z-coordinate of the center of buoyancy■ CCOEF : c coef. for SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1■ SFACC : s factor for SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1■ GZMAXS : maximum GZ for calculating s■ RANGES : range for calculating s■ CFAC : c coeff. for MSC/Circ.574■ SSFAC : s factor for MSC/Circ.574■ SFACSOL : factor 's' representing the probability of survival of the damage as defined in Revised SOLAS

chapter II-1■ CSOL : coefficient 'C' in the equation of the factor 's' (probabilistic damage stability, chapter II-1, regulation 7 of

the draft amendments to SOLAS, SLF 42/5)■ SFACMOM : s factor (moment) by SOLAS II-1■ SEVERITY: severity classification by DNV;

■ Red, ship sinks or capsizes■ Yellow, some relevant stability criterion not met (status NOT MET);■ Green, all relevant stability criteria met (status OK)

■ IMOSEV: severity classification by IMO;■ Red: s<0.25■ Yellow: 0.25<s<1.00■ Green: s=1.00

■ SWH : significant wave height■ XMIN : minimum x of the extent of the damage■ XMAX : maximum x of the extent of the damage■ YMIN : minimum y of the extent of the damage■ YMAX : maximum y of the extent of the damage■ ZMIN : minimum z of the extent of the damage■ ZMAX : maximum z of the extent of the damage


88 (272)


■ ETIME : elapsed time (time domain calculations)

■ Options :

cases case-parameter 'init/dam'

sco-opt options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope

SEP=level level of separation, level is either INI, DAM, CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE

GLO x, y, z in the global coord. system



10.4.3 Plot results

PLD DRES cases sco-opt POO p-opt

■ Function: plots different quantities as a function of x. The argument x-coordinates come from the damages; x of thedamage is in the middle of its extent. The function value at x is the minimum or maximum of all values occuringat the same x. All damages having the middle point of the extent closer than LREF/100 to each other, get the samex. The maximum is selected for the quantities T, TR, TRX, TRA, TRXA, HEEL, HEELX, MINGM, MINGM0,MMS and WFL, the minimum is selected for the other numeric quantities. The alphanumeric quantities are selectedaccording to the corresponding numeric quantities: DCRI by MINGM, FLOPEN by FA, FLUNOP by FAUN,FLWEOP by FAWE, OPEN by RESFLD and IMOSEV by SFACC. SEVERITY is the worst severity and STAT isthe worst status occurring at the x.

■ Layout : diagrams controlled by PQ DRES and diagram output options■ Contents: quantities selected by PQ DRES:

■ AFA : area of GZ-curve (0,fa)■ AGZ : area of GZ-curve■ AGZR : area within range equilibrium 22/27 deg■ AMAXGZ : angle where maximum GZ occurs■ CASE : initial condition/damage case■ CCOEF : c coefficient SOLAS II-1,B-1,25-1■ CFAC : c coefficient MSC/Circ.574■ DAM : damage case■ DCRI : determining criterion■ F1 : effective mean freeboard (from area,IMO A265)■ FA : angle for progressive flooding■ FAUN : flooding angle of unprotected openings■ FAWE : flooding angle of weathertight openings■ FLOPEN : flooding opening■ FLUNOP : flooding unprotected opening■ FLWEOP : flooding weathertight opening■ FRB : minimum freeboard■ FRBDAM : freeboard in way of damage■ FRBED : freeboard except in way of damage■ FRBIMA : immersion angle of freeboard deck edge■ GMACT : actual GM at equilibrium■ GMACT0 : actual GM at upright■ GZMAXR : max. GZ from equilibrium to flooding■ GZMAXS : max. GZ for s


89 (272)


■ HEEL : heeling angle■ HEELX : heeling around x-axis■ IMOSEV : severity of damage by s■ MAXGZ : maximum of GZ-curve■ MAXGZR : max. GZ within 15 deg range■ MAXKG : maximum KG■ MINGM: minimum GM■ MINGM0 : minimum GM0■ MMS : GM-reduction as a result of flooding■ MRGIMA : immersion angle of margin line■ OPEN : critical opening■ PHI : angle of vanishing stability■ RANGE : range of righting lever■ RANGEF : range up to fldooding angle■ RANGES : range for s■ RESFLD : reserve to downflooding■ RESMRG : reserve to immersion of margin line■ RMRGD : reserve to imm. of margin in way of dam.■ RMRGED : reserve of margin except in way of dam.■ SEVERITY : severity of damage■ SFACC : s factor SOLAS II-1,B-1,25-1■ SSFAC : s factor (MSC/Circ.574)■ STAT : status of stability criterion■ T : draught, moulded■ TR : trim■ TRA : trim angle along stability axis■ TRX : trim along x-axis■ TRXA : trim angle along x-axis■ WFL : sea water in damaged rooms■ X : x-coordinate

■ Options :


sco-opt optio ns INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope

OPE=(op,op...) (opt) add the given openings to the drawings. op: name of opening, name of opening group or ALL. If there is only one elementin the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default all relevant openings.

POO delimiter needed if plot output options follow

p-opt standard plot output options

10.4.4 List floating position

LIST FLO cases sco-opt SEP=level NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists floating position and related quantities■ Layout : table controlled by LQ FLO, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ FLO (subset of quantities of LIST DRES):

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam


90 (272)


■ DAM : name of damage case■ DDES : description of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ IDES : description of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB■ T : draught in the equilibrium floating position■ TA : draught at AP■ TF : draught at FP■ TR : trim in the equilibrium floating position■ HEEL : equilibrium heeling angle■ AZI : azimuth angle■ TRA : trim angle along stab. axis■ TRX : trim along x-axis (m)■ TRXA : trim angle along x-axis (m)■ HEELX : heeling angle around x-axis■ RESFLD : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected and weathertight openings■ OPEN : name of unprotected and weathertight openings having minimum reserve to immersion■ RESMRG : minimum reserve to immersion of margin line■ XRESMRG : x where minimum reserve occurs■ GMACT : actual GM at the equilibrium heeling angle■ GRF : grounding force■ GRF/1 : grounding force at first contact■ GRF/2 : grounding force at second contact

■ Options :






10.4.5 Plot floating position

DRW parts FLO cases sco-opt SIDE=s OPEN=(op,op,...), XRAN=xrng YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng IDO=i HEEL=h MARG=pen, ROT=r CLOSE=c SEP=s GROUND=g WDFI=code FFIL=code, WLPE=code LFIL=l AFIL=code

■ Function: plots floating position, margin line and openings on a setup background■ Layout : controlled by command SETUP■ Contents: floating position shown in different parts of the setup■ Options :

parts n: the n:th part of setup, n,m: parts n to m of setup, Default: all parts



91 (272)


sco-opt options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE and NOT restricting the scope

SIDE=s in y-projections, plot the water line on the gives side(s); s=PS, s=SB or s=(PS,SB).Default: intersection line of the water plane and y-section.

OPEN=(op,op,...) add the given openings to the floating position drawings. op is name of opening,name of opening group, type of opening UN, WE, WA or ALL (all relevantopenings). If there is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may beomitted. How the openings are shown in different parts, see options XRAN,YRAN and ZRAN.

XRAN=xrng range of x-sections to show openings. Default 2 m on both sides of the section. (x1,x2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dx: range is dx meters on both sides of the section

YRAN=yrng range of y-sections to show openings. Default is the whole breadth of the ship. (y1,y2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dy: range is dy meters on bothsides of the section

ZRAN=zrng range of z-sections to show openings and margin line. Default 0.2 m below and 2m above the section. (z1,z2): limits of the range in ascending order (m) dz: range is dz meters on both sides of the sectio

IDO=i i=ON, show id. of openings; i=OFF show openings without identification. Default ON. Text height of identifications iscontrolled by the command TH.

HEEL=a plot the floating position at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium. 'a' is eithera constant heeling angle or EQ+a, steady equilibrium plus an angle ('a' may benegative, too).

MARG=pen add the current margin line to the floating position drawings. pen is logical pencode for the line in y- and z-projections. If pen is omitted, the line is green.The margin line is shown in different parts as explained in the command DRWMARG.

ROT=r r=ON, rotate the ship, keep the waterline horizontal; r=OFF, rotate the waterline,keep the ship horizontal. Default = ON.

CLOSE=c c=ON, close the drawings; c=OFF, leave the drawing(s) open to make it possibleto add other components the drawing(s) or to draw all plots in the same drawing.Default = ON.

SEP=s s=ON, all plots are separate drawings; s=OFF, all plots are subdrawings. Default =OFF. Note that this option is ignored if CLOSE=OFF.

GROUND=g g=ON, plot ground (if any); g=OFF, do not plot ground. Default = ON providedthe feature for grounded ship is installed.

WDFI=code logical fill code for wetted deck in z-projections. Default = no fill.

FFIL=code logical fill code for inflooded water. Default FLW.

WLPE=code logical pen code for waterline. Default=RED.

LFIL=l =ON, fill liq. load tanks with colour code of loads; l=OFF, no filling. Default =ON.

AFIL=code logical fillcode for accumulated water. default=RED

Before every drawing the program assigns the variable DXMID - x-coordinate of the center of damage.


92 (272)


10.4.6 Plot maximum water surface

DRW parts MAXW cases sco-opt SIDE=s OPEN=(op,op,...), XRAN=xrng YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng IDO=i HEEL=h MARG=pen, CLOSE=c WDFI=code WLPE=code

■ Function: plots the maximum water surface, i.e. the highest water level that is combined from all water linesincluded in the given cases 'init/dam'. The generated water surface is stored in the data base under the nameMAXWS(init/dam).

■ Layout : controlled by command SETUP■ Contents: maximum water level shown in different parts of the setup■ Options : as in DRW FLO, see the previous chapter.

10.4.7 List stability curves

LIST GZ cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...) NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists stability curves as function of calculation heeling angles■ Layout : table controlled by LQ GZ, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ GZ:

■ HEEL : heeling angle■ GZ■ T : draught■ TR : trim■ TRA : trim angle along stab. axis■ TRX : trim along x-axis (m)■ TRXA : trim angle along x-axis■ HEELX : heeling angle around x-axis■ GRF : grounding force■ GRF/1 : grounding force at first contact■ GRF/2 : grounding force at second contact■ DISP : displacement (may vary in the stage PROGRESSIVE)■ MS : residual stability lever■ EPHI : dynamic stability lever■ AGZ : total positive area under the GZ curve■ OPNAME : name of unprotected or weathertight opening having minimum reserve to immersion■ IMRES : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected or weathertight openings■ OPNAME/UN : name of unprotected opening having minimum reserve to immersion■ IMRES/UN : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected openings■ OPNAME/WE :name of weathertight opening having minimum reserve to immersion■ IMRES/WE : minimum reserve to immersion of weathertight openings■ OPNAME/WA : name of watertight opening having minimum reserve to immersion■ IMRES/WA : minimum reserve to immersion of watertight openings■ OPNAME/name : name of given opening■ IMRES/name : reserve to immersion of the given opening■ RESMRG : reserve to immersion of margin line

■ Options :



93 (272)



OPE=(op,op...) calc. reserve to immersion for the given openings. op: name of opening, name of opening group or ALL. If there is only one elementin the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default all relevant openings.



10.4.8 Plot stability curves

PLD GZ cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...) MAX=nr SEP=level POO p-opt

■ Function: plots stability curves as function of calculation heeling angles■ Layout : diagrams controlled by PQ GZ and diagram output options■ Contents: quantities selected by PQ GZ:

■ HEEL : heeling angle■ GZ■ MS : residual stability lever■ EPHI : dynamic stability lever■ IMRES : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected or weathertight openings■ IMRES/UN : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected openings■ IMRES/WE : minimum reserve to immersion of weathertight openings■ IMRES/WA : minimum reserve to immersion of watertight openings■ IMRES/name : reserve to immersion of the given opening■ RESMRG : reserve to immersion of margin line

■ Options :



OPE=(op,op...) (opt) add the given openings to the drawings. op: name of opening, name of opening group or ALL. If there is only one elementin the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default all relevant openings.

MAX=nr show in the diagram nr the most critical openings (first immersing)

SEP=level separate curves into different drawings as subdrawings. Default: all curves aresubdrawings in one drawing. INI: each initial condition forms an individual drawing and all curves belonging tothat initial condition are its subdrawings DAM: each damage case forms an individual drawing and all curves belonging tothat damage case are its subdrawings CASE: each calculation case init/dam forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that case are its subdrawings STAGE: each stage in each case forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that combination are its subdrawings PHASE: each phase in each stage and case forms an individual drawing and allcurves belonging to that combination are its subdrawings

SEP each curve forms an individual drawing.

POO delimiter needed if plot output options follow



94 (272)


To plot all diagrams in the same scale and range, one has to define the common scale and range in the plot output options.For helping selection of good ranges, the function

ASG GZL cases sco-opt

assigns a set of variables showing the minimum and maximum values of all diagrams. The variables are:

DAMINA minimum heeling angle

DAMAXA maximum heeling angle

DAMINGZ minimum GZ

DAMAXGZ maximum GZ

DAMINMS minimum MS

DAMAXMS maximum MS

DAMINEFI minimum EPHI

DAMAXEFI maximum EPHI

DAMINORS minimum IMRES

DAMAXORS maximum IMRES

DAMINMRS minimum RESMRG

DAMAXMRS maximum RESMRG

10.4.9 List liquid loads

LIST LIQL cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO HEEL=a NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists how liquid loads are distributed in the tanks in the equilibrium floating position■ Layout : table controlled by LQ LIQL, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ LIQL:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam■ DAM : name of damage case■ DDES : description of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ IDES : description of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB■ NAME : name of liquid load tank■ DES : description of tank■ LOAD : load■ DENS : density of load■ FILL : net filling degree, i.e. loaded vol/net vol■ RED : steel reduction of tank■ VOL : loaded volume■ W : loaded mass■ XCG : x-coordinate of the center of loaded mass■ YCG : y-coordinate of the center of loaded mass■ ZCG : z-coordinate of the center of loaded mass■ AIRP : air pressure in air pocket


95 (272)


■ AIRV : air volume■ VLOAD : volume of liquid load initially in the compartment■ OFLV : volume of outflown cargo

■ Options :





HEEL=a calculate the load distribution at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium. angle: constant heeling angle. If the GZ curve is calculated to both sides, the signof the angle is taken into account as such, otherwise the angle is interpreted asabs(angle) degrees from zero to the direction of the GZ curve. EQ+a: from the steady equilibrium 'a' degrees towards greater list. EQ-a: from the steady equilibrium 'a' degrees towards zero.



10.4.10 Plot liquid loads


DRW FLO cases STAGE=INTACT

produces drawings about liquid loads. See the command DRW FLO, plot floating position.

10.4.11 List damaged compartments

LIST DCOM cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO HEEL=a NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists how inflooded water is distributed in the damaged compartments in the equilibrium floating position■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DCOM, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DCOM:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam■ DAM : name of damage case■ DDES : description of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ IDES : description of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB■ NAME : name of damaged compartment■ DES : description of damaged compartment■ PERM : permeability of compartment■ IPERM : permeability of compartment in input format. The type of the quantity is character string and it

represents permeability as it was entered to the system (as single number or function)■ VOL : volume of inflooded water


96 (272)


■ W : mass of inflooded water■ XCG : x-coordinate of the center of mass of inflooded water■ YCG : y-coordinate of the center of mass of inflooded water■ ZCG : z-coordinate of the center of mass of inflooded water■ VOLT : total volume of cargo + sea water■ ACCH : height of accumulated water■ ACCV : volume of accumulated water■ AIRP : air pressure in air pocket■ AIRV : air volume

■ Options :





HEEL=a calculate the load distribution at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium. angle: constant heeling angle. If the GZ curve is calculated to both sides, the signof the angle is taken into account as such, otherwise the angle is interpreted asabs(angle) degrees from zero to the direction of the GZ curve. EQ+a: from the steady equilibrium 'a' degrees towards greater list. EQ-a: from the steady equilibrium 'a' degrees towards zero.



10.4.12 Combined list for loads and flooded water

LIST CSTAT, list state of compartments, combines two lists 'LIST LIQL' and 'LIST DCOM'. This list is controlled bythe same options as the lists 'LIST LIQL' and 'LIST DCOM' and by the quantity selection LQ CSTA.

CASE initial cond/damage caseDAM damage caseDDES description of damage caseINIT initial conditionIDES description of initial conditionSTAGE flooding stagePHASE flooding phaseSIDE side of ship SB/PSNAME name of compartmentDES comparment descriptionLOAD loadDENS density of loadFILL filling degree of compartmentRED steel reduction of compartmentVOL volume of loadW weight of loadXCG x of center of gravity of load in compartmentYCG y of center of gravity of load in compartmentZCG z of center of gravity of load in compartment


97 (272)


AIRP air (gas) pressure in compartmentAIRV air (gas) volume in compartmentVLOAD initial volume of loadOFLV outflown cargo volumeVFL volume of (flooded) water in compartmentWFL weight of (flooded) water in compartmentXCF x of center of gravity of water in compartmentYCF y of center of gravity of water in compartmentZCF z of center of gravity of water in compartmentPERM permeabilityIPERM permeability in input string formatVOLT total volume of compartmentACCV accumulated volume of sea waterACCH height of accumulated sea waterHCL height of cargo levelHWL height of water level

10.4.13 Plot damaged compartments

The command DRW FLO plots damaged compartments and inflooded water. For more information, see the commandDRW FLO.

10.4.14 List openings

LIST DROP cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) SEP=level NOH, SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n t-opt

■ Function: lists relevant openings■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DROP, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DROP:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam■ DAM : name of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB■ NAME : name of opening■ TEXT : description of opening■ X : x-coordinate of position of opening■ FR : frame of opening■ Y : y-coordinate of position of opening■ Z : z-coordinate of position of opening■ OTYPE : type of opening■ IMMA : immersion angle of opening■ IMMR : reserve to immersion at equilibrium■ IMMR/a : reserve to immersion at angle 'a'■ IMMR/EQ+a: reserve to immersion at angle 'eq + a'■ IMMR/Z : reserve to immersion measured parallel to the z-axis of the ship■ IMMR/Za : reserve to immersion at angle 'a' measured parallel to the z-axis of the ship■ IMMR/ZEQ+a: reserve to immersion at angle 'eq+a' measured parallel to the z-axis of the ship■ REDPD : reduction per one degree of heeling at equilibrium


98 (272)


■ CONN : compartments connected by opening■ RELE : relevance of opening (relevant/irrelevant)

■ Options :



OPE=(op,op,...) list the given ones or the given type(s) or all. op = name of opening, name ofopening group, type of opening UNP, WEA, WAT or UNN or ALL. ALL meansall openings from the arguments. The default set is all opening that are relevantin the damage case and stage. If there is only one element in the brackets, thebrackets may be omitted.



SOP=(s1,s2) sort openings acc. to given properties, I = immersion angle, R = reserve to immersion, X = x-coordinate, Y = y-coordinate, Z = z-coordinate, A = alphanumeric, T = type of opening, s1 is the primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted. s2 is thesecondary property for sorting openings having same position after primarysorting. If only SOP is given, program assumes s1=I, s2=A. If only one propertyis given (SOP=s1 accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A. If thisoption is missing, the order is that defined by the command ROP.

MAXNR=n list only n openings. If the option SOP is missing, n openings first immersing arelisted. If the option SOP is given, n first openings from the sorted order are listed.


10.4.15 Plot openings


DRW FLO cases OPE=ALL

produces drawings about openings. See the command DRW FLO, plot floating position.

10.4.16 List points

Command:

LIST DPOI cases sco-opt POI=(p,p,...) SEP=level NOH, SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n t-opt

Like LIST DROP but, instead of the openings, the object of listing are the special points.

10.4.17 List margin line

Command:

LIST DMRG cases sco-opt NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists how the margin line is regarding to the water line


99 (272)


■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DMRG, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DMRG:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam■ DAM : name of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB■ IMMR : reserve to immersion at equilibrium■ X : x of the point where minimum reserve■ Y : y of the point where minimum reserve■ Z : z of the point where minimum reserve■ IMMA : immersion angle■ XIMM : x where immersion occurs■ IMMR/a : reserve to immersion at angle 'a'■ XIMM/a : x where minimum reserve occurs at angle 'a'■ IMMR/EQ+a: reserve to immersion at angle 'eq + a'■ XIMM/EQ+a: x where minimum reserve occurs at 'eq + a'■ REDPD : reduction per one degree of heeling at equilibrium

■ Options :





10.4.18 Plot margin line


DRW FLO cases MARG

produces drawings about the margin line. See the command DRW FLO, plot floating position.

10.4.19 List freeboard deck edge

LIST DFRB cases sco-opt NOH t-opt

Like LIST DMRG but, instead of the margin line, the object of listing is the freeboard deck edge.

10.4.20 List estimate of outflown cargo

LIST OFL cases t-opt

■ Function: lists an estimate of volume of cargo flown out of damaged rooms. The estimate is made after endedflooding, in the equilibrium floating position of the ship. The estimate is based on the density of cargo and thelocation of the damage. Within each room, the program calculates the minimum and maximum height of the damagerelative to the water line and requires that the hydrostatic pressure inside and outside the room at the damage is thesame. The location of the damage must be defined in the damage case definition by the command EXTENT xmin,xmax,ymin,ymax,zmin,zmax

■ Layout : table controlled by LQ OFL, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ OFL:


100 (272)


■ COMP : name of compartment■ LOAD : type of load, e.g. BW■ DENS : density of load (t/m3)■ ZMIN : distance of the lowest point of the damage from the water line after ended flooding (m)■ ZMAX : distance of the highest point of the damage from the water line after ended flooding (m)■ VLOAD : original volume of the load (m3)■ OFLV : outflown volume (m3)

■ Options :



10.4.21 T/TR limits for immersion of the margin line

LIST LMRG cases sco-opt NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists the greatest draught or trim in each intact condition that still keeps the margin line dry in all stages ofall damages. The calculation method is approximative; the greatest draught is calculated in the trim condition of theintact ship and the greatest trim is calculated for the ship having the draught of the initial condition, the other aspects(GM, heeling angles) are kept constant. To get a more accurate value, one should redefine the initial condition withthe limiting value, recalculate the cases and list the limit again. When, after recalculation, no significant change isoccurring, the limit is accurate enough.

■ Layout : table controlled by LQ LMRG, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ LMRG:

■ T : initial draught (argument)■ TR : initial trim (argument)■ TMAX : maximum draught■ TRLA : maximum trim aftward■ TRLF : maximum trim foreward■ TRL : maximum trim (greatest of TRLA and TRLF)

The options of the command are standard output options.

Warning: the task may be very time consuming.

10.4.22 T/TR limits for immersion of the openings

LIST LOPE cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) NOH t-opt

is equal to LIST LMRG, but the limits are calculated for the openings.

10.4.23 Stability criteria

Damage stability criteria may be used for

■ listing minimum GM and maximum KG requirements■ checking whether damage cases are in compliance with the criteria or not, and listing the corresponding status.■ listing various set of quantities defined by stability criteria.

The minimum GM and maximum KG requirements are available in the following lists (and plots):


101 (272)


■ LIST DLIM and PLD DLIM give a general overview of GM and KG requirements as function of draught or trim (=function of initial condition).

■ A more detailed list about GM and KG requirements may be produced by the commands LIST DMGM and LISTDSUM - GM and KG requirements as function of initial condition and damage case.

■ LIST DCRT and PLD DMGM give the most detailed list and plot of required GM and KG values; in this list andplot, GM and KG requirements are functions of initial condition, damage case, stage, phase, side and criterion.

The status check is available in three lists:

1. LIST DLDT prints the status check as function of initial condition.

2. LIST DSUM gives a more detailed check list, i.e. status as function of initial condition and damage case.

3. The most detailed status check list or plot is available by LIST DCRT or PLD DCRC giving status as function ofinitial condition, damage case, stage, phase, side and criterion.

By using stability criteria, one can define a great number of quantities related to the stability curve, openings, margin lineetc. These quantities may be listed by LIST DCRT (attained value) or plotted by PLD DCRC.

10.4.24 List limit curves - LIST DLIM

LIST DLIM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH INTACT t-opt

■ Function: lists minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of draught or trim (= function of initialcondition)

■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DLIM, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DLIM:

■ T : draught■ DISP : displacement■ TR : trim■ TRA : trim angle■ MINGM : minimum corrected GM requirement■ MAXKG : maximum KG requirement■ MINGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement■ DCRI : name of determining criterion■ TEXT : descriptive text of the determining criterion■ DAM : name of determining damage case

■ Options :


sco-opt options STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope

CRIT=(c,c...) restrict the set of relevant criteria to the given ones. c is either a single criterion ora group. If only one name is given, the brackets may be omitted.


INTACT take into account contribution of GM and KG requirements of initial conditions


10.4.25 Plot limit curves - PLD DLIM

PLD DLIM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) SEP=s INLIM=iname, NAME=name INTACT POO p-opt

■ Function: plots GM and/or KG limit curve(s) as function of draught, trim or displacement


102 (272)


■ Layout : diagrams controlled by PQ DLIM and plot output options■ Contents: quantities selected by PQ DLIM. The quantities T, TR and DISP are available as arguments. The

quantities GMLIMIN, KGLIMIN, GMLIMDA, KGLIMDA, GM0LIMDA and KMT produce curves into thedrawing. The quantities GM, KG and LCOND are available for marking loading conditions in the drawing. Themarking symbol is selected by the POO-option MARK, drawing a line through the marking points is prevented bythe POO- option NOMARK and names are connected to the marks by the POO-option TAG.■ T : draught (argument quantity)■ TR : trim (m) (argument quantity)■ TRA : trim angle (argument quantity)■ DISP : displacement (argument quantity)■ GMLIMDA : min. corr. GM in compliance with damage criteria■ KGLIMDA : max. KG in compliance with damage criteria■ GM0LIMDA : min. uncorr. GM in compliance with damage criteria■ KMT : KMT of the ship■ GMLIMIN : min. GM from the intact lim. curve■ KGLIMIN : max. KG from the intact lim. curve■ GM : GM of loading condition to be marked■ KG : KG of loading condition to be marked■ KGL : virtual KG of loading condition to be marked■ LCOND : loading condition to be marked

■ Options :




SEP=s plot limit curves separately instead of one combined limit curve (default). SEP=DAM: plot curves separately so that there is one combined curve per onedamage case. SEP=CRI: plot curves separately so that there is one combined curve per onecriterion. SEP: plot all curves separately, i.e. there is one curve per each criterion, damagecase, stage, phase and side combination.

INLIM=iname add to the drawing limit curve(s) from the intact stability criteria subsystem(environment INTACT). iname = name of the stored curve

NAME=name store the produced limit curve in data base (unit 4) under the given name.

INTACT take into account contribution of initial conditions. Default: not.

POO needed if plot output options follow


10.4.26 List minimum GM table - LIST DMGM

LIST DMGM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH INTACT t-opt

■ Function: lists minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of initial condition and damage case■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DMGM, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DMGM:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam


103 (272)


■ INIT : name of initial condition■ IDES : description of initial condition■ DAM : name of damage case■ DDES : description of damage case■ T : draught of initial condition■ TR : trim of initial condition■ TRA : trim angle of initial condition■ STAGE : determining stage■ PHASE : determining phase■ SIDE : determining side■ MINGM : minimum corrected GM requirement■ MAXKG : maximum KG requirement■ MINGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement■ DCRI : name of determining criterion■ REQ : required value of determining criterion (GM=MINGM)■ ATTV : attained value of determining criterion (GM=MINGM)■ UNIT : unit of required and attained value■ GM : corrected GM of initial condition■ GM0 : uncorrected GM of initial condition■ STAT : status of criterion

■ Options :







10.4.27 List two-dimensional summary table - LIST DSUM

LIST DSUM cases arg1,arg2 sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH, INTACT t-opt

■ Function: lists minimum GM requirement, maximum KG requirement and status as function of initial condition andcriterion or initial condition and damage case or damage case and criterion in the form of two dimensional table.

■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DSUM, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DSUM:

■ ARG : argument (see options arg1 and arg2)■ MINGM : minimum corrected GM requirement■ MAXKG : maximum KG requirement■ MINGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement■ STAT : status

■ Options :



104 (272)


arg1,arg2 select table arguments, arg1 for rows and arg2 for columns. + at the end of arg1adds to the table an extra column containing the global minimum, maximumor status value of each row. + at the end of arg2 adds to the table an extra rowcontaining the global minimum, maximum or status value of each column. LOAD,CRIT: table(s) as function of initial condition and criterion CRIT,LOAD: as above but rows and columns interchanged T,CRIT: table(s) as function of draught and criterion CRIT,T: as above but rows and columns interchanged TR,CRIT: table(s) as function of trim and criterion CRIT,TR: as above but rows and columns interchanged T,TR: table(s) as function of draught trim TR,T: as above but rows and columns interchanged LOAD,DAM: table(s) as function of initial condition and damage case DAM,LOAD: as above but rows and columns interchanged DAM,T: table(s) as function of damage case and draught T,DAM: as above but rows and columns interchanged DAM,TR: table(s) as function of damage case and trim TR,DAM: as above but rows and columns interchanged DAM,CRIT: table(s) as function of damage case and criterion CRIT,DAM: as above but rows and columns interchanged






10.4.28 List loading condition table - LIST DLDT

LIST DLDT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH INTACT t-opt

■ Function: lists requirement, attained value and status as function of loading condition (initial condition)■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DLDT, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DLDT:

■ LCOND : name of loading (initial) condition■ TEXT : description of loading (initial) condition■ DCRI : name of determining criterion, i.e. criterion which is considered being the most difficult to fulfill■ DAM : name of determining damage case■ STAGE : determining stage■ PHASE : determining phase■ SIDE : determining side■ REQ : requirement of the determining criterion■ ATTV : attained value of the determining criterion in the determining case■ UNIT : unit of requirement and attained value■ STAT : status of loading (initial) condition■ GM : corrected GM of loading (initial) condition■ GM0 : uncorrected GM of loading (initial) condition

■ Options :



105 (272)





INTACT take into account also initial conditions


In this list, what criterion and case is determining, i.e. the most difficult to fulfill, has nothing to do with minimum GMrequirements. See the document CR.2, chapter 3.2.3, for the logic how to select the determining criterion and case.

10.4.29 List criterion table - LIST DCRT

LIST DCRT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) SEP=level INTACT, NOH t-opt

■ Function: lists requirement, attained value, status, minimum GM and maximum KG as function of initial condition,damage case, stage, phase, side and criterion.

■ Layout : table controlled by LQ DCRT, !FORM and table output options■ Contents: quantities selected by LQ DCRT:

■ CASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam■ DAM : name of damage case■ INIT : name of initial condition■ STAGE : name of stage■ PHASE : name of phase■ SIDE : heeling side PS or SB■ RCR : name of relevant criterion■ TEXT : description of criterion■ REQ : required value of criterion■ ATTV : attained value■ UNIT : unit of required and attained value■ STAT : status of criterion■ MINGM : minimum corrected GM■ MAXKG : maximum KG■ MINGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM■ GM : corrected GM of initial condition■ GM0 : uncorrected GM of initial condition■ MOMNT/a : moment at the angle of a (default=0)

■ Options :





INTACT take into list also intact stages (stage before flooding)



106 (272)



10.4.30 Plot criterion check - PLD DCRC

PLD DCRC cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) crt=(o,o,...) ... OPE=(op,op...) MAX=nr SEP=level INTACT POO p-opt

■ Function: plots criterion check plots, i.e. on the stability curve basis, illustrations of the criteria■ Layout : diagrams controlled by PQ DCRC, plot output options and instructions stored in definition of criteria or

given as command options■ Contents: quantities selected by PQ DCRC and markings illustrating criteria:

■ HEEL : Heeling angle (argument)■ GZ : Righting lever■ EPHI : dynamic stability arm e(phi)■ MOM : moment arm■ GM : line showing GM■ RESFLD : reserve to downflooding (unprot. and weathertight)■ RESFRB : reserve to immersion of frb deck edge■ RESUNFL : reserve to unprotected flooding■ RESWEFL : reserve to flooding of weathertight openings■ RESMRG : reserve to immersion of margin line

■ Options :



CRIT=(c,c...) restrict the set of relevant criteria to the given ones. c is either a single criterion ora group. If only one name is given, the brackets may be omitted. Default all.

crt=(o,o...) instructions how to plot criterion dependent markings. Default: instructions storedin definition data of criteria. See below for the options 'o'.

OPE=(op,op...) add the given openings to the drawings. op: name of opening, name of openinggroup or ALL. If there is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may beomitted. Default all relevant openings.

MAX=nr show nr openings first immersing. Default all.

SEP=level separate curves into different drawings as subdrawings. Default: all curves aresubdrawings in one drawing. INI: each initial condition forms an individual drawing and all curves belonging tothat initial condition are its subdrawings DAM: each damage case forms an individual drawing and all curves belonging tothat damage case are its subdrawings CASE: each calculation case init/dam forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that case are its subdrawings STAGE: each stage in each case forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that combination are its subdrawings PHASE: each phase in each stage and case forms an individual drawing and allcurves belonging to that combination are its subdrawings CRIT: each criterion in each phase, stage and case forms an individual drawingand all curves belonging to that combination are its subdrawings SIDE: each curve forms an individual drawing

SEP each curve forms an individual drawing.


107 (272)


INTACT add initial conditions to the set of drawings.

POO needed if plot output options follow


The option crt=(o,o...) controls how to plot criterion dependent markings. These options overrule the control data givenin the definition of criteria. There is always a default way to how plot extra markings if instructions are missing. Becauseadditions depend on the type of the criterion, every criterion type has own set of options. The type of criterion 'crt' is oneof the following alternatives: MAXGZ, MINGZ, MAXHEEL, MINAREA, MINGM, POSMAX, DOWNFLD, RANGE,VSTAB, RESFRB, RESMRG, RESFLD, ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN, DYNARM, GZRATIO. The options 'o' mustbe selected from the following set:

TH=h : text height of additional markings. Default that one selected by diagram plotting.

PEN=p : select pen code for additions, p=logical pen code. Default P1011.

HPEN=p: select pen code for auxiliary lines (usually horizontal), p=logical pen code.Default P1011.

ID=c : control for (numeric) identification; c=ON, add standard identification (default);c=OFF, no identification; c='text', use the given text.

ARROW : draw pointers as arrows. Default bare line.

U=u : horizontal coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. Default: line isvertical.

V=v : vertical coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line.

FLL=c : raster code for area filling, c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

FLA=c : raster code for filling area 'a', c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

FLB=c : raster code for filling area 'b', c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

FLC=c : raster code for filling area 'c', c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

IDA=c : control for identification area 'a'. See ID= for alternatives.

IDB=c : control for identification area 'b'. See ID= for alternatives.

IDC=c : control for identification area 'c'. See ID= for alternatives.

The following table shows the criterion types and the available options, + = available, - = not available.

TH PEN HPEN ID ARROW U V FLL FLA FLB FLC IDA IDB IDCMAXGZ + + + + + - - - - - - - - -MINGZ + + + + + - - - - - - - - -GZRATIO + + + + + - - - - - - - - -MAXHEEL + + - + + + + - - - - - - -MINAREA + - - + - - - + - - - - - -MINGM + + + + + - - - - - - - - -POSMAX + + + + + - - - - - - - - -DOWNFLD + + - + + - - - - - - - - -RANGE + + + + + + - - - - - - - -VSTAB + + - + + + + - - - - - - -RESFRB + + + + + - - - - - - - - -RESMRG + + + + + - - - - - - - - -RESFLD + + + + + - - - - - - - - -ARATIO1 + - - - - - - - + + - + + -ARATIO2 + - - - - - - - + + + + + +


108 (272)


RESDYN + - - - - - - - + + - + + -DYNARM + + + + + - - - - - - - - -

The commands PLD DCRC and PLD DMGM assign two array variables: CRPLDSTR for strings and CRPLDVAL fornumeric values. These variables are assigned automatically and the contents of the arrays is updated every time a newcheck plot is made. The variables are assigned for helping the user to add desired texts to the plots. The arrays containfollowing criterion depending data:

CRPLDSTR

Elements:

1. name of loading condition

2. description of loading condition

3. name of criterion

4. description of criterion

5. name of moment curve

6. description of moment curve

7. name of critical opening (immerses first)

8. unit

9. status (OK/NOT MET)

10. name of damage case (in env. DAMAGE only)

11. descr. of damage case (in env. DAMAGE only)

12. stage of damage (in env. DAMAGE only)

13. phase of stage (in env. DAMAGE only)

14. side PS/SB (in env. DAMAGE only)

CRPLDVAL

Elements:

1. displacement (t)

2. longitudinal center of buoyancy (m)

3. transverse center of buoyancy (m)

4. vertical center of buoyancy (m)

5. longitudinal center of gravity (m)

6. transverse center of gravity (m)

7. vertical center of gravity (m)

8. draught at upright position (m)

9. trim at upright position (m)

10. heeling angle (no moment) (deg)

11. KMT (m)

12. GM (m)

13. draught at the steady heeling (no moment) (m)

14. trim at the steady heeling (no moment) (m)

15. lower limit of range defined by criterion (deg)

16. upper limit of range defined by criterion (deg)

17. rolling angle (mom. IMOWEATHER, USSRWEATHER) (deg)

18. min. required GM (avail. if PLD MGM, DMGM) (m)

19. requirement of the criterion (unit from CRPLDSTR(8))

20. attained value (unit from CRPLDSTR(8))

21. angle of downflooding (deg)


109 (272)


22. immersion angle of the freeboard deck edge (deg)

23. angle where the max. GZ (crit. MAXGZ) (deg)

24. maximum GZ (crit. POSMAX) (m)

25. lower limit of range (crit. RANGE) (deg)

26. upper limit of range (crit. RANGE) (deg)

27. steady heeling angle (mom. taken into account) (deg)

28. area 'a' (crit. ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN) (mrad)

29. area 'b' (crit. ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN) (mrad)

30. area 'c' (crit. ARATIO2) (mrad)

10.4.31 Plot minimum GM check - PLD DMGM

PLD DMGM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) crt=(o,o,...) ... OPE=(op,op...) MAX=nr INTACT POO p-opt

■ Function: plots minimum GM check plots, i.e. on the stability curve basis that is drawn for the minimum GM,illustrations of the criteria

■ Layout : diagrams controlled by PQ DMGM, plot output options and instructions stored in definition of criteria orgiven as command options

■ Contents: same as in PLD DCRC (see previous chapter)■ Options : same as in PLD DCRC (see previous chapter).

10.4.32 List IMO Res. A.265, Reg. 5

The listing function

LIST A265 cases LSA=xa LSF=xf B=b2 N1=n1 N2=n2

lists required intact GM-values to fulfill the stability criteria of IMO Resolution A.265, Regulation 5. The layout andcontents of the list is fixed. The program assumes one compartment flooding (max. heel 7 degrees) unless otherwisestated by the damage definition command COMP. For calculation of 'immersion of the relevant bulkhead deck exceptin way of flooded compartments' the program uses the argument FRBD and the extreme x-coordinates of the damagedcompartments unless no other extension is stated by the damage definition command EXTENT.

The stability criteria are build in the program code and they are:

■ During flooding■ Maximum heel must not exceed 20 degrees (Reg.5 (c) (iii) & (iv))■ Height of the GZ curve is at least 0.05 m (Reg.5 (c) (iii) & (iv))■ Progressive flooding is not taking place (Reg.5 (c) (iii) & (iv))

■ In the final stage of flooding:■ GM is at least 0.003*B2*B2*(N1+N2)/(DISP*F1) or 0.015*B2/F1 or 0.05 m whichever is greater (Reg.5 (c) (i)

(1))■ Angle of heel must not exceed 7 (one compartment damaged) or 12 degrees (two or more compartments

damaged) (Reg.5 (c) (i) (2))■ Except in way of damaged compartments relevant bulkhead deck is not immersed (Reg.5 (c) (i) (3)).

The options of the command are:

cases cases in the standard way 'init.group/dam.group'

LSA=xa aft terminal of Ls. Default minimum x of the current hull

LSF=xf forward terminal of Ls. Default minimum x of the current hull

B=b2 breadth B2 (reg.1 (d) (ii)). Default extreme breadth of the current hull


110 (272)


N1=n1 number of persons N1. Default 0

N2=n2 number of persons N2. Default 0

10.5 Auxiliary list commands

In addition to the LIST-command, the following auxiliary commands are available:

NL open new list

NP new page

LF line feed

TYPE text add text to the list

TAB enter the table output

10.6 Auxiliary drawing commands

The general drawing commands that are available in the damage stability subsystem are

SETUP define setup for DRW-functions. This setup remains valid (also between differentruns) until redefined.

DRW arrangement oriented drawing (other alternatives than DRW MARG, DRWOPEN, DRW DAM, DRW FLO and DRW MAXW)

FIGURE add figure to the list

ID add identifications to drawings

FILL control of filling

TEXT add text to drawing text height

EDR end of drawing.

The commands are not explained here. For more information, see the documents about arrangement drawings.

10.7 Assign variables

All data that are available in lists (expect LIS DSUM) are also available as variables. The variables are useful in macrosand producing own output. The variables are assigned by the command command has. The contents of the variables isthe same as in the equivalent list when all quantities are selected.

10.7.1 Object

ASG OBJ

■ Function: assigns general data about the current argument hull■ Contents:

■ DAOBNAME : name of hull■ DAOBDATE : definition date of hull■ DAOBTIME : definition time of hull■ DAOBSHL : thickness of shellplating■ DAOBXMIN : minimum x of hull■ DAOBXMAX : maximum x of hull


111 (272)


■ DAOBNSEC : number of calculation sections in hull■ DAOBPART : names of hull parts (if any)■ DAOBPVOL : volumes of parts■ DAOBPDAT : dates of parts■ DAOBPNSE : number of calculation sections in parts

■ Options : none

10.7.2 Reference dimensions

ASG REF

■ Function: assigns main dimensions of the ship■ Contents:

■ DALREF : reference length LREF■ DABDWL : reference breadth■ DAZDWL : design draught■ DAAPP : aft perpendicular■ DAXREF : midship■ DAXMID : largest frame■ DAXFR0 : x of frame 0■ DAKEEL : thickness of keel plate■ DASHELL : shell thickness■ DARHO : seawater density

■ Options : none

10.7.3 Symbols

ASG EXPL subj

■ Function: assigns explanation texts of the quantities currently selected by LQ for the given subject■ Contents:

■ DASYMB : symbols of selected quantities■ DAEXPL : explanation texts of selected quantities■ DAUNIT : units of quantities

■ Options :

subj subject of list available in LQ

10.7.4 Quantities of standard header page

ASG HDP subj

■ Function: assigns quantities related to the standard header page, i.e. ASG REF, ASG OBJ and ASG EXPL together.ASG EXPL is done only if the option 'subj' is given.

■ Contents: all quantities of ASG REF, ASG OBJ and ASG EXPL.■ Options :

subj subject (see LIST EXPL). Needed only if explanations are wanted.


112 (272)


10.7.5 Arguments

ASG ARG

■ Function: assigns current calculation and output arguments■ Contents:

■ DAARHULL : name of hull■ DAARHEEL : calculation heeling angles■ DAARARR : arrangement■ DAARWTAR : watertight arrangement■ DAARFOR : argument FORCE■ DAAROPT : calculation and output options■ DAARMARG : margin line■ DAARROP : relevant openings■ DAARRCR : relevant criteria■ DAARCGM : changed GM■ DAARSYT : symmetry tolerance■ DAARFRBD : freeboard deck edge■ DAARSWH : significant wave height■ DAARTRL : trim limit

■ Options : none

10.7.6 Points of margin line

ASG MARG X=(x,x,...) D=d

■ Function: assigns definition points of the current margin line■ Contents:

■ DAMARX : x-coordinates■ DAMARFR : frame numbers■ DAMARY : y-coordinates■ DAMARZ : z-coordinates

■ Options :

X=(x,x,...) assign points at given x's; x is either a single coordinate value (x or frame) or aseries (min,max,step). Default = all points defining the margin line.

D=d assign points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aftend, if d is negative, the intervals start from the fore end.

10.7.7 Openings

ASG ROPE OPE=(op,op,...) SOP=(s1,s2)

■ Function: assigns definition data of (relevant) openings■ Contents:

■ DAOPNAME : name of opening■ DAOPDES : description of opening■ DAOPX : x-coordinate of position of opening■ DAOPFR : frame of opening■ DAOPY : y-coordinate of position of opening


113 (272)


■ DAOPZ : z-coordinate of position of opening■ DAOPTYPE : type of opening■ DAOPDATE : definition date of opening■ DAOPCONN : compartments connected by opening

■ Options :

OPE=(op,op,...) restrict the set of openings to the given ones or to the given type(s) op = name of opening, name of opening group or type of opening UNP, WEA,WAT or UNN. If there is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may beomitted. Default all from the arguments.

SOP=(s1,s2) -> sort openings acc. to given properties X = x-coordinate Y = y-coordinate Z = z-coordinate A = alphanumeric T = type of opening s1 is the primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted. s2 is the secondary property for sorting openings having the same position afterthe primary sorting. If only SOP is given, program assumes s1=A. If only oneproperty is given (SOP=s1 accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A.If this option is missing, the order is that defined by the command ROP.

10.7.8 Points

ASG POIN POI=(p,p,...) SOP=(s1,s2)

■ Function: assigns definition data of (relevant) special points■ Contents:

■ DAPONAME : name of point■ DAPODES : description of point■ DAPOX : x-coordinate of position of point■ DAPOFR : frame of point■ DAPOY : y-coordinate of position of point■ DAPOZ : z-coordinate of position of point■ DAPODATE : definition date of point

■ Options :

POI=(p,p,...) restrict the set of points to the given ones; p = name of point If there is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may beomitted. Default all from the arguments.

SOP=(s1,s2) sort points acc. to given properties, X = x-coordinate, Y = y-coordinate, Z = z-coordinate, A = alphanumeric, s1 is the primary property acc. to which the points are sorted. s2 is the secondary property for sorting points having the same position afterthe primary sorting. If only SOP is given, program assumes s1=A. If only oneproperty is given (SOP=s1 accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A.If this option is missing, the order is that defined by the command RPO in CR.


114 (272)


10.7.9 Initial conditions

ASG INIT init GLO

■ Function: assigns data related to initial conditions■ Contents: Note that many quantities are not assigned before the initial conditions are calculated together with a

damage case. To get calculated quantities, one has to use the parameter 'init/damage', instead of the parameter 'init'.

parameter 'init'.

Available quantities:

DAINNAME : name of initial condition

DAINDES : description of initial condition

DAINT : initial draught

DAINTR : initial trim

DAINHEEL : initial heeling angle

DAINAZI : azimuth angle

DAINTRA : initial trim angle

DAINTRX : initi al trim along x-axis (m)

DAINTRXA : initial trim angle along x-axis

DAINHAX : initial heeling angle around x-axis

DAINDISP : displacement

DAINLCG : x-coordinate of the center of gravity of displacement

DAINTCG : y-coordinate of the center of gravity of displacement

DAINVCG : z-coordinate of the center of gravity of displacement

DAINLCB : x-coordinate of the center of buoyancy

DAINTCB : y-coordinate of the center of buoyancy

DAINVCB : z-coordinate of the center of buoyancy

DAINGM0 : uncorrected GM

DAINGMRD : GM reduction by free surfaces

DAINGM : height of transverse metacenter

DAINKMT : height of transverse metacenter

DAINWS : solid mass

DAINXCS : x-coordinate of center of gravity of solid mass

DAINYCS : y-coordinate of center of gravity of solid mass

DAINZCS : z-coordinate of center of gravity of solid mass

DAINWLIQ : total mass of liquid loads

DAINXCL : x-coordinate of center of gravity of total mass of liquid loads

DAINYCL : y-coordinate of center of gravity of total mass of liquid loads

DAINZCL : z-coordinate of center of gravity of total mass of liquid loads

DAINTAGR : measured aft draught of grounded ship


115 (272)


DAINTFGR : measured fore draught of grounded ship

DAINHAGR : measured heeling angle of grounded ship

DAINX1GR : aft end of the ground contact

DAINX2GR : fore end of the ground contact

DAINLGR : length of ground contact

DAINXCNT : x-coordinate of point of contact

DAINXCN2 : x-coordinate of second point of contact

DAINYCNT : y-coordinate of point of contact

DAINYCN2 : y-coordinate of second point of contact

DAINZCNT : z-coordinate of point of contact

DAINZCN2 : z-coordinate of second point of contact

DAINDPT : depth at point of contact

DAINDPT2 : depth at second point of contact

DAINGRF : grounding force in equilibrium floating position

DAINGRF2 : grounding force in equilibrium floating position at second point of contact

Options:

init name of a single initial condition, name of an initial condition group or init/dam.Default = initial condition(s) given by the command SEL or those used in theprevious CALC, output or ASG command.

GLO x-, y-, and z-coordinates in the global coordinate system. Default = shipcoordinate system.

10.7.10 Definition data of damage cases

Command:

ASG DDAM dam

■ Function: assigns definition data of damage cases■ Contents:

■ DAMDNAME : name of damage case■ DAMDDES : description of damage case■ DAMDCOMP : name of damaged compartment■ DAMDCDES : description of damaged compartment■ DAMDPERM : permeability of compartment■ DAMDCVOL : total moulded volume of compartment■ DAMDXCG : x-coordinate of the center of volume of compartment■ DAMDYCG : y-coordinate of the center of volume of compartment■ DAMDZCG : z-coordinate of the center of volume of compartment■ DAMDVLIM : upper volume limit of inflooded water (opt. VOL=)■ DAMDFLIM : upper filling limit of inflooded water (opt. FILL=)■ DAMDPVOL : pumped volume (opt. PUMP=)■ DAMDCDAT : definition date of compartment■ DAMDSTG : name of stage where compartment starts to flood


116 (272)


■ DAMDPRES : constant overpressure of gas■ DAMDRATE : filling rate

■ Options :

dam name of a single damage case or name of a damage case group. Default = damagecase(s) given by the command SEL or those used in the previous CALC, output orASG command. (Instead of 'dam', one may use also the form 'init/dam').

One can get the extreme coordinates of one damage case by the command

ASG EXT dam

■ Function: assigns extreme coordinates of damage case. The extreme coordinates are the minimum and maximumcoordinates of all damaged compartments.

■ Contents:■ DAMINX : minimum x of damage■ DAMAXX : maximum x of damage■ DAMINY : minimum y of damage■ DAMAXY : maximum y of damage■ DAMINZ : minimum z of damage■ DAMAXZ : maximum z of damage

■ Options :

dam name of a single damage case

10.7.11 Assign results

Command:

ASG DRES cases sco-opt GLO

■ Function: assigns calculated results■ Contents:

Names to identify results

DADRCASE : name of calculation case in the form init/dam

DADRDAM : name of damage case

DADRDDES : description of damage case

DADRINIT : name of initial condition

DADRIDES : description of initial condition

DADRSTA : name of stage

DADRPHA : name of phase

DADRSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

Equilibrium floating position

DADRT : draught in the equilibrium floating position

DADRTR : trim in the equilibrium floating position

DADRHEEL : equilibrium heeling angle

DADRAZI : azimuth angle

DADRTRA : trim angle along stab. axis


117 (272)


DADRTRX : trim along x-axis (m)

DADRTRXA : trim angle along x-axis

DADRHAX : heeling angle around x-axis

GM and GM-requirements

DADRGM0 : uncorrected intact GM

DADRGMRD : GM-reduction due to free surfaces

DADRGMCO : GM-correction due to free surfaces (=-GMRED)

DADRGM : corrected intact GM

DADRKMT : transverse metacenter of intact ship

DADRMGM : minimum corrected GM requirement

DADRMGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement

DADRMKG : maximum allowed KG

DADRDCRI : name of determining criterion

DADRGMA0 : actual GM at the upright (zero heeling angle)

DADRGMA : actual GM at the equilibrium heeling angle

DADRMMS : GM reduction as a result of flooding

DADRGMGM : global minimum GM of damage case (incl. all stages and phases)

DADRGMG0 : global minimum GM0 of damage case (incl. all stages and phases)

DADRGMKG : global maximum KG of damage case (incl. all stages and phases)

DADRGDCR : name of determining criterion of the global minimum GM

DADRSTAT : status of stability criteria

Openings

DADRFA : heeling angle at which the first unprotected or weathertight opening immerses

DADRFLOP : name of unprotected or weathertight opening first immersing

DADRFAUN : heeling angle at which the first unprotected opening immerses

DADRFLUO : name of weathertight opening first immersing

DADRFAWE : heeling angle at which the first weathertight opening immerses

DADRFLWO : name of weathertight opening first immersing

DADRRFLD : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected or weathertight openings atequilibrium

DADROPEN : name of unprotected or weathertight openings having minimum reserve toimmersion

Margin line

DADRIMRG : immersion angle of margin line

DADRXIMR : x where margin line first touches water

DADRRMRG : minimum reserve to immersion of margin line at equilibrium

DADRXRMR : x where minimum reserve occurs


118 (272)


DADRF1 : effective mean freeboard acc. to IMO A265 (from area)

Area under GZ curve

DADRAGZ : total area under (the greatest hump of) the GZ curve

DADRAFA : area under (the greatest hump of) the GZ curve between equilibrium and angle ofunprotected flooding

DADRAGZR : area under (the greatest hump of) the GZ curve between equilibrium and lesserof angle of unprot. flooding or 22 deg for 1-comp. damages or 27 deg for severalcomp. damages

Range of stability

DADRRNG : range of the greatest hump

DADRRNGF : range of the greatest hump between equilibrium and angle of unprotected flooding

DADRPHIV : angle of vanishing stability (second intercept of the greatest hump)

Height of GZ curve

DADRMGZ : maximum height of GZ curve

DADRAMGZ : angle where the maximum occurs

DADRGZMR : maximum height of GZ between equilibrium and angle of unprotected flooding

DADRMGZR : maximum height of GZ in 15 deg range beyond the equilibrium

Grounding force

DADRGRF : grounding force at equilibrium

DADRXCNT : x-coordinate of the point of contact

DADRYCNT : y-coordinate of the point of contact

DADRZCNT : z-coordinate of the point of contact

DADRDPT : depth at the point of contact

Solid mass

DADRWSOL : solid mass

DADRXCS : x-coordinate of the center of solid mass

DADRYCS : y-coordinate of the center of solid mass

DADRZCS : z-coordinate of the center of solid mass

Moving mass (liquid loads)

DADRWLQ : total mass of liquid loads

DADRXCL : x-coordinate of the center of mass of liquid loads

DADRYCL : y-coordinate of the center of mass of liquid loads

DADRZCL : z-coordinate of the center of mass of liquid loads

Displacement

DADRDISP : displacement (at equilibrium)

DADRXCD : x-coordinate of the center of displacement


119 (272)


DADRYCD : y-coordinate of the center of displacement

DADRZCD : z-coordinate of the center of displacement

DADRDSP0 : initial displacement

Inflooded water

DADRWFL : total mass of water in damaged compartments at the equilibrium floating position

DADRXCF : x-coord. of the center of mass of inflooded water

DADRYCF : y-coord. of the center of mass of inflooded water

DADRZCF : z-coord. of the center of mass of inflooded water

DADRFLW : mass of inflooded water minus outflooded cargo at the equilibrium floatingposition

Buoyancy

DADRBUOY : buoyancy of the intact hull at equilibrium

DADRLCB : x-coordinate of the center of buoyancy

DADRTCB : y-coordinate of the center of buoyancy

DADRVCB : z-coordinate of the center of buoyancy S-factors

DADRCCF : c coef. for SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1

DADRSFAC : s factor for SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1

DADRMGZS : maximum GZ for calculating s

DADRRNGS : range for calculating s

DADRCF : c coeff. for MSC/Circ.574

DADRSSF : s factor for MSC/Circ.574

Severity

DADRSEV : severity classification by DNV; Red, ship sinks or capsizes; Yellow, somerelevant stability criterion not met (status NOT MET) Green, all relevant stabilitycriteria met (status OK)

■ Options :




10.7.12 Assign floating position

Command:

ASG FLO cases sco-opt

■ Function: assigns floating position and related quantities■ Contents:

DAFLCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAFLDAM : name of damage case


120 (272)


DAFLDDES : description of damage case

DAFLINIT : name of initial condition

DAFLIDES : description of initial condition

DAFLSTA : name of stage

DAFLPHA : name of phase

DAFLSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DAFLT : draught in the equilibrium floating position

DAFLTR : trim in the equilibrium floating position

DAFLHEEL : equilibrium heeling angle

DAFLAZI : azimuth angle

DAFLTRA : trim angle along stab. axis

DAFLTRX : trim along x-axis (m)

DAFLTRXA : trim angle along x-axis (m)

DAFLHAX : heeling angle around x-axis

DAFLRFLD : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected and weathertight openings

DAFLOPEN : name of unprotected and weathertight openings having minimum reserve toimmersion

DAFLRMRG : minimum reserve to immersion of margin line

DAFLXMRG : x where minimum reserve occurs

DAFLGMA : actual GM at the equilibrium heeling angle

DAFLGRF : grounding force

■ Options :



10.7.13 Stability curves

ASG GZ cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...)

■ Function: assign stability curve and other quantities as functions of heeling angle■ Contents:

DAGZHEEL : heeling angle

DAGZGZ : GZ

DAGZT : draught

DAGZTR : trim

DAGZTRA : trim angle along stab. axis

DAGZTRX : trim along x-axis (m)

DAGZTRXA : trim angle along x-axis

DAGZHAX : heeling angle around x-axis

DAGZGRF : grounding force


121 (272)


DAGZDISP : displacement (may vary in the stage PROGRESSIVE)

DAGZMS : residual stability lever

DAGZEPHI : dynamic stability lever

DAGZAGZ : total positive area under the GZ curve

DAGZOPN : name of unprotected or weathertight opening having minimum reserve toimmersion

DAGZIMR : minimum reserve to immersion of unprotected or weathertight openings

DAGZRMRG : reserve to immersion of margin line

■ Options :



OPE=(op,op...) calc. reserve to immersion for the given openings. op: name of opening, name ofopening group or ALL. If there is only one element in the brackets, the bracketsmay be omitted. Default all relevant openings.

To plot all diagrams in the same scale and range, one has to define the common scale and range in the plot output options.For helping selection of good ranges, the function

ASG GZL cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...)

assigns a set of variables showing the minimum and maximum values of all diagrams. The variables are:

DAMINA : minimum heeling angle

DAMAXA : maximum heeling angle

DAMINGZ : minimum GZ

DAMAXGZ : maximum GZ

DAMINMS : minimum MS

DAMAXMS : maximum MS

DAMINEFI : minimum EPHI

DAMAXEFI : maximum EPHI

DAMINORS : minimum IMRES

DAMAXORS : maximum IMRES

DAMINMRS : minimum RESMRG

DAMAXMRS : maximum RESMRG

10.7.14 Liquid loads

ASG LIQL cases sco-opt GLO

■ Function: assigns liquid load distribution in the tanks in the equilibrium floating position■ Contents:

DALICASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DALIDAM : name of damage case

DALIDDES : description of damage case


122 (272)


DALIINIT : name of initial condition

DALIIDES : description of initial condition

DALISTA : name of stage

DALIPHA : name of phase

DALISIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DALINAME : name of liquid load tank

DALICDES : description of tank

DALILOAD : load

DALIDENS : density of load

DALIFILL : net filling degree, i.e. loaded vol/net vol

DALIRED : steel reduction of tank

DALIVOL : loaded volume

DALIW : loaded mass

DALIXCG : x-coordinate of the center of loaded mass

DALIYCG : y-coordinate of the center of loaded mass

DALIZCG : z-coordinate of the center of loaded mass

■ Options :




10.7.15 Damaged compartments

ASG DCOM cases sco-opt GLO

■ Function: assigns distribution of inflooded water in the damaged compartments in the equilibrium floating position■ Contents:

DADCCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DADCDAM : name of damage case

DADCDDES : description of damage case

DADCINIT : name of initial condition

DADCIDES : description of initial condition

DADCSTA : name of stage

DADCPHA : name of phase

DADCSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DADCNAME : name of damaged compartment

DADCCDES : description of damaged compartment

DADCPERM : permeability of compartment

DADCVOL : volume of inflooded water


123 (272)


DADCW : mass of inflooded water

DADCXCG : x-coordinate of the center of mass of inflooded water

DADCYCG : y-coordinate of the center of mass of inflooded water

DADCZCG : z-coordinate of the center of mass of inflooded water

DADCVOLT : total volume of cargo + sea water

■ Options :




10.7.16 Openings

ASG DROP cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n

■ Function: assigns relevant openings■ Contents:

DAOCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAODAM : name of damage case

DAOINI : name of initial condition

DAOSTAGE : name of stage

DAOPHASE : name of phase

DAOSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DAONAME : name of opening

DAODES : description of opening

DAOX : x-coordinate of position of opening

DAOFR : frame of opening

DAOY : y-coordinate of position of opening

DAOZ : z-coordinate of position of opening

DAOTYPE : type of opening

DAOIMMA : immersion angle of opening

DAOIMMR : reserve to immersion at equilibrium

DAORED : reduction per one degree of heeling at equilibrium

DAOCONN : compartments connected by opening

■ Options :



OPE=(op,op,...) assign the given ones or the given type(s) or all. op = name of opening, name ofopening group, type of opening UNP, WEA, WAT or UNN or ALL. ALL meansall openings from the arguments. The default set is all opening that are relevant


124 (272)


in the damage case and stage. If there is only one element in the brackets, thebrackets may be omitted.

SOP=(s1,s2) sort openings acc. to given properties I = immersion angle R = reserve to immersion X = x-coordinate Y = y-coordinate Z = z-coordinate A = alphanumeric T = type of opening s1 is the primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted. s2 is the secondary property for sorting openings having same position afterprimary sorting. If only SOP is given, program assumes s1=I, s2=A. If only oneproperty is given (SOP=s1 accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A.If this option is missing, the order is that defined by the command ROP.

MAXNR=n assign only n openings. If the option SOP is missing, n openings first immersingare assigned. If the option SOP is given, n first openings from the sorted order areassigned.

10.7.17 Special points

ASG DPOI cases sco-opt POI=(p,p,...) SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n

■ Function: assigns relevant special points■ Contents:

DAPCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAPDAM : name of damage case

DAPINI : name of initial condition

DAPSTAGE : name of stage

DAPPHASE : name of phase

DAPSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DAPNAME : name of point

DAPDES : description of point

DAPX : x-coordinate of position of point

DAPFR : frame of point

DAPY : y-coordinate of position of point

DAPZ : z-coordinate of position of point

DAPIMMA : immersion angle of point

DAPIMMR : reserve to immersion at equilibrium

DAPRED : reduction per one degree of heeling at equilibrium

■ Options :




125 (272)


POI=(p,p,...) assign the given ones or all; p = name of point, or ALL. All means all points fromthe arguments of CR. The default set is all relevant points. If there is only oneelement in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted.

SOP=(s1,s2) sort points acc. to given properties I = immersion angle R = reserve to immersion X = x-coordinate Y = y-coordinate Z = z-coordinate A = alphanumeric s1 is the primary property acc. to which the points are sorted. s2 is the secondaryproperty for sorting points having same position after primary sorting. If only SOPis given, program assumes s1=I, s2=A. If only one property is given (SOP=s1accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A. If this option is missing, theorder is that defined by the command RPO of CR.

MAXNR=n assign only n points. If the option SOP is missing, n points first immersing areassigned. If the option SOP is given, n first points from the sorted order areassigned.

10.7.18 Margin line

ASG DMRG cases sco-opt

■ Function: assigns quanties related to the margin line■ Contents:

DAMRCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAMRDAM : name of damage case

DAMRINI : name of initial condition

DAMRSTA : name of stage

DAMRPHA : name of phase

DAMRSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DAMRRES : reserve to immersion at equilibrium

DAMRRX : x of the point where minimum reserve

DAMRRY : y of the point where minimum reserve

DAMRRZ : z of the point where minimum reserve

DAMRIMMA : immersion angle

DAMRXIMM : x where immersion occurs

DAMRRED : reduction per one degree of heeling at equilibrium

■ Options :



10.7.19 Freeboard deck edge

ASG DFRB cases sco-opt


126 (272)


■ Function: assigns quanties related to the feeboard deck edge■ Contents:

DAFBCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAFBDAM : name of damage case

DAFBINI : name of initial condition

DAFBSTA : name of stage

DAFBPHA : name of phase

DAFBSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DAFBRES : reserve to immersion at equilibrium

DAFBRX : x of the point where minimum reserve

DAFBRY : y of the point where minimum reserve

DAFBRZ : z of the point where minimum reserve

DAFBIMMA : immersion angle

DAFBXIMM : x where immersion occurs

DAFBRED : reduction per one degree of heeling at equilibrium

■ Options :



10.7.20 Estimate of outflown cargo

ASG OFL cases

■ Function: assigns an estimate of volume of cargo flown out of damaged rooms. The estimate is made after endedflooding, in the equilibrium floating position of the ship. The estimate is based on the density of cargo and thelocation of the damage. Within each room, the program calculates the minimum and maximum height of the damagerelative to the water line and requires that the hydrostatic pressure inside and outside the room at the damage isthe same. The location of the damage must be defined in the damage case definition by the command EXTENTxmin,xmax,ymin,ymax,zmin,zmax

■ Contents:

DAOFCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAOFCOMP : name of compartment

DAOFLOAD : type of load, e.g. BW

DAOFDENS : density of load (t/m3)

DAOFZMIN : distance of the lowest point of the damage from the water line after ended flooding(m)

DAOFZMAX : distance of the highest point of the damage from the water line after endedflooding (m)

DAOFVLOA : original volume of the load (m3)

DAOFLVOL : outflown volume (m3)

■ Options :


127 (272)



10.7.21 Assign limit curves

ASG DLIM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

■ Function: assigns minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of draught or trim (= function of initialcondition)

■ Contents:

DALIMT : draught

DALIMTR : trim (m)

DALIMTRA : trim angle

DALIMGM : minimum corrected GM requirement

DALIMKG : maximum KG requirement

DALIMGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement

DALIMGMR : GM reduction

DALIMCRI : name of determining criterion

DALIMDAM : name of determining damage case

■ Options :





10.7.22 Minimum GM table

ASG DMGM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

■ Function: assigns minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of initial condition and damage case■ Contents:

DAMGCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DAMGINI : name of initial condition

DAMGIDES : description of initial condition

DAMGDAM : name of damage case

DAMGDDES : description of damage case

DAMGT : draught of initial condition

DAMGTR : trim of initial condition (m)

DAMGSTA : determining stage

DAMGPHA : determining phase

DAMGSIDE : determining side


128 (272)


DAMGMNGM : minimum corrected GM requirement

DAMGMXKG : maximum KG requirement

DAMGMGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM requirement

DAMGDCR : name of determining criterion

DAMGMREQ : required value of determining criterion (GM=MINGM)

DAMGATTV : attained value of determining criterion (GM=MINGM)

DAMGUNIT : unit of required and attained value

DAMGSTAT : status of calculation case OK/NOT MET

■ Options :





10.7.23 Loading condition table

ASG DLDT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

■ Function: assigns requirement, attained value and status as function of loading condition (initial condition)■ Contents:

DALDCON : name of loading (initial) condition

DALDES : description of loading (initial) condition

DALDCRI : name of determining criterion, i.e. criterion which is considered being the mostdifficult to fulfill

DALDDAM : name of determining damage case

DALDSTG : determining stage

DALDPHA : determining phase

DALDSIDE : determining side

DALDREQ : requirement of the determining criterion

DALDATTV : attained value of the determining criterion in the determining case

DALDUNIT : unit of requirement and attained value

DALDSTAT : status of loading (initial) condition

DALDGM : corrected GM of loading (initial) condition

DALDGM0 : uncorrected GM of loading (initial) condition

■ Options :





129 (272)


INTACT take into account also initial conditions

What criterion and case is determining, i.e. the most difficult to fulfill, has nothing to do with minimum GMrequirements. See the document CR.2, chapter 3.2.3, for the logic how to select the determining criterion and case.

10.7.24 Criterion table

ASG DCRT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

■ Function: assigns requirement, attained value, status, minimum GM and maximum KG as function of initialcondition, damage case, stage, phase, side and criterion.

■ Contents:

DATCASE : name of calculation case in the form ini/dam

DATDAM : name of damage case

DATINIT : name of initial condition

DATSTAGE : name of stage

DATPHASE : name of phase

DATSIDE : heeling side PS or SB

DATCRI : name of relevant criterion

DATDES : description of criterion

DATREQ : required value of criterion

DATATTV : attained value

DATUNIT : unit of required and attained value

DATSTAT : status of criterion

DATMINGM : minimum corrected GM

DATMAXKG : maximum KG

DATMGM0 : minimum uncorrected GM

DATGM : corrected GM of initial condition

DATGM0 : uncorrected GM of initial condition

■ Options :




INTACT take into list also intact stages (stage before flooding)

10.8 Command SELECT

The main purpose of the command SELECT is to assign array variables which tell to the user in the form of stringarrays what initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and sides are included in the extent of output and to give anopportunity to use these arrays in macros.


130 (272)


The secondary purpose is to activate calculation cases or different subgroups, i.e. instead of the output command options'cases', 'INI=', 'DAM=', 'STAGE=', 'PHASE=' and 'SIDE=' one may use SELECT-commands (if SELECT is given, thecorresponding command option overrules it).

At first, one has to select the calculation cases, i.e. all initial condition - damage case combinations one is aiming to listor plot, by the command

SELECT CASE init/dam

where 'init/dam' is normal case parameter occurring in calculation and output commands. After the calculation cases areselected, subgroups may be selected by the command SEL INIT, SEL DAM, SEL STAGE, SEL PHASE and SEL SIDE.In the following, the SELECT command is explained in detail.

SEL CASE init/dam ORD=o

■ Purpose: activate the given set of calculation cases and assign the following variables:

DASIGR : name of initial condition (group) 'init'

DASDGR : name of damage case (group) 'dam'

DASCASE : list of calculation cases, i.e. all combinations 'i/d' appearing in 'init/dam'

DASINIT : list of all initial conditions appearing in 'init/dam'

DASDAM : list of all damage cases appearing in 'init/dam'

■ Options:

ORD=DAM : order DASCASE acc. to damage cases

ORD=INIT: order DASCASE acc. to initial conditions (default)

SEL CASE

■ Purpose: list selected cases.

Commands

SEL CASE OFFSEL CASE -

■ Purpose: deactivate selection and delete variables.

Command

SEL INIT name,name,...

■ Purpose: activate the subgroup and assign DASINIT. 'name' is either single initial condition or initial conditiongroup.

Command

SEL INIT DAM=dam

■ Purpose: activate all initial conditions, that are defined to be part of the damage case, i.e. defined within the damagewith the statement INIT, and assign DASINIT.

Command

SEL INIT

■ Purpose: list selected initial conditions.

Commands

SEL INIT OFFSEL INIT -


131 (272)


■ Purpose: deactivate selection and delete variable.

Command

SEL DAM name,name,...

■ Purpose: activate the subgroup and assign DASDAM. 'name' is either single damage case or damage case group.

Command

SEL DAM INIT=ini

■ Purpose: activate all damage cases belonging to the given initial condition and assign DASDAM.

Command

SEL DAM

■ Purpose: list selected damage cases.

Commands

SEL DAM OFFSEL DAM -


Command

SEL STAGE name,name,...

■ Purpose: activate the subgroup and assign DASSTAGE.

Command

SEL STAGE DAM=dam

■ Purpose: activate all stages belonging to the given damage case and assign DASSTAGE.

Command

SEL STAGE

■ Purpose: list selected stages.

Commands

SEL STAGE OFFSEL STAGE -


Command

SEL PHASE id,id,...

■ Purpose: activate the subgroup and assign DASPHASE.

Command

SEL PHASE DAM=dam STAGE=sta

■ Purpose: activate all stages belonging to the given stage of the given damage case and assign DASPHASE.

Command

SEL PHASE

■ Purpose: list selected phases.

Commands


132 (272)


SEL PHASE OFF SEL PHASE -


Command

SEL SIDE SB PS

■ Purpose: activate side PS, SB or both and assign DASSIDE.

Command

SEL SIDE

■ Purpose: list selected sides.

Commands

SEL SIDE OFFSEL SIDE -


10.9 Special considerations about output

10.9.1 General

This chapter is intended to give an overview of the practical things that should be taken into account.

10.9.2 Where to find more information

Concerning the DA functions the following sources of information are in a key position:

■ The DA manual , especially chapter Output of results.■ The CR manual, explaining the stability criteria.■ The !EXPL texts. As many of the explanation texts have become very long, especially for the commands LIST and

DRW, a new feature has been installed for the !EXPL command. The command

!EXPL LIST +

will give a list of all possible options. A given list option can be explained by e.g.

!EXPL LIST FLO

■ Old users can also see the update infos 94.1, 94.2 and 95.1■ This chapter gives a practical overview of the possibilities.

10.9.3 The structure of DA

All functions of DA are on one level. I.e, all functions regarding

■ input■ calculation■ and output

are on the same level of DA.

10.9.4 The role of the CR task

The CR task can be accessed directly from DA. All normal functions are done in DA except for:


133 (272)


The following arguments can be defined only in CR:

RPO relevant points (used in some criteria)

ITOL different iteration tolerancies

NITER maximum number of iterations

PROF profile used in wind moments

VS & VF service and full speed (used in some moments)

NPASS number of passengers (used in some moments)

In practical work the need to go to the CR task is very small. It is usually enough to define/check the criteria once, andmake them relevant.

10.9.5 Definitions and arguments in DA

In the damage stability task the following functions are normally handled:

■ definition of damages■ definition of initial cases■ definition of openings■ definition of margin lines■ definition of stability criteria■ LIST output■ PLOT output etc.

10.9.6 New output functions

All output in DA is based on:

■ 28 list components of which:■ 5 are fixed lists■ 23 are controllable by LQ/TOO■ 5 diagram plots controllable by PQ & POO. The diagram output is made by the PLD command.■ 6 arrangement oriented drawings controlled by the commands SETUP and DRW.

The structure of the components is made so that the users can build up any kind of output list himself by combining thedifferent components as building blocks. As this is not very simple without good examples, there is a set of predefinedoutput macros in the NAPDB.

10.9.7 Standard output macros

■ LISTS

There are 6 standard macros for LIST output in the NAPADB:

ALL Comprehensive output of damage cases

DRES Short summary of all damages and STAGES

LIM GM (KG) limiting values as function of draught


134 (272)


SUM Damage GM-req. summary list for all stages/phases

SUM2 Short damage GM-req. summary list

SUM3 Damage GM-req. summary list for all stages

The macros are macros started with the standard LIST command. E.g. the DRES macro is started as:

LIST .DRES

and the name of the macro is LISTDAM.DRES (in the NAPADB).

The use of the LIST .xxx function is explained in !EXPL MAC/GEN

■ PLOTS

There are 7 standard macros for PLOT output:

DAMDEF Plotting of damage definitions

FLCHECK Plotting of float check

FLOAT Plotting of floating positions

GMLIM Plotting of GM limit curve

GZ Plotting of GZ curve

MAXWP Plotting of the maximum waterplane

OPE Plotting of openings in the arr. drawing

The macros are activated with the PLOT .xxx command: E.g.

PLOT .FLOAT

will run the macro called PLOTDAM.FLOAT in NAPADB.

■ Standard frame

The plots are all placed in either a horizontal or vertical frame. If the user organisation would like to modify the frame,the data (macro) for the frames are found in the NAPADB, and are called DAFRAME.H and DAFRAME.V. The frameshave some predefined text fields.

The frame can be changed with the following steps:

1. Read in the macro in the editor -> >GET DB7>DAFRAME.H and make the required changes.

2. Rename the macro and save it in e.g. the project database. -> >RENA OWNFRAME.H -> >SAVE

3. Run the macro in DR GR +F !ADD OWNFRAME.H

4. Go to the PLOT task (IOF)■ Select the drawing


135 (272)


■ Store it in the SYSDB (command STD)

In the macros, the drawings are given the name DAFRAME.H or DAFRAME.V. If you change this name you have tochange the reference to the standard figure in all plot macros as these explicitly use DAFRAME.H or DAFRAME.V.

10.9.8 Examples of the lists

In this chapter there are short examples of all different lists. All possible LQ alternatives are shown in italics before thelist itself.

Calculations are based on DAMHULL date 95-04-05 time 16.55

X-coord. of aft end of DWL -3.50 mX-coord. of fore end of DWL 100.00 m

parts:

DAMHULL1 12001.6 M3 950314 37 SECTIONSPROPELLER 4.5 M3 950221 0 SECTIONSRUDDER 4.5 M3 950221 0 SECTIONSBOWTHRUSTER -21.1 M3 950314 7 SECTIONS

LIS REF

No LQ

MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VESSEL:-----------------------------------

Length betw. perpendiculars 100.00 mBreadth, moulded 20.00 mDesign draught 5.00 m

X-coord. of after perpendicular 0.00 mX-coord. of reference point 50.00 mX-coord. of midship section 50.00 mX-coord. of building frame 0 0.00 m

Thickness of keelplate 0.010 mMean thickness of shell plating 0.010 mDensity of water 1.025 ton/m3

LIS EXPL DCRT

The list is an explanation of the selected LQ quantities

CASE initial cond/damage case


136 (272)


STAGE flooding stagePHASE flooding phaseRCR relevant criteriaREQ required valueATTV attained valueUNIT unitSTAT status of stability crit.MINGM minimum GM

LIST MARG X=((#0 #20 4) (#40 #100 20))

LQ MARG, X, FR, Y, Z

Margin line MLINE, ACTUAL MARGINLINE

------------------------------------ X FR Y Z m # m m------------------------------------ 0.00 0.00 6.650 9.924 3.20 4.00 7.300 9.924 6.40 8.00 7.950 9.924 9.60 12.00 8.600 9.924 12.80 16.00 9.250 9.924

16.00 20.00 9.900 9.924 32.00 40.00 9.973 7.124 48.00 60.00 10.000 7.124 64.00 80.00 10.000 7.124 80.00 100.00 9.565 7.124------------------------------------

LIS ROPE

LQ ROPE, NAME, TEXT, X, FR, Y, Z, DATE, OTYPE, CONN

RELEVANT OPENINGS

----------------------------------------------------------------NAME OTYPE CONNECT X Y Z m m m----------------------------------------------------------------OPE1 WEATHERT 45.00 7.500 8.000OPE2 UNPROTEC 53.60 8.300 8.100----------------------------------------------------------------


137 (272)


LIS POIN

LQ POIN, NAME, TEXT, X, FR, Y, Z, DATE

RELEVANT POINTS

----------------------------------------------------------------NAME TEXT X FR Y Z m # m m----------------------------------------------------------------POI1 Check point 1 15.00 23.44 4.500 6.000POI2 Check point 2 77.60 121.25 8.300 7.100----------------------------------------------------------------

LIS INIT INI1-2/DAM1-2

LQ INIT, INIT, TEXT, T0, TR0, HEEL0, DSP0, XCD0, YCD0, ZCD0, LCB, TCB, VCB, GM0, GMRED, GM, KMT, WSOL, XCS, YCS, ZCS, WLIQ0, XCL0, YCL0, ZCL0, TAGR, TFGR, HEELGR, X1GR, X2GR, LGR, XCNT, YCNT, ZCNT, DEPTH, GRF, AZI, TRX, TRA, TRXA, HEELX

INITIAL CONDITIONS

INIT INI1 INI2---------------------------------------T0 m 5.000 4.500TR0 m 1.000 0.000HEEL0 degree 0.0 0.0

DSP0 ton 6778.7 5949.5LCB m 51.287 49.866TCB m 0.000 0.000VCB m 2.838 2.563

GM0 m 1.300 1.300GM m 1.199 1.204KMT m 10.098 10.528

LIS DDAM DAM1-2

LQ DDAM, DAM, DDES, COMP, DES, PERM, VOL, XCG, YCG, ZCG, DATE, STAGE, VLIM, FLIM, PVOL, ACCV, ACCH, NOTE

DAMAGED COMPARTMENTS-----------------------------------------------------------------DAM COMP PERM VOL XCG YCG ZCG STAGE


138 (272)


m3 m m m-----------------------------------------------------------------DAM1 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69 Bef crossDAM1 R44 0.85 40.7 54.27 2.53 0.61 Bef crossDAM1 R42 1.00 90.6 55.20 8.50 2.79 Bef crossDAM1 R402 1.00 334.5 56.76 0.00 2.79 Bef crossDAM1 R40 1.00 163.1 53.60 2.80 2.30 Bef crossDAM1 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69 AFTERCROSSDAM1 R44 0.85 40.7 54.27 2.53 0.61 AFTERCROSSDAM1 R42 1.00 90.6 55.20 8.50 2.79 AFTERCROSSDAM1 R402 1.00 334.5 56.76 0.00 2.79 AFTERCROSSDAM1 R40 1.00 163.1 53.60 2.80 2.30 AFTERCROSSDAM1 R43 1.00 90.6 55.20 -8.50 2.79 AFTERCROSSDAM2 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69 No cross finalDAM2 R44 0.85 40.7 54.27 2.53 0.61 No cross final-----------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DRES INI1-2/DAM1-2

LQ DRES, CASE, DAM, DDES, INIT, IDES, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, T, TR, HEEL, GM0, GMRED, GMCORR, GM, KMT, MINGM, MINGM0, MAXKG, DCRI, GMACT0, GMACT, MMS, FA, FLOPEN, FAUN, FLUNOP, FAWE, FLWEOP, RESFLD, OPEN, MRGIMA, XMRGIM, RESMRG, XRESMRG, F1, AGZ, AFA, AGZR, RANGE, RANGEF, "PHI_V", MAXGZ, AMAXGZ, GZMAXR, MAXGZR, GRF, XCNT, YCNT, ZCNT, DEPTH, WSOL, XCS, YCS, ZCS, WLIQ, XCL, YCL, ZCL, DISP, XCD, YCD, ZCD, WFL, XCF, YCF, ZCF, FLW, BUOY, LCB, TCB, VCB, DSP0, CCOEF, SFACC, CFAC, SSFAC, SEVERITY, STAT, AZI, TRX, TRA, TRXA, HEELX, GMINGM, GMINGM0, GMAXKG, GDCRI, GZMAXS, RANGES, RMRGD, XRMRGD, RMRGED, XRMRGED

RESULTS

------------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE SIDE T TR HEEL MINGM DCRI m m degree m------------------------------------------------------------------INI1/DAM1 INTACT EQ PS 5.000 1.000 0.0 0.331 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 INTACT EQ SB 5.000 1.000 0.0 0.324 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 PS 5.094 1.111 3.0 0.540 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 SB 5.094 1.111 3.0 0.168 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 5.190 1.245 6.9 0.890 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 SB 5.190 1.245 6.9 -0.754 CRIT1INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ PS 5.300 1.335 5.2 0.512 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ SB 5.300 1.335 5.2 -1.777 CRIT1INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 PS 5.356 1.371 2.8 0.137 CRIT2INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 SB 5.356 1.371 2.8 -1.247 CRIT1INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ PS 5.378 1.388 1.3 0.460 CRIT1INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ SB 5.378 1.388 1.3 -0.138 CRIT1


139 (272)


INI1/DAM2 INTACT EQ PS 5.000 1.000 0.0 0.331 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 INTACT EQ SB 5.000 1.000 0.0 0.324 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 No cross fina 1 PS 5.028 1.039 0.1 0.068 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 No cross fina 1 SB 5.028 1.039 0.1 0.049 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 No cross fina 2 PS 5.028 1.039 0.1 0.068 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 No cross fina 2 SB 5.028 1.039 0.1 0.049 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 No cross fina EQ PS 5.028 1.039 0.1 0.290 CRIT2INI1/DAM2 No cross fina EQ SB 5.028 1.039 0.1 0.271 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 INTACT EQ PS 4.500 0.000 0.0 0.297 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 INTACT EQ SB 4.500 0.000 0.0 0.291 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 1 PS 4.581 0.117 3.0 0.447 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 1 SB 4.581 0.117 3.0 0.141 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 4.654 0.284 8.4 0.832 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 2 SB 4.654 0.284 8.4 -0.577 CRIT1INI2/DAM1 Bef cross EQ PS 4.807 0.426 6.1 0.479 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 Bef cross EQ SB 4.807 0.426 6.1 -1.796 CRIT1INI2/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 PS 4.855 0.458 3.7 0.191 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 SB 4.855 0.458 3.7 -1.297 CRIT1INI2/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ PS 4.899 0.486 1.4 0.460 CRIT2INI2/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ SB 4.899 0.486 1.4 0.029 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ PS 4.500 0.000 0.0 0.297 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ SB 4.500 0.000 0.0 0.291 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 PS 4.529 0.047 0.1 0.054 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 SB 4.529 0.047 0.1 0.032 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 PS 4.529 0.047 0.1 0.054 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 SB 4.529 0.047 0.1 0.032 CRITINI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ PS 4.529 0.047 0.1 0.241 CRIT2INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ SB 4.529 0.047 0.1 0.219 CRIT2------------------------------------------------------------------

LIS FLO INI1-2/DAM1-2

LQ FLO, CASE, DAM, DDES, INIT, IDES, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, T, TR, HEEL, RESFLD, OPEN, RESMRG, XRESMRG, GMACT, GRF, AZI, TRX, TRA, TRXA, HEELX

FLOATING POSITION

------------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE SIDE T TR HEEL RESFLD OPEN m m degree m------------------------------------------------------------------INI1/DAM1 INTACT EQ - 5.000 1.000 0.0 3.05 OPE1INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 PS 5.094 1.111 3.0 2.52 OPE2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 5.190 1.245 6.9 1.81 OPE2INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ PS 5.300 1.335 5.2 1.96 OPE2INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 PS 5.356 1.371 2.8 2.28 OPE2INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ PS 5.378 1.388 1.3 2.48 OPE2INI1/DAM2 INTACT EQ - 5.000 1.000 0.0 3.05 OPE1


140 (272)


INI1/DAM2 No cross fina 1 PS 5.028 1.039 0.1 3.01 OPE1INI1/DAM2 No cross fina 2 PS 5.028 1.039 0.1 3.01 OPE1INI1/DAM2 No cross fina EQ PS 5.028 1.039 0.1 3.01 OPE1INI2/DAM1 INTACT EQ - 4.500 0.000 0.0 3.50 OPE1INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 1 PS 4.581 0.117 3.0 3.02 OPE1INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 4.654 0.284 8.4 2.13 OPE2INI2/DAM1 Bef cross EQ PS 4.807 0.426 6.1 2.36 OPE2INI2/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 PS 4.855 0.458 3.7 2.67 OPE1INI2/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ PS 4.899 0.486 1.4 2.94 OPE1INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ - 4.500 0.000 0.0 3.50 OPE1INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 PS 4.529 0.047 0.1 3.46 OPE1INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 PS 4.529 0.047 0.1 3.46 OPE1INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ PS 4.529 0.047 0.1 3.46 OPE1-----------------------------------------------------------------

LIS GZ INI1/DAM1 NOT=(INTA INTE)

LQ GZ, HEEL, GZ, T, TR, GRF, DISP, MS, EPHI, AGZ, OPNAME, IMRES, RESMRG, TRX, TRA, TRXA, HEELX

Initial condition : INI1, DWL, 1 m trim aheadDamage case : DAM1, Comp. 4, above dbStage of damage : Bef crossPhase of stage : EQ

------------------------------------------------ HEEL GZ EPHI T TR RESMRG degree m rad*m m m m------------------------------------------------ -40.0 0.745 0.073 4.254 1.876 -5.70 -30.0 0.123 0.147 4.673 1.573 -3.90 -20.0 -0.314 0.128 4.975 1.419 -2.06 -15.0 -0.452 0.094 5.088 1.363 -1.14 -10.0 -0.446 0.053 5.212 1.307 -0.26

-5.0 -0.304 0.020 5.304 1.335 0.52 0.0 -0.156 0.000 5.333 1.345 1.28 5.0 -0.007 -0.007 5.303 1.336 0.52 10.0 0.153 -0.001 5.217 1.313 -0.27 15.0 0.201 0.016 5.114 1.392 -1.17

20.0 0.099 0.030 5.023 1.470 -2.12 30.0 -0.275 0.017 4.768 1.654 -4.01 40.0 -0.857 -0.079 4.394 1.983 -5.86------------------------------------------------


141 (272)


Initial condition : INI1, DWL, 1 m trim aheadDamage case : DAM1, Comp. 4, above dbStage of damage : AFTERCROSSPhase of stage : EQ

------------------------------------------------ HEEL GZ EPHI T TR RESMRG degree m rad*m m m m------------------------------------------------ -40.0 0.823 0.004 4.350 1.956 -5.81 -30.0 0.216 0.092 4.755 1.645 -4.00 -20.0 -0.209 0.090 5.046 1.487 -2.15 -15.0 -0.346 0.066 5.152 1.425 -1.22 -10.0 -0.344 0.034 5.267 1.358 -0.33

-5.0 -0.194 0.010 5.357 1.380 0.45 0.0 -0.040 0.000 5.386 1.390 1.21 5.0 0.115 0.003 5.357 1.383 0.44 10.0 0.265 0.020 5.266 1.362 -0.33 15.0 0.270 0.045 5.151 1.432 -1.22

20.0 0.135 0.063 5.046 1.492 -2.15 30.0 -0.274 0.053 4.769 1.656 -4.02 40.0 -0.857 -0.043 4.394 1.983 -5.86------------------------------------------------

LIS LIQL INI2/DAM2

LQ LIQL, CASE, DAM, DDES, INIT, IDES, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, NAME, DES, LOAD, DENS, FILL, RED, VOL, W, XCG, YCG, ZCG

LIQUID LOADS

--------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE NAME DENS FILL VOL W--------------------------------------------------------------INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R44 1.025 75.0 29.9 30.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 30.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 76.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 76.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R44 1.025 75.0 29.9 30.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 30.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 76.7INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 76.7INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R44 1.025 50.0 17.3 17.7INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R44 1.025 50.0 17.3 17.7INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 0.0


142 (272)


INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R44 1.025 25.0 8.7 8.9INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R44 1.025 25.0 8.7 8.9INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R45 1.025 75.0 29.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R40 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R41 0.960 50.0 79.9 0.0--------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DCOM INI2/DAM2

LQ DCOM, CASE, DAM, DDES, INIT, IDES, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, NAME, DES, PERM, VOL, W, XCG, YCG, ZCG

DAMAGED COMPARTMENTS

------------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE NAME PERM VOL XCG YCG ZCG------------------------------------------------------------------INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ 0.0INI2/DAM2 INTACT EQ 0.0INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R44 0.85 17.3 54.27 2.53 0.61INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 1 R44 0.85 17.3 54.27 2.53 0.61INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R44 0.85 26.0 54.27 2.53 0.61INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69INI2/DAM2 No cross fina 2 R44 0.85 26.0 54.27 2.53 0.61INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R44 0.85 34.6 54.27 2.53 0.61INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R47 1.00 41.4 58.83 0.00 0.69INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ R44 0.85 34.6 54.27 2.53 0.61------------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DROP INI1/DAM1

LQ DROP, CASE, DAM, INIT, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, NAME, TEXT, X, FR, Y, Z, OTYPE, IMMA, IMMR, REDPD, CONN


143 (272)


RELEVANT OPENINGS

-----------------------------------------------------------------PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA IMMR m m m degree m-----------------------------------------------------------------1 Bef cross OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 21.6 2.5581 Bef cross OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 19.8 2.5211 Bef cross OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 - 2.5581 Bef cross OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 - 2.5212 Bef cross OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 20.5 1.9162 Bef cross OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 18.7 1.8122 Bef cross OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 - 1.9162 Bef cross OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 - 1.812EQ Bef cross OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 20.0 2.049EQ Bef cross OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 18.2 1.961EQ Bef cross OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 - 2.049EQ Bef cross OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 - 1.9611 AFTERCROSS OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 19.8 2.3331 AFTERCROSS OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 17.9 2.2761 AFTERCROSS OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 - 2.3331 AFTERCROSS OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 - 2.276EQ AFTERCROSS OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 19.9 2.520EQ AFTERCROSS OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 18.0 2.483EQ AFTERCROSS OPE1 45.00 7.500 8.000 - 2.520EQ AFTERCROSS OPE2 53.60 8.300 8.100 - 2.483-----------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DPOI INI1/DAM1

LQ DPOI, CASE, DAM, INIT, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, NAME, TEXT, X, FR, Y, Z, IMMA, IMMR, REDPD

SPECIAL POINTS

------------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE NAME X Y Z IMMA m m m degree------------------------------------------------------------------INI1/DAM1 1 Bef cross POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 16.9 INI1/DAM1 1 Bef cross POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 11.9 INI1/DAM1 1 Bef cross POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 - INI1/DAM1 1 Bef cross POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 - INI1/DAM1 2 Bef cross POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 15.7 INI1/DAM1 2 Bef cross POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 10.6 INI1/DAM1 2 Bef cross POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 - INI1/DAM1 2 Bef cross POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 - INI1/DAM1 EQ Bef cross POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 15.1 INI1/DAM1 EQ Bef cross POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 9.8


144 (272)


INI1/DAM1 EQ Bef cross POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 - INI1/DAM1 EQ Bef cross POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 - INI1/DAM1 1 AFTERCROSS POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 14.7 INI1/DAM1 1 AFTERCROSS POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 9.5 INI1/DAM1 1 AFTERCROSS POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 - INI1/DAM1 1 AFTERCROSS POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 - INI1/DAM1 EQ AFTERCROSS POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 14.7 INI1/DAM1 EQ AFTERCROSS POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 9.4 INI1/DAM1 EQ AFTERCROSS POI1 15.00 4.500 6.000 - INI1/DAM1 EQ AFTERCROSS POI2 77.60 8.300 7.100 - ------------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DMRG INI1/DAM1

LQ DMRG, CASE, DAM, INIT, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, IMMR, X, Y, Z, IMMA, XIMM, REDPD

Margin line: ACTUAL MARGINLINE

----------------------------------------------------------------CASE PHASE STAGE SIDE IMMR IMMA XIMM REDPD m degree m m----------------------------------------------------------------INI1/DAM1 1 Bef cross PS 1.136 10.1 75.20 0.162INI1/DAM1 1 Bef cross SB 1.136 -10.1 75.20 0.162INI1/DAM1 2 Bef cross PS 0.350 9.1 75.20 0.169INI1/DAM1 2 Bef cross SB 0.350 -9.0 75.20 0.169INI1/DAM1 EQ Bef cross PS 0.481 8.4 76.47 0.166INI1/DAM1 EQ Bef cross SB 0.481 -8.4 75.20 0.166INI1/DAM1 1 AFTERCROSS PS 0.803 8.1 88.00 0.161INI1/DAM1 1 AFTERCROSS SB 0.803 -8.2 88.00 0.161INI1/DAM1 EQ AFTERCROSS PS 1.017 8.0 88.00 0.158INI1/DAM1 EQ AFTERCROSS SB 1.017 -8.0 88.00 0.158----------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DLIM INI1-2/DAM1-2

LQ DLIM, T, TR, TRA, MINGM, MAXKG, MINGM0, DCRI, DAM

LIMIT CURVE

-------------------------------------- T MINGM MAXKG DCRI DAM-------------------------------------- 4.500 0.832 9.600 CRIT2 DAM1 5.000 0.890 9.108 CRIT2 DAM1--------------------------------------


145 (272)


LIS DMGM INI1-2/DAM1-2

LQ DMGM, CASE, DAM, DDES, INIT, IDES, T, TR, TRA, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, MINGM, MAXKG, MINGM0, DCRI, REQ, ATTV, UNIT, GM, GM0, STAT

-----------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE SIDE MINGM GM DCRI REQ ATTV m m-----------------------------------------------------------------INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 0.890 1.199 CRIT2 0.050 0.051INI2/DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 0.832 1.204 CRIT2 0.050 0.051INI1/DAM2 No cross fina EQ PS 0.290 1.199 CRIT2 0.100 0.101INI2/DAM2 No cross fina EQ PS 0.241 1.204 CRIT2 0.100 0.101-----------------------------------------------------------------

LIS DSUM INI1-2/DAM1-2 CRIT LOAD

LQ DSUM, ARG, MINGM, MAXKG, MINGM0, STAT

Minimum GM (m) as a function of loading condition and criterion---------------------------------------------------------------

Criterion/Loading condition INI1 INI2CRIT1 0.822 0.787CRIT2 0.890 0.832

LIS DLDT INI1-2/DAM1-2

LQ DLDT, LCOND, TEXT, DCRI, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, REQ, ATTV, UNIT, STAT, GM, GM0

------------------------------------------------------------------LCOND DAM STAGE PHASE SIDE REQ ATTV UNIT STAT-----------------------------------------------------------------INI1 DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ PS 15.000 16.697 deg OKINI2 DAM1 Bef cross 2 PS 7.000 14.313 deg OK-----------------------------------------------------------------


146 (272)


LIS DCRT INI1/DAM1

LQ DCRT, CASE, DAM, INIT, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE, RCR, TEXT, REQ, ATTV, UNIT, STAT, MINGM, MAXKG, MINGM0, GM, GM0

STABILITY CRITERIA

-----------------------------------------------------------------CASE STAGE PHASE RCR REQ ATTV UNIT STAT MINGM-----------------------------------------------------------------INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 CRIT1 7.000 16.763 deg OK 0.4INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 CRIT1 7.000 26.461 deg OK -0.0INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 CRIT2 0.050 0.214 m OK 0.5INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 1 CRIT2 0.050 0.299 m OK 0.1INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 CRIT1 7.000 11.811 deg OK 0.8INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 CRIT1 7.000 27.989 deg OK -0.7INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 CRIT2 0.050 0.126 m OK 0.8INI1/DAM1 Bef cross 2 CRIT2 0.050 0.368 m OK -999.9INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ CRIT1 7.000 12.935 deg OK 0.4INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ CRIT1 7.000 27.567 deg OK -1.7INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ CRIT2 0.050 0.206 m OK 0.5INI1/DAM1 Bef cross EQ CRIT2 0.050 0.476 m OK -999.9INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 CRIT1 7.000 15.084 deg OK 0.0INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 CRIT1 7.000 26.328 deg OK -1.2INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 CRIT2 0.050 0.278 m OK 0.1INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS 1 CRIT2 0.050 0.414 m OK -999.9INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ CRIT1 15.000 16.697 deg OK 0.4INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ CRIT1 15.000 25.437 deg OK -0.1INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ CRIT2 0.100 0.296 m OK 0.2INI1/DAM1 AFTERCROSS EQ CRIT2 0.100 0.373 m OK -0.2------------------------------------------------------------------

10.10 The definition used in the list examples

The following definitions of damages, initial cases etc. where used when the above lists were made. The napa testship(NAPASHIP or TEST) was used in the calculations.

Definition of the damages:

DAMA, DAM1, 'Comp. 4, above db'STA, 'Bef cross'ROO, R47, R44, R42, R402, R40PHA, 2STA, AftercrossROO, R43PHA, 1

DAMA, DAM2, 'Comp. 4, under db'STA, 'No cross final'ROO, R47, R44PHA, 2

DGR, DAM1-2


147 (272)


DAM, DAM1, DAM2

Definition of the initial cases

INIT, INI1, 'DWL, 1 m trim ahead'T, 5TRI, 1GM, 1.3LIQ, R44, FILL=0.75LIQ, R45, FILL=0.75LIQ, R40, FILL=0.5LIQ, R41, FILL=0.5

INIT, INI2, 'DWL-0.5, no trim'T, 4.5GM, 1.3LIQ, R44, FILL=0.75LIQ, R45, FILL=0.75LIQ, R40, FILL=0.5LIQ, R41, FILL=0.5

IGR, INI1-2INI, INI1, INI2

Definition of the openings

OPEN, OPE1, 'WT door at deck2'POS, (45, 7.5, 8)TYP, WEATHERTIGHT

OPEN, OPE2, 'Hatch at #67'POS, (#67, 8.3, 8.1)TYP, UNPROTECTED

Definition of the points (Note: in the CR TASK)

POI, POI1, 'Check point 1'POS, (15, 4.5, 6)

POI, POI2, 'Check point 2'POS, (#97, 8.3, 7.1)

Definition of criteria

CRIT, CRIT1, 'Range of pos. stab'TYPE, RANGEREQ, 15STA, 7PHA, 7RANG, 0, FAOK

CRIT, CRIT2, 'Max. righting lever'TYPE, MAXGZREQ, 0.1PHA, 0.05STA, 0.05

Arguments in the DA task.


148 (272)


HEEL -40 -30 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 30 40

11 AdministrationThe administrative commands handle data that are permanently stored in the data base. These data are damage cases,initial conditions, stability criteria, openings, margin lines, damage case groups, initial condition groups, room groups,opening groups, criterion groups, external moments, subdivisions and hydrostatic results. The definition commands andthe calculation of cases create these data. The administration commands are:

■ list catalog of stored data (CAT)■ list and edit data in input format (DES, EDI)■ copy data (COPY)■ delete data (DEL)■ resque obsolete results (RES)

The commands (except RESQUE) need to know what kind of data they are treating. This is given by the option 'type',which is one of the following 14 alternatives: DAMAGE, INIT, CRIT, OPENING, MARGIN, DGROUP, IGROUP,RGROUP, OGROUP, CGROUP, SUBDIVISION, MOM, RESULT and ARG. Abbreviations of these are possible. Theoption 'type' may be omitted (expect in CAT), if the name of the stored data is unambiguous, i.e. there is only one kindof data under the given name. If there are many matches, the type must be specified.

11.1 List catalog

CAT type;

gives a list of items stored in the data base. The catalogs of the criteria and the openings contain the additional informationRELEVANT/IRRELEVANT. The list of results, CAT RES, tells whether the results are up-to-date or not. The scope ofCAT RES can be limited to an initial condition or a damage case.

CAT RES INIT=init;

list catalog of results of the specified initial condition and

CAT RES DAM=damage;

list catalog of results of the specified damage case.

11.2 List data in input format

The command DES prints data in input format. The command looks like

DES type name,name,...;

or

DES type ALL;

The first alternative prints only the named items, the second one prints all found in the data base. The type cannot beRESULT.

If the given type is DAMAGE, INIT, OPENING or CRIT and 'name' is the name of a group, then the description of allitems belonging to the group is listed.

11.3 Edit data in input format

The command EDIT edits the stored data in input format. The command is similar to DES.


149 (272)


The easiest way to redefine/change data is to call .

EDI type name ADD

11.4 Copy

COPY type name vers/project;

fetches selected data from the given project and version and stores it in the current one. If copying is carried out fromanother version of the current project, '/project' does not have to be given. Copying initial conditions, damage cases,openings or old criteria one may use name of a group instead of name of a single data item.

Results cannot be copied without initial conditions and damage cases.

11.5 Delete

Data are removed from the data base by the command

DEL type name;

Deleting initial conditions, damage cases, openings, criteria results and group names are possible.

11.6 Rescue results

The results are rejected if the damage case, initial condition, argument hull or any room is younger than the date of storingof the results. Rejected results cannot be used in listing and plotting. The results may be rescued by the command:

RESQUE case;

This command reads the results from the data base and writes them back. This process makes the results younger than thedata they depend on and output is again possible. Be sure that this can be done safely!

The parameter 'case' is the same as in the CALCULATE-command.

12 Probabilistic damage stabilityThis chapter describes how to calculate probabilistic damage stability, or subdivision index, in the NAPA system. Thesystem supports the calculation of

■ the SOLAS regulations on subdivision and damage stability of cargo ships, SOLAS chapter II-1, part B-1, reg.25-1,...,25-8 (REG25)

■ Revised SOLAS CHAPTER II-1 part B, B-1 MSC 194(80)■ the regulations on subdivision and damage stability of passenger ships, IMO resolution A.265(VIII) (A265)■ the simplified method for the attained subdivision index of ro-ro passenger ships, IMO MSC/Circ.574 (M574)■ modifications of the three methods stated above.

Modifications of the regulations are possible because the program accepts macros for calculation of R, s, p, r, v or a. Alsothe number of initial conditions and their weight coefficients may be selected freely.

Input and output of probabilistic damage stability is in the form of tables. Most part of the input tables may be generatedby the program. Nothing prevents the user to generate input manually or modify the result table in any stage of calculation.However, this is not recommended.


150 (272)


See also NAPA User Meeting papers about probabilistic damage stabililty.

12.1 Input tables

The essential precondition of good results is a suitable set of damages. The most convenient way to generate damages isto let the program do the job. The command GEN DAM... generates the damages and put them in tables with all necessarydata needed by the probabilistic damage stability. The tables, called damage tables, must contain the following data:

DAM name of damage

ZONE name(s) of zone(s)

X1 aft end of damage

X2 fore end of damage

IB index of longitudinal subdivision limiting damage inward

NB total number of longit. subdivisions in the damaged zone(s)

MB mean transverse distance b of the longit. subdivision

MB1 mean transverse distance b of the longit. subdivision next outward

IHU index of horizontal subdivision limiting damage upward

NH total number of horizontal subdivisions in the damaged zone(s)

HSU height of the horizontal subdivision limiting damage upward

HSU1 height of the horizontal subdivision next downward

SIDE side of penetration

IHD index of horizontal subdivision limiting damage downward (damage of lesserextent)

HSD height of the horizontal subdivision limiting damage downward

NR control number of damage

See the chapter 'Subdivision aided damage case generation' for more information about damage generation and contentsof the columns.

The table, called summary table, connects the initial conditions with the damages and contains general parameters assubdivision length, breadth, number of passengers etc. This table must be created manually. The description of thesummary table is as follows:

NEW TAB*SUMMARY NMCOL, INIT COL, DAMTABCOL, WCOEF COL, SUBD COL, GMR (only for A.265) CONSTANTS LSA=xxx, LSF=xxx,...

In the NAPA database, there are four model tables: REG25MODEL, A265MODEL, SOLASII-1MODEL andM574MODEL.

INIT Name of initial condition or initial condition group. Each line connects onedraught to a set of damages. Same initial condition may occur in many lines.The number of different draughts is not limited. If the name in the line is nameof an initial condition group, the program selects among the initial conditionsof the group, the worst one for each damage (the one giving the least s) and

../workshops/probdam/index.html#umws_probdamage


151 (272)


accepts contribution of that one only to the subdivision index. For instance, if thesubdivision index must be calculated at the most unfavourable service trim, thereshould be for each draught an initial condition group containing different trims.

DAMTAB Name of damage table (without prefix). The damage tables must contain allcolumns properly filled as described in the beginning of this chapter. Thedamages may be separated into different tables provided all damages in one tablecorrespond to the same subdivision. The number of different damage tables is notlimited.

WCOEF Weight coefficient of draught (initial condition). For both draughts of REG25wcoef=0.5, for d1, d2 and d3 of A265 weight coefficients are 0.45, 0.33 and 0.22and for the single draught of M574 wcoef=1.0. Other weight coefficients areneeded, for instance, if number of draughts is not the standard one or if tablescontain damages on both sides.

SUBD Name of subdivision the damages belong to. All damages of the damage tablemust belong to the specified subdivision.

GMR Highest required intact metacentric height. These values are needed by IMOA.265 only (see reg. 6, (d) (i)).

Constants Some general data are transported to the calculation of the subdivision index asconstants. The needed constants are: LSA : aft end of the subdivision length. Default x1 of the aftmost zone of thesubdivision. LSF : fore end of the subdivision length. Default x2 of the foremost zone of thesubdivision. BLL or B : breadth B (REG25). Default BDWL from the ref. system. B1 : breadth B1 (A265). Default BDWL from the ref. system. B2 : breadth B2 (A265) N1 : number of persons N1 (A265) MSC 194(80) N2 : number of persons N2 (A265) MSC 194(80) NCOMP: compartment standard 1 or 2 (default=2) (M574)

12.1.1 Examples

Typical summary table for REG25

INIT DAM WCOEF SUBD-------------------------DL DAMTAB 0.5 SOLASPL DAMTAB 0.5 SOLASCONSTANTS, LSA=-2.802, LSF=84.576, B=13

Typical summary table for A265:


152 (272)


INIT DAM WCOEF SUBD GMR------------------------------D1 DAMTAB 0.45 BP5 1.23D2 DAMTAB 0.33 BP5 1.42D3 DAMTAB 0.22 BP5 1.54CONSTANTS, LSA=-4.05 LSF=115.36 B1=20.5 B2=20.5 N1=300 N2=100

Typical summary table for M574:

INIT DAM WCOEF SUBD------------------------DSLL DAMTAB 1.0 BP5CONSTANTS, LSA=-4.05 LSF=115.36 B1=20.5,NCOMP=2

Summary table for REG25 when, due to unsymmetric ship, damages on both sides are used:

INIT DAM WCOEF SUBD-------------------------DL PDAM 0.25 PSUBDL SDAM 0.25 SSUBPL PDAM 0.25 PSUBPL SDAM 0.25 SSUBCONSTANTS, LSA=-2.802, LSF=84.576, B=13

In this example, damages on the port side and and on the starboard side are divided into tables PDAM and SDAM. Theport side damages are generated using the subdivision PSUB and the starboard side damages are generated using thesubdivision SSUB. The weight coefficient is 0.25 because mean values are calculated.

12.2 Calculation of probabilities

After input tables are prepared, the next step is to calculate the probability of survival s and the probability of flooding pfor every initial condition - damage combination defined in the summary table. The results are put into one single tablewhich will be generated by the program. The columns ZONE, X1, X2, IB, NB, MB, MB1, IHU, NH, HSU, HSU1, SIDEand NR are copied from the damage tables and the following new columns are added to the result table:

CASE name of case 'initial condition/damage case'

SFAC probability of survival s

PFAC flooding probability p

P123

component of p, p123

P12 component of p, p12




153 (272)


R123

component of p, r123

R12 component of p, r12



VFAC factor v (REG25)

AFAC factor a (A265, M574)

HMAX maximum vertical extent of damage as specified in SOLAS regulation 25-6, 3.3

WCOEF weight coefficient as given in the summary table

SUBD name of subdivision as given in the summary table

T initial draught

CAL TAB=sumtab, STORE=restab, SRULE=rule, PRULE=rule, RRULE=rule, VRULE=rule, CROSS=(t1, t2...) SKIP=plim, PONLY

calculates the damages and the factors s, p, r, v and a.

Arguments and options of the command are:

TAB=sumtab specifies the summary table (name without prefix)

STORE=restab (option) tells where to store the results. The program defines the result table. Thename of the table is without prefix. If this option is missing, calculation of thefactors is omitted and results are not stored anywhere, only damage cases arecalculated.

SRULE=rule (option) defines the rule how to calculate the s-factors. The alternatives are: SOLASII-1: MSC 80, see chapter Revised SOLAS CHAPTER II-1 (default) REG25: as in the SOLAS regulations for cargo ships A265: as in the IMO regulations for passenger ships M574: as in MSC/Circ.574 name other than REG25, A265, SOLASII-1 or M574: according to the given macro. If s-calculation is performed using a macro, themacro should calculate s to the variable called S.

PRULE=rule (option) specifies the rule how to calculate p. The default rule is the same asthat for s-calculation. The alternatives of the rule are REG25, A265, M574,SOLASII-1 or name of a macro. The macro is expected to assign the variables P(damages of one zone) or P123, P12, P23 and P2 (damages of several adjacentzones; if two adjacent zones are damaged assign P2=0.0).

RRULE=rule (option) specifies the rule how to calculate r. The default rule is the same asthat for s-calculation. The alternatives of the rule are REG25, A265, M574,SOLASII-1 or name of a macro. The macro is expected to assign the variables R(damages of one zone) or R123, R12, R23 and R2 (damages of several adjacentzones; if two adjacent zones are damaged assign R2=0.0).


154 (272)


VRULE=rule (option) specifies the rule how to calculate v. The default rule is the same asthat for s-calculation. The alternatives of the rule are REG25, A265, M574,SOLASII-1 or name of a macro (if rule is A265 or M574 v=1.0). The macro isexpected to assign the variable V.

CROSS=(t1, t2...) (option) The option adds new stages to the end of the damage case. The stagescorrespond to the cross-flooding situation at times t1, t2 etc... The cross-floodingtimes are calculated according to Resolution MSC.245(83) and the cross-floodingarrangement is defined in the compartment connection table (argument CCONN).The added stages are called CROSS<time>s, e.g. CROSS60s and CROSS600s.Each time (t1, t2 etc) generates one additional stage provided it does not exceedthe total cross flooding time.

SKIP=plim (option) defines the 'skipping limit' of damages. If a damage has p lesser thanplim, its calculation will be skipped and it is removed from the result table. Thedefault value of plim is 0.0.

The program tries to find the macros first in the project data data base (DB1), then in the system data base (DB2) andlastly in the NAPA data base (DB7). The program offers the following variables for the macros:

LSA aft end of Ls (m)

LSF fore end of Ls (m)

X1 x1 of damage (m)

X2 x2 of damage (m)

X1A x1 of each inner zone of damage (m), array

X2A x2 of each inner zone of damage (m), array

BLL max. breadth at or below the deepest load line (m)

NZ number of damaged zones

IB index of the first unpenetrated longit. subdivision (0=penetration not limited)

NB number of longit. subdivisions in way of damage

MB mean breadth b (m)

MB1 mean breadth b of the next subdivision outward (m)

IHU index of the first unpenetrated horizontal subdivision upward (0=penetration notlimited)

NH number of horizontal subdivisions in way of damage

HSU height of the horizontal subdivision IHU (m)

HSU1 height of the horizontal subdivision next downward (m)

IHD index of the first unpenetrated horizontal subdivision downward (0=penetrationnot limited)

HSD height of the horizontal subdivision IHD (m)

HMAX maximum height of damage (m)

T initial draught (m)

NN1 number of persons N1 (A.265)

NN2 number of persons N1 (A.265)

T equilibrium draught (m)

TR equilibrium trim (rad)


155 (272)


HEEL equilibrium heeling angle (rad)

GM0 intact GM0 (m)

GMRD GM reduction (m)

GMCO GM correction (m)

GM intact corrected GM (m)

KMT KMT (m)

MGM maximum GM requirement (m)

MGM0 max. GM0 requirement (m)

MKG max. allowed KG (m)

GMA0 actual GM at upright (heeling angle 0) (m)

GMA actual GM at equilibrium (m)

MMS GM reduction as a result of flooding (m)

FA angle of progressive flooding, unprot. + weathert. openings (rad)

FAUN immersion angle of unprotected openings (rad)

FAWE immersion angle of weathertight openings (rad)

RFLD reserve to progressive flooding (m)

IMRG immersion angle of the margin line (rad)

XIMR x where margin line immerses (m)

RMRG minimum freeboard (m)

XRMR x where minimum freeboard (m)

F1 effective mean freeboard f1, IMO A265 (m)

AGZ total area under GZ curve (m*rad)

AFA area under GZ curve from eq to fa (m*rad)

AGZR area under GZ curve from eq to 22/27 degrees (m*rad)

RNG range of positive stability (rad)

RNGF range of positive stability from eq to fa (rad)

PHIV angle of vanishing stability (rad)

MGZ maximum GZ (m)

AMGZ angle where maximum GZ (rad)

GZMR maximum GZ from eq to fa (m)

MGZR maximum GZ from eq to eq+15 (m)

GRF grounding force (t)

XCNT point of contact, x (m)

YCNT point of contact, y (m)

ZCNT point of contact, z (m)

DPT depth of water at the ground (m)

FLW inflooded water - outflooded cargo (t)

BUOY buoyancy of intact hull (t)


156 (272)


LCB LCB (m)

TCB TCB (m)

VCB VCB (m)

DSP0 initial displacement (t)

AZI azimuth (rad)

TRX trim along x-axis (m)

TRA trim angle along stability axis (rad)

TRXA trim angle along x-axis (rad)

HAX heeling around x-axis (rad)

GMGM global minimum GM in the case (m)

GMG0 global minimum GM0 in the case (m)

GMKG global maximum KG in the case (m)

MGZS maximum GZ for s of SOLAS (m)

RNGS range for s of SOLAS (rad)

RMD minimum freeboard in way of damage (m)

XRMD x where minimum freeboard in way of damage (m)

RME minimum freeboard except in way of damage (m)

XRME x where minimum freeboard except in way of damage (m)

STAGE name of stage

PHASE name of phase

SIDE side PS or SB

SEVERITY severity (GREEN/YELLOW/RED)

STATUS status of criteria (OK/NOT MET)

12.2.1 Revised SOLAS CHAPTER II-1

The meaning of probabilistic damage stability rule SOLASII-1 has been changed: the previous release calculated the ruleaccording to SLF 42/5 (MSC 80), the new program calculates it according to revised SOLAS chapter II-1, SLF 47/17(MSC 80).

Related to revised SOLAS chapter II-1, the following new things are available:

■ Factors A, s, p, r, v and R are acc. to SLF 47/17 (MSC 194(80))■ Primarily, the type of the ship is fetched from parameter PBTY of the reference system. Only the strings

PASSENGER and CARGO are accepted. If the word PASSENGER is applied, the ship is calculated according topassenger ship rules. If PBTY is not defined, the program checks parameter NPA, number of passengers, of thereference system. If it is 36 or more, the ship is calculated according to passenger ship rules. Otherwise the ship is acargo ship.

■ In damage generation, the transverse penetration limit should be B/2-surface or some other limit between the shelland B/2. Factors r are calculated always based on the actual b, r=1 is never assumed. See chapter 'Generation ofdamages'

■ Input of moment for passenger ships is done in the summary table by constant MOM, 'CONSTANTS, MOM=m',where m is name of a moment or a moment value.


157 (272)


■ The program checks cross-flooding time and assigns s=0 if the time exceeds 10 min. Cross-flooding time is checkedif the compartment connection table and the damages make it possible, see chapter 'Calculation of cross-floodingtime'.

■ A new criterion type SSOLAS is implemented. The criterion calculates probability of survival s acc. to SOLAS II-1,Part B-1 (SLF 47/17, MSC 80). The type of the ship is fetched in the same way than in rule SOLASII-1 and cross-flooding time is checked if possible. Note also that RANGE defines the limits for calculation of the maximum GZand the range of GZ and MOM defines the moment.

■ Option MINGM of command CALC PROB has two new alternatives: MINGM=r calculates the minimun GM sothat, separately for each draught (initial condition), A = r*R. MINGM=(init1=r1,init2=r2,...) calculates the minimunGM as above but r changes with draught.

■ The following quantities related to SOLAS II-1 are available in LIST DRES and LIST PRES:■ SFACSOL s factor by SOLAS II-1■ GZMAXSOL maximum GZ by SOLAS II-1■ RANGESOL range by SOLAS II-1■ MOMSOL moment used in SOLAS II-1■ KSOL K coefficient by SOLAS II-1■ CROSSTM time of cross flooding

Quantities of SLF 42/5, AREASOL, CSOL, TAREA, TGZMAX and TRANGE are no more available.■ LIST PSUM has one new quantity AREL, relative attained index, attained index/required index.■ Quantity MOMNT, moment for passenger ships by SOLAS II-1, is available in the set of variables offered to the

macros.

12.3 Removing extra cases

If there are damages that are represented by several cases (e.g. damages of lesser extent) or draughts that are representedby several initial conditions (e.g. searching for the most unfavourable service trim), the extra cases must be removed fromthe table. Removing extra cases is based on the s-factors; the one having the least s is left in the result table, others areremoved. The command

SEL CASE TAB=restab STORE=restab1 ONLY=sel

performs removing of extra cases.

Arguments of the command are:

TAB=restab specifies the result table and the argument

STORE=restab1 gives the name where to store the stripped table (may be restab=restab1).

ONLY=sel defines the selection criterion. There are three alternatives of 'sel': ONLY=MINS: the cases having the least s are selected ONLY=NOZ: the cases having s greater than 0 are selected ONLY=(MINS,NOZ): the cases having the least s and s greater than 0 areselected. (MINS,MAXHEEL): select the cases having the minimum s and, if there aremany having the same minimum s, among these select the one having the greatestheel angle. (MINS,MAXHEEL,NOZ): as above but select the cases having s>0

Removing of extra cases by the criterion MINS is based on the control number (column NR). All cases having the samecontrol number are considered to be variations of the same case. Among these variations, the one having the least s is


158 (272)


selected for contributing to the subdivision index. The program assigns the same control number for the damages of 'lesserextent' and for the cases where the initial conditions are given in the same initial condition group (group in the columnINIT of the summary table). Nothing prevents the user to take advantage of this feature by adding damages to the damagetable or cases to the result table so that they have the common control number with other damages or cases. In this wayone may vary any aspect of damage or initial condition and automatically select the most unfavourable one.

12.4 Calculation of subdivision index

CAL PROB TAB=restab, RSI=r, MINGM, FIX=(ini,ini,...)

calculates the required and attained subdivision index R and A.


TAB=restab specifies the (stripped) result table. If the table is not stripped, i.e. there are caseshaving the same control number, calculation stops and 'SEL CASE' should be run.

RSI=r (option) specifies the rule how to calculate the required subdivision index. Thedefault rule is the same as that for s-calculation. The alternatives of the rule areREG25, A265, M574, name of a macro or explicit number. The macro is expectedto assign the variable RSI. If the rule is M574, the required subdivision index isAmax (= sum of a*p*s where all s's are equal to 1.0). Note that in REG25, RSI forthe ships having Ls less than 100 m is calculated using the alternative equation.

MINGM (option) starts calculation of minimum GM values which result in the attainedsubdivision index equal to the required subdivision index. In calculation of theminimum GM values, the form of the GM curve versus draught is preserved, i.e.the GM values at every draught are increased or decreased by the same amount.

FIX=(ini,ini,...) (option) In searching for the minimum GM values, any initial condition or anysubgroup of the initial conditions may be fixed, i.e. GM of these initial conditionsis not changed during the iteration. The option FIX=(ini,ini,...) fixes the initialconditions. If 'ini' is of the form 'name=gm0', GM0 is fixed to the given value'gm0'. If 'ini' is just the name of an initial condition, GM is fixed to its initial value.The alternative 'name=gm0' may be used without the option 'MINGM', too. In thiscase the program calculates A for the changed GM0-values.

12.5 Intermediate stages and phases

If there are many stages in damages, the equilibrium phase of each stage is treated as the final condition of floodingprovided the name of the stage does not begin with the letters INT. In probabilistic calculations the least s-factor of thefinal conditions represents the s-factor of the whole damage case .

If the name of the stage begins with the letters INT, the s-factor is set to 0.0 if any of the currently relevant criteriongives the status NOT MET. If no criteria are set as relevant (in the arguments), the s-factor is set to 1.0 or the value that apossible previous stage has assigned for the s-factor. Note also that if the stage beginning with the letters INT is the onlystage of the damage, the above will not apply and it is treated as a normal stage.

If the damages are calculated using the progressive calculation mode (OPT PROGR or OPT WEBPROG), the stagePROGRESSIVE is added to the cases if progressive flooding occurs, so the progressive stage is always handled as thefinal stage. Other extra stages or phases are not appearing automatically in the damages but the user has to add themmanually. Because checking of the condition 'during flooding' is based on the criteria, the user should check the set ofrelevant criteria if there are intermediate stages or phases defined.

What is said here holds for REG25, M574 and SOLASII-1. If the regulation is A265, the criteria to be checked duringflooding are 'maximum heeling 20 deg' and 'no progressive flooding' no matter what the relevant criteria are. The macros,of course, handle the stages and phases in their own way.


159 (272)


SOLASII-1 differs from the mentioned rules as the s-factor is always calculated, i.e. for passenger vessels the equilibriumphase of the final stage always uses the final formula according to SOLAS 2009 and the intermediate formula for theremaining phases, which are regarded as intermediate ones. For cargo vessels the s-factor is set to unity for all intermediatephases. All cross flooding stages (passenger and cargo vessels) are also treated as final stages. If the name of the stagebegins with the letters INT, the s-factor is set to 0.0 if any of the currently relevant criterion gives the status NOT MET.If no criteria are set as relevant (in the arguments), the s-factor is calculated in a normal way.

12.6 Output

In addition to listing functions of tables, there are two special lists for probabilistic damage stability.

LIST PSUM PTAB=restab, SEP, NOH

list summary of the required and attained subdivision index. The list contains:

■ general data like subdivision length Ls, breadth B etc.■ required subdivision index (Amax fo M574)■ attained subdivision index■ table showing the contribution of each draught to the attained subdivision index organized in the same way as the

summary table.

The argument PTAB=restab specifies where to find the results. The table 'restab' is made by the command CAL PROB.The name of the table is without prefix.

If the column INIT of the summary table contains initial condition groups, the option SEP opens the groups printing allinitial conditions on separate lines.

The option NOH (no header) skips printing of the header line and the general data.

The available quantities are:

■ INIT : initial condition or group■ IDES : description of initial condition or group■ DAMTAB : damage table■ T : draught■ TR : trim■ GM0 : uncorrected GM■ GMRED : GM reduction■ GM : metacentric height■ GMR : GM requirement as given in the summary table■ KG■ ASI : attained subdivision index■ MINGM0 : minimum GM0 giving the required sudivision index■ MINGM : minimum GM giving the required sudivision index■ MAXKG : maximum KG giving the required sudivision index■ WCOEF : weight coefficient■ SUBD : subdivision

If the quantity is ambiguous within the initial condition group and the initial conditions are not printed separately (SEPnot given), the program gives warning 6141 and prints - (minus) in the list.

LIST PRES PTAB=tab, SRULE=rule, PRULE=rule, RRULE=rule, VRULE=rule, SKIP=plim, SEP, GLO, NOH

produces a comprehensive list about damages and their probabilities.


160 (272)



PTAB=tab specifies the table where to find the results (result table of CAL TAB=... or CALPROB). If 'tab' is name of a summary table, the results are listed for the situation'before stripping' (before SEL CASE...ONLY=).

SRULE=rule, PRULE=rule, RRULE=rule,

VRULE=rule, SKIP=plim (option) as in the command CAL TAB=. These options are relevant only iflisting is not made from the result table, i.e. 'tab' in the option PTAB is name of asummary table.

SEP (option) Normally, the command produces one line for each case init/dam evenif there are many stages and phases (the stage and phase giving the least s). Allstages and phases are listed separately (excluding stage INTACT) if the optionSEP is given.

GLO (option) see LIST DRES.

NOH (option) The header is not printed

The available quantities are all quantities of LIST DRES plus:

■ ZONE : name(s) of zone(s)■ NZONE : number of adjacent zones■ X1 : x1 of the damage■ X2 : x2 of the damage■ IB : index of longitudinal subdivision

■ if IB = 1, r(...,b1) = 0 and b2 = MB■ if IB = NB+1 (or IB = 0), r(...,b2) = 1 and b1 = MB1■ if 1 < IB < NB+1, b2 = MB and b1 = MB1.

■ NB : number of longitudinal subdivisions in way of damage■ MB : mean distance b of the longit. subdivision■ MB1 : mean distance b of the longit. subdivision next outward of IB■ IHU : index of upward horizontal subdivision■ NH : number of horizontal subdivisions in way of damage■ HSU : height of upward horizontal subdivision■ HSU1 : height of upward horizontal subdivision next downward of IHU■ IHD : index of downward horizontal subdivision■ HSD : height of downward horizontal subdivision■ HMAX : maximum vertical extent of damage■ NR : control number■ SFACCGM : factor s for changed and/or minimum GM values■ WCOEF : weight coefficient■ SUBD : name of subdivision■ GMR : GM requirement (A265)■ PFAC : factor p■ VFAC : factor v■ AFAC : factor a■ P123 : p(l1+l2+l3)

■ P123 is p calculated for the total length of damage

■ P12 : p(l1+l2)


161 (272)


■ P12 is p calculated for the length of n-1 first zones, wheren is number of damaged zones (one zone damages:p12=0)

■ P23 : p(l2+l3)■ P23 is p calculated for the length of n-1 last zones(one zone damages: p23=0)

■ P2 : p(l2)■ P2 is p calculated for the length of n-2 middle zones(one and two zone damages: p2=0)

■ R123 : r(l1+l2+l3,b2)-r(l1 +l2+l3,b1)■ R123 is r calculated for the length of P123

■ R12 : r(l1+l2,b2)-r(l1+l2, b1)■ R12 is r calculated for the length of P12

■ R23 : r(l2+l3,b2)-r(l2+l3, b1)■ R23 is r calculated for the length of P23

■ R2 : r(l2,b2)-r(l2,b1)■ R2 is r calculated for the length of P2

Note! To avoid storing a huge number of quantities in the result tables, the quantities of LIST DRES are not stored butcalculated during listing. Also s is recalculated during listing if there are many stages and phases in damages and theoption SEP is given. This is because only the minimum s is stored, not s values of all stages and phases.

12.7 Probabilistic damage calculation - work throughs

Work througs using MSC 574, Reg 25-1, Harmonized proposal (42/5)

By Ralf Eklund / Napa Oy / 25-03-99

12.7.1 MSC 574 (A/Amax) work through:

1. Damage generation■ Prepare a subdivision table

DAM?>SUBD M574SUB■ Check the subdivision

DRW SUBD NAME=M574SUB■ Prepare a CLIM table in TAB

TAB?>NEW CLIM CLIMMODEL■ Check the compartment boundaries in the table!■ Generate 1-zone damages in DA

DAM?>GEN DAM SUB=M574SUB WTC=CLIM SIDE=P PREF=DAMP STO=DAMA■ Check the damages!■ Generate 2-zone damages (1-zone as base)

DAM?>GEN DAM SUB=SOLAS ADJ=2 STO=DAMA STO=DAMA OZD=DAMA BADV=IND HADV=IND The IND option reduces the amount of damages

2. Calculating the probabilities■ Define the INIT case in DA

INIT SD 'Deepest subdivision draught' T t; KG kg; OK

■ Create the summary table in TAB TAB?>NEW SUMMARY M574MODEL + SD DAMA 1.0 M574SUB CONSTANTS LSA=lsa LSF=lsf B1=b1 NCOMP=N

■ Calculate the damages (s, p, r, a) in DA DAM?>CAL TAB=SUMMARY STORE=RESULT SRULE=M574


162 (272)


■ Strip the result table in DA if you want to skip s=0 or if damages of lesser extent are defined DAM?>SEL CASE TAB=RESULT STORE=RESULT1 ONLY=(MINS, NOZ)

■ Calculate the index in DA CAL PROB TAB=RESULT1 RSI=M574

3. Output of results■ LIST PSUM PTAB=RESULT1■ LIST PRES PTAB=RESULT1

The following LQ can be found in DB7: LQ*PRES*AMAX LQ PRES CASE(F=19) PFAC(P) AFAC(A) SFAC(S) R(P*A*S F=12.5)/'pfac*afac*sfac' (INIT) TOO PRES HD=(UL, S, UL, -, UL) GROUP=INIT SUBT TOT

12.7.2 REG 25-1 work through:


DAM?>SUBD SOLAS ■ Check the subdivision

DRW SUBD NAME=SOLAS■ Prepare a CLIM table in TAB

TAB?>NEW CLIM CLIMMODEL■ Check the compartment boundaries in the table!■ Generate 1-zone damages in DA

DAM?>GEN DAM SUB=SOLAS WTC=CLIM SIDE=P PREF=DAMP, STO=DAMA■ Check the damages!■ Generate 2-3-zone damages (1-zone as base)

DAM?>GEN DAM SUB=SOLAS ADJ=2-3 STO=DAMA, OZD=DAMA BADV=IND HADV=IND The IND option reduces the amount of damages

2. Calculating the probabilities■ Define the INIT cases in DA

INIT PL 'Partial load line' INI DL 'Deepest load line' T t; GM gm; OK

■ Create the summary table in TAB TAB?>NEW SUMMARY REG25MODEL + PL DAMA 0.5 SOLAS + DL DAMA 0.5 SOLAS

■ Calculate the damages (s, p, r, v) in DA DAM?>CAL TAB=SUMMARY STORE=RESULT (SRULE is REG25 by default)

■ Strip the result table in DA if you want to skip s=0 or if damages of lesser extent are defined DAM?>SEL CASE TAB=RESULT STORE=RESULT1, ONLY=(MINS, NOZ)

■ Calculate the index in DA DAM?>CAL PROB TAB=RESULT1

3. Output of results in DA DAM?>LIST PSUM PTAB=RESULT1 DAM?>LIST PRES PTAB=RESULT1

If ROP data changes go back to CAL TAB

The following LQ:s can be found in DB7:

LQ*PRES*REG25A


163 (272)


LQ PRES, CASE(F=19), PFAC(P), VFAC(V), MAXGZ, RANGE, HEEL, SFAC(S), R(P*V*S*0.5,F=10.5)/'.5*pfac*vfac*sfac', (INIT)

TOO PRES, HD=(UL, S, U, UL, -, UL), GROUP=INIT, SUBT, TOT

LQ*PRES*REG25B

LQ PRES, CASE(F=19), PFAC(P), VFAC(V), MAXGZ, RANGE, HEEL, SFAC(S), R(P*V*S*0.5, F=10.5)/'.5*pfac*vfac*sfac', (INIT)

TOO PRES, HD=(UL, S, U, UL, -, UL), GROUP=INIT, SUBT, TOT

12.7.3 Revised SOLAS ch II-1, MSC 194(80)


DAM?>SUBD SOLAS ■ Check the subdivision graphically in DA

DAM?>DRW SUBD NAME=SOLAS ■ Prepare a CLIM table in TAB

TAB?>NEW CLIM CLIMMODEL■ Check the compartment boundaries in the table!■ Define the permeabilities for the cargo purpose: Define the column IPERM to the table PAR*PRO

PAR?>COL IPERM PAR?>DEF CARGO IPERM='T,p1, dl+0.01, p2, dp+0.01, p3' PAR?>REP See also: Case>!expl roo

■ A corresponding permeability definition for a single room can be made in SM by adding the column IPERM tothe arrangement (ARR prompt). Note that the permeability has to be defined before damage generation.

■ Generate the penetration limit surface DEF?>GEN B2LIM B5 hull t B/2 Y

■ Generate 1-zone damages in DA DAM?>GEN DAM SUB=SOLAS WTC=CLIM SIDE=P PREF=DAMP STO=DAMA HLIM=hsd+12.5 BLIM=B2LIM STA=('1' [CROSS]) BOX ACLASS=DAM

■ Check the damages!■ Generate 2-3-zone damages (1-zone as base)

DAM>GEN DAM SUB=SOLAS WTC=CLIM ADJ=2-3 STO=DAMA OZD=DAMA HLIM=hsd+12.5 BLIM=B2LIM STA=('1' [CROSS]) BOX ACLASS=DAM

2. Calculating the probabilities■ Define the INIT cases in DA

INIT ds 'Deepest subdivision load line' T t; GM gm; OK INI dl 'Light service draught' T t; GM gm; OK INI dp 'Partial load line' T t; GM gm; OK

■ If the ship is a passenger ship, define a moment in DA and use it as a constant in the summary table.■ Create the summary table in TAB

TAB?>NEW SUMMARY COL, INIT COL, DAMTAB COL, WCOEF


164 (272)


COL, SUBD + ds DAMA 0.4 SOLAS + dp DAMA 0.4 SOLAS + dl DAMA 0.2 SOLAS CONSTANT MOM=' "name" ' (only for passenger ships)

■ Calculate the damages (s, p, r, v) in DA DAM?>CAL TAB=SUMMARY STORE=RESULT, SRULE=SOLASII-1

■ Strip the result table in DA if you want to skip s=0 or if damages of lesser extent are defined DAM?>SEL CASE TAB=RESULT STORE=RESULT1, ONLY=(MINS, NOZ)

■ Calculate the index in DA DAM?>CAL PROB TAB=RESULT1

3. Output of results in DA DAM?>LIST PSUM PTAB=RESULT1 DAM?>LIST PRES PTAB=RESULT1

If ROP data changes go back to CAL TAB

The following LQ:s can be found in DB7 (these can be used also in connection with Reg 25-1 calculation):

LQ*PRES*PROBA

LQ PRES, CASE(F=19), PFAC(P), VFAC(V), SFAC(S), WCOEF(W), R(W*P*V*S, F=12.5)/'wcoef*pfac*vfac*sfac', (INIT), (WCOEF)

TOO PRES, HD=(UL, S, UL, -, UL), GROUP=INIT, SUBT, TOT

LQ*PRES*PROBB

LQ PRES, CASE(DAMAGES, F=19), R(W*P*V*S, F=12.5)/'wcoef*pfac*vfac*sfac', (SFAC), (PFAC), (VFAC), (NZONE), (WCOEF)

TOO PRES, HD=(UL, S, U, UL, -, UL), GROUP=NZONE, SUBT=ONLY, TOT, SBTXT='%NZONE_-ZONE DAMAGES', STXT='A-INDEX TOTAL'

12.7.4 Note regarding LIST PRES

The quantities to be listed with the LIST PRES command are defined with the LQ PRES command. The available quantitiescan be listed with the LQ PRES ALT L command. A more detailed explanation of the quantities is shown with thecommand !EXP Q.quantity.

In the LIST PRES command some of the available quantities are calculated instantly every time the LIST PRES commandis given and some quantities are collected directly from the PTAB-table.

In the PTAB-table there is no up to date check and the contents of the table is based on the arguments and cases whichwere valid at the time of the calculation and creation of the table. On the other hand, the instantly calculated quantities areaffected by all changes in the arguments, including initial conditions and damages done after the creation of the PTAB-table.

Below is a list of those quantities which are collected directly from the PTAB-table without any calculation.

■ AFAC : factor a■ DAM : damage case■ HMAX : maximum vertical extent of damage■ HSD : height of downward horizontal subdivision■ HSU : height of upward horizontal subdivision■ HSU1 : height of upward horizontal subdivision next downward■ IB : index of longitudinal subdivision


165 (272)


■ IHD : index of downward horizontal subdivision■ IHU : index of upward horizontal subdivision■ INIT : initial condition■ MB : mean distance b of the longit. subdivision■ MB1 : mean distance b of the longit. subdivision next outward of IB■ NB : number of longitudinal subdivisions■ NH : number of horizontal subdivisions■ NR : number■ NZONE : number of zones■ P12 : p(l1+l2)■ P123 : p(l1+l2+l3)■ P2 : p(l2)■ P23 : p(l2+l3)■ PFAC : factor p■ R12 : r(l1+l2,b2)-r(l1+l2, b1)■ R123 : r(l1+l2+l3,b2)-r(l1 +l2+l3,b1)■ R2 : r(l2,b2)-r(l2,b1)■ R23 : r(l2+l3,b2)-r(l2+l3, b1)■ SFAC : s factor■ SFACCGM : factor s for changed GM■ SIDE : side of ship SB/PS■ SUBD : name of subdivision■ T : draught, moulded■ VFAC : factor v■ WCOEF : weight coefficient■ X1 : x1 of the damage■ X2 : x2 of the damage■ ZONE : name(s) of zone(s)

In the LQ PRES quantity selection there are a number of s-factors to choose from. The quantity SFAC lists the resultdirectly from the PTAB-table according to the rules used in the creation of the PTAB-table. The SFAC quantity is therebynot calculated at every listing.

The following s-factors are however calculated instantly to every listing according to the current arguments and theequation mentioned in the quantity explanatory text.

■ SFACC : s factor SOLAS II-1,B-1,25-1■ SFACSOL : s factor by SOLAS II-1■ SSFAC : s factor (MSC/Circ.574)

In contradiction to the SFAC quantity, these quantities are calculated instantly to every listing according to the currentarguments and settings, without using the PTAB-table. The SFAC and the s-factor quantities SFACC, SFACSOL orSSFAC can therefore be used to check, whether the PTAB-table is up to date or not. The PTAB-table is up to date, whenthe SFAC-value is equal to SFACC, SFACSOL or SSFAC, depending on which rule was used in the creation of thePTAB-table.


166 (272)


13 Cross flooding

13.1 Cross flooding subsystem

The damage analysis task offers an opportunity to calculate cross flooding pipes according to the IMO Resolution A.266.Calculation of cross flooding pipes is carried out in a part of damage analysis entered by the command

CROSS init/damage;

and returning to the main level of DA by the command

OK;

The calculation part of cross flooding pipes contains commands and data, partly explained in the regulation text.

Calculation of cross flooding pipes can be done for one calculation case at a time, as can be seen from the parameter 'init/damage' of the command CROSS. The cases for which the cross flooding time is needed, must first be calculated by thenormal CALCULATE-command, the CROSS-task uses only precalculated results. Calculation of the cross flooding timeor pipe diameter, is possible provided that the damage case contains at least two stages and that the rooms, connected bythe pipe, start to flood in different stages. The first stage is considered to be the situation before flooding, and the laststage is the situation after cross flooding.

The task CROSS offers subtasks for

■ definition of cross flooding arrangements,■ calculation of complete or partial equalization time,■ calculation of the pipe diameter when the equalization time is given■ administration concerning cross flooding pipes.

13.1.1 Definition of cross flooding arrangements

The command

PIPE name;

defines the cross flooding pipe by which the ship is equalized. The command references to an existing pipe or startsdefinition of a new one. The pipe definition commands and data are:

HD1 room1,x,y,z; HD2 room2 x,y,z;

This command pair defines the heads of the pipe. The end points (x,y,z) mustlocate in the given rooms and room1 and room2 must start to flood in differentstages of the damage case.

LENGTH l; length of the pipe between the heads.

DIAMETER d; diameter of the pipe. This data item is optional if the diameter of the pipe is to becalculated instead of eq. time.

KSUM k; Sum of k's excluding the pipe friction 0.02*l/D.

EDIT; Edit pipe in input format.

DES; List pipe in input format.

SKIP; Cancel definition.

OK; End of definition.

13.1.2 Calculate equalization time or diameter of the pipe

EQTIME alt;


167 (272)


calculates the time required to equalize the ship. Equalization is carried out by allowing water to run between the roomsconnected by the cross flooding pipe. The parameter 'alt' has three alternatives:

FULL : calculate time for complete cross flooding,

MARGIN : calculate time to bring the ship from the angle of margin line immersion to theupright. The angle of margin line immersion must not exceed the equilibriumheeling angle before equalization.

angle : calculate time to bring the ship from the given heeling to the upright. The givenangle must not exceed the equilibrium heeling angle before equalization.

RDIAM alt time;

calculates the required diameter of the cross flooding pipe which makes the ship to be equalized in the given time. Theparameter 'alt' is same as that of the command EQTIME and 'time' is equalization time in seconds.

13.1.3 Catalog cross flooding pipes

CAT;

makes list of stored cross flooding pipes.

13.2 Renewed cross flooding

In addition to the subtask CROSS, cross-flooding time may be calculated also elsewhere in NAPA. Calculation output isavailable in LIST DRES and LIST PRES (quantity CROSSTM).

It is assumed that cross-flooding occurs in the last stage of the damage, i.e. calculation is based on data from the lastand previous stage. The cross flooding calculation includes also the possibility to calculate an intermediate stage at anygiven time. This is applied in the CAL and CAL TAB command by using the CROSS option. In the Revised Ch.II-1 ofSOLAS74, the time is set to 600s. This means that an additional stage CROSS600s will be calculated if the cross floodingtime exceeds 600s, in other words, the program calculates the stage at full equalization (stage CROSS) and at 600s. Thecross flooding time is calculated according to Resolution A.266(VIII). The smallest s-value will be chosen to representthe factor s for the entire case.

Cross-flooding may take place through many pipes. Cross-flooding time through every single pipe is calculated accordingto resolution A.266(VIII). If one pair of compartments is connected by several pipes, time of that pair is calculated usingequation 1/time = 1/t1+1/t2+..., where t1, t2,... are times of single pipes. If there are many pairs of compartments, thecross-flooding time is the maximum of times of all pairs.

Definition of the cross-flooding arrangement will be done in the compartment connection table (argument CCONN). Theinlet is situated in the room of column CONN and outlet in the room of column COMP. If the connection may be openin both directions, two rows are needed to define it. Column OPEN defines open/closed state of the connection, Y/N.Column STAGE gives the name of stage where cross-flooding time will be calculated. Cross-flooding pipes are openingsand their names are specified in column OPENING. The underlying example shows a part of compartment connectiontable defining a cross-flooding arrangement.

CONN COMP OPEN STAGE OPENING -------------------------------------------- R40 R41 Y CROSS R40-R41 R41 R40 Y CROSS R40-R41 R42 R43 Y CROSS R42-R43.1 R43 R42 Y CROSS R42-R43.1 R42 R43 Y CROSS R42-R43.2 R43 R42 Y CROSS R42-R43.2


168 (272)


Rooms R40 and R41 are connected in both directions by cross-flooding pipe R40-R41. Rooms R42 and R43 are connectedin both directions by two pipes R42-R43.1 and R42-R43.2. If rooms R40 and R42 are damaged and t1, t2 and t3 are cross-flooding times through pipes R40-R41, R42-R43.1 and R42-R43.2, the total cross-flooding time is

time = max(t1,1/(1/t2+1/t3))

Because cross-flooding pipes are openings, openings have new definition data. Positions of inlet and outlet are definedby adding another point to the position definition:

POS (x1,y1,z1) (x2,y2,z2)

in command based definition, or

ID REFX REFY REFX ... name x1 y1 z1 ... name#2 x2 y2 z2 ...

in table based definition (see...). The inlet and outlet should be clearly inside (abt. 1 cm) the rooms the pipe isconnecting. Length of the pipe is the distance between the inlet and outlet unless some other value defined by columnor command L. Area of the pipe is given by column or command AREA or DIAM. Column or command KSUMshould be used for calculation of the dimensionless factor of reduction of speed F (see 'RECOMMENDATION ONA STANDARD METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS FOR CROSS-FLOODING ARRANGEMENTS IN PASSENGER SHIPS', A.266). Sum of k's must not contain the pipe friction 0.02*l/D. Example:

OPEN, R42-R43 POS, (55, 7.4, 2), (55, -7.4, 2) TYP, UNPR CON, R42, R43 OTYP, CROSS.FLD.PIPE LEN, 21.2 KSUM, 0.8 DIA, 0.4 OK

14 Floodable LengthsThe Floodable Lengths task calculates the maximum length of a compartment as a function of x, which filled with waterstill keeps the margin line dry. The task is entered from the main Task Level with the command FL.

14.1 Data summary

The command hierarchy of the floodable length calculation task is presented in the following figure.

With the aid of the hierarchy different functions can be grouped into sensible entireties which makes the structure of thetask clearer. However, all other functions than those of the definition can be activated directly from the main level orparallel sublevels.

A prompt at the beginning of each line discloses the current level.


169 (272)


14.2 Commands at main level

ADMIN -> administration functions

The administration includes functions for listing, deleting and copying data. The command whichstarts these functions can be single one or it can be followed by a data record.

ADMIN

O

ADMIN, data

ARGUMENT -> argument handling

The argument handling functions define the calculation arguments to be used in one calculation.So they are valid only during one run or until a new definition overrides the preceding one. Allarguments have default values and so they are not necessary to be defined. The command whichactivates these functions can be a single one or it can be followed by a data record.

ARGUMENT

O

ARGUMENT, data

CALCULATE calculation and output

The calculation is started with CALCULATE-command. After the calculation the outputdocuments are automatically produced.

CALCULATE

DEFINE -> definition functions

The definition functions are available after entering DEFINE-command. The command can be asingle one or it can be followed by a data record.

DEFINE

O


170 (272)


DEFINE, data

14.3 Definition commands

The definition functions are available after entering the DEFINE-command. The command can be a single one or it canbe followed by a data record.

DEFINE

DEFINE, data

14.3.1 Definition of margin line

MARGIN -> define margin line

The command starts definition of margin line.

MARGIN, name, text

O

name: name of the margin line definition,

text: descriptive text of the definition (optional).

O

MARGIN, name/def, text

O

As previously but the definition will be a default definition for calculation.

The definition commands are presented below.

CURVE Use GM-curve as margin line

A curve defined in GM with a given name is referenced and used as a margin line.

CURVE name;

Use the curve as margin line as such.

CURVE name/(x1,x2,...);

Take the margin line points from the curve at x1, x2, ...

INTERVAL Definition interval

INTERVAL x1,x2;

Define interval. If there is no record of this kind, the margin line is supposed to consist of one part.The combination -,x2 means "from the after end of the ship to x2" and x1,+ "from x1 to the foreend of the ship".

X1,X2 : aft and fore end of the interval resp.

OK End of definition

End of definition.


171 (272)


POLYGON Curve shape polygon

The margin line or part of it is defined by giving explicitly its polygon points.

POLYGON (X1,Y1,Z1),(X2,Y2,Z2),...;

SKIP Cancel definition

Cancel definition.

14.3.2 Definition of subdivision

SUBDIV -> define subdivision

The command starts definition of subdivision.

SUBDIV, name, text

O

NAME: name of the subdivision definition,

TEXT: descriptive text of the definition (optional).

O

SUBDIV, name/DEF, text

O

As previously but the definition will be a default definition for calculation

The definition commands are presented below.

BULKHEAD definition of subdivision as a list of bulkheads

The command defines subdivision as a list of bulkhead positions.

BULKHEAD, x1,x2,...

O

X: x-coordinate of transverse bulkhead. The coordinates must be in ascending order, i.e. from stermto bow.

COMP compartment number of subdivision

The command defines the compartment number of the subdivision.

COMP, i

O

i: compartment number (must be between 1-3, default is 2)

LIST list definition

The command lists the current definition.

LIST


172 (272)


SKIP skip definition

The command deletes the definition and returns control to upper function.

SKIP

OK end task

The command terminates current function and returns control to upper level.

OK

14.4 Calculation arguments

HULL read hull for calculation

The default name for an object to be used in calculation is the name defined for stability hull in thereference system. By using HULL-command also other objects can be calculated.

HULL, name

O

name: name of the hull.

MARGIN read margin line for calculation

The margin line defined to be the default one is automatically included in calculation. Calculationwith other margins can be performed by using MARGIN-command.

MARGIN, name

O

name: name of the margin line.

SUBDIVISION read subdivision for output

The subdivision defined to be the default one is automatically drawn to the output drawings. Ifsome other subdivision is wanted to be used the name of it can be entered with SUBDIVISION-command.

SUBDIVISION, name

O

name: name of the subdivision.

DELETE delete data

With this command selected data definitions can be deleted from data base.

DELETE, ident, name, name,...

O

ident: identifier which selects the data to be deleted:

MARGIN: delete margin lines,


173 (272)


SUBDIV: delete subdivisions,

name: name of the definition to be deleted.

TRIM read calculation trims

Initial trims to be calculated are entered with TRIM-command.

TRIM, tr, tr,...

O

tr: trim.

O

TRIM, (trmin,trmax,step)

O

trmin: lower limit for trims,

trmax: upper limit for trims,

step: step for trims between limits.

O

If trim is not given 0 is used.

PERM read permeabilities

The command reads permeabilities to be used in calculation.

PERM, p, p,...

O

p: permeability.

O

PERM, (pmin,pmax,step)

O

pmin: lower limit for permeabilities,

pmax: upper limit for permeabilities,

step: step for permeabilities between limits.

O

If permeability is not given 1 is used.

VCG read vertical center of gravity

The vertical center of gravity is entered with VCG-command.

VCG, vcg

O


174 (272)


vcg: vertical center of gravity.

O

If vcg is not given 0.9*KM is used.

STEP read step of X-coordinates

The interval of X-coordinates on which the floodable length is is calculated can be entered withSTEP-command.

STEP, step

O

step: calculation step.

O

If step is not given LREF/20 is used.

TOLERANCE read tolerance of calculation

The relative tolerance of iteration of equilibrium can be entered with TOLERANCE-command.

TOLERANCE, tol

O

tol: tolerance.

O

If tolerance is not given 0.005 is used.

OK end task


OK

14.5 Calculation and output functions

The calculation is started with CALCULATE-command. After the calculation the output documents are automaticallyproduced.

14.6 Administration functions

The administration includes functions for listing, deleting and copying data. The command which starts these functionscan be single one or it can be followed by a data record.

ADMIN ADMIN, data

LIST list data

With this command a list of data definitions selected with a data type identifier is produced.

LIST, ident, spec


175 (272)


O

ident: identifier which selects the data to be listed:

MARGIN: list margin lines,

SUBDIV: list subdivisions,

spec: specifier which specifies the data selected by ident:

empty: list names of all definitions selected,

ALL: list all definitions selected,

name: list definition with given name.

O

Some data types can be listed without specifying the selected data.

O

LIST, ident

O

ident: same as above,

ARG: list arguments to be used in calculation.

DELETE delete data

With this command selected data definitions can be deleted from data base.

DELETE, ident, name, name,...

O

ident: identifier which selects the data to be deleted:

MARGIN: delete margin lines,

SUBDIV: delete subdivisions,

name: name of the definition to be deleted.

COPY copy data

With this command selected data definitions can be copied from other versions or projects tocurrent version and project.

COPY, ident, name/vers/proj, name/vers/proj,...

O

ident: identifier which selects the data to be copied:

MARGIN: copy margin lines,

SUBDIV: copy subdivisions,

name: name of the definition to be copied,

vers: version from which to copy,


176 (272)


proj: project from which to copy (optional).

OK end task


OK

14.7 Examples

Example of typical calculation

TASK?>FL FL?>!GR F FL?>T (5,7,0.5) FL?>TR -0.5,1,0.2 FL?>PERM (0.7,0.9,0.05) FL?>CALCULATE FL?>*END

15 Subdivision indices acc. to USSR Register of ShippingThe data for this task is queried from the user in the order they are needed. The meaning of the data items and their symbolsis explained in the chapter Probability estimation of subdivision in the rules for the Classification and Constructionof Sea-going Ships.

15.1 Process

The task proceeds as follows:

HULL> hull nameKG=> vertical center of gravity of the shipMARGIN LINE> name of the margin lineLIST HEADER> text used in the header of the result list. 1 = passenger ship, 2 = cargo ship (ULA), 3 = dry cargo ship, 4 = tanker, 5.1= fishing vessel with ref. holds, 5.2= fishing vessel with non ref. holds, 5.5= factory ship or mother ship, 5.6= factory freezer, 5.7= transport freezer, 6 = tug, salvage ship or lightship, 7 = icebreaker, 8 = ro-ro ship (rule 1.1.3).

NUMBER OF PERSONS N1,N2> n1, n2SUBDIV. LENGTH LS,MEAN BREADTH,SPEED> L ,B ,v


177 (272)


DEADWEIGHT,DW ON DEPARTURE,DISP AT DS,DEPTH,DRAUGHT>DW,DW , ,D,dMAX NUMBER OF ADJACENT COMPARTMENTS> the ship must bear the the damages of 1...4 compartmentsDEFINE COMPARTMENTATION: FOUR COORDINATES FOR EACH COMPARTMENT X1,X2 : X-VALUES FOR BULKHEADS NEAREST EACH OTHER X3,X4 : REDUCED X-COORDINATESSEND OK WHEN ALL COMP. ARE DEFINEDX1,X2,X3,X4> limits of compartment, see rules . . . X1,X2,X3,X4>OK . . . COMPARTMENT 1 ROOMS IN THE COMPARTMENT> names of the rooms GIVE CARGO SPACE CODE /PERMEABILITY FOR EACH ROOM CODE: 1=CARGO SPACE, 0=OTHER > code,code,... . . . C-VALUES OF 1-COMP. DAMAGES> c,c,c,... C-VALUES OF 2-COMP. DAMAGES> c,c,c,... (if any) C-VALUES OF 3-COMP. DAMAGES> c,c,c,... (if any) C-VALUES OF 4-COMP. DAMAGES> c,c,c,... (if any) CALC.METHOD: 0=NO LONGIT.BLKHD,1=WING COMP.DAMAGED,2=WING&INNER COMP. DEFINE WING COMPARTMENT. SEND OK WHEN READY COMP.NUMBER, MEAN DISTANCE TO SHELL, CS>comp.number,b ,cs . . . COMP.NUMBER, MEAN DISTANCE TO SHELL, CS>OK

Every run of the task generates a data element SDIDATA. This element contains answers to queries and it can be used asan input data element in other runs of SDI. If you want to keep some data safe, rename the element and save it in the database, because the next run overwrites the previous element with the same name.

16 Flooding Simulation in NAPAFlooding simulation consists of three tasks:

■ modeling rooms and openings (pre-processing)■ calculation■ analysis of the results (post-processing)

There is also a separate Flooding Simulation Manager for easier handling of the whole process. The following figure showsthe whole flooding simulation process, starting from the modeling and ending in the checking and analysis of the results.

../managers/FloodingSimu/index.html#mgrfldsim


178 (272)


16.1 Arguments in the DAM task

The following arguments should be defined:

HULL DAMHULL ;** hull name


179 (272)


ARRV A ;** arrangement versionOPARR OPENINGS ;** opening arrangementCCONN CONNECTIONS ;** compartment connections

■ OPARR is an opening arrangement table. It has to be named only if openings are defined in a table.■ CCONN is a compartment connection table. It has to be defined every time in flooding simulations.■ ROP (relevant openings) have to be defined only if the openings are plotted. It has no influence on the calculations.

16.2 Opening definition

16.2.1 General

The simplest way to define an opening for flooding simulation is a point with given area and other properties. Theexplanations for the definitions are listed below:

OPEN name of the opening, for example: FS-SEA-T121

TYP type of the opening (UNPROTECTED)

POS position (X, Y, Z coordinates) of the opening (point)

GEOMOBJ geometry of the opening: the command defines geometry of the opening andit overrules data given by the commands AREA (unless the opening is a pipe)and POS. Geometry may be a point object, a 3d curve, a surface object or anintersection of a surface or room with a plane.

CONN rooms that are connected by the opening

WRCOEF discharge coefficients, can be defined with two values: WRCOEF[1] is used when the jet discharges into air (default 1.0) WRCOEF[2] is used when the jet discharges into water (default 1.0)

ARCOEF discharge coefficient for airflow (default 1.0)

AREA [m2]

HLEAK pressure height that causes the opening to leak (can be given for both directions)

HCOLL

water pressure height that causes the opening to collapse (can be given for bothdirections)

ARATIO ratio of the leaking area compared to the total opening area

OTYPE opening type (e.g. pipe), this is not needed for opening points

TSPAN time span for closing/opening. The first value is the time after the start ofsimulation (sec) when the closing/opening starts and the second is the actual timespan (sec) that it takes to close/open the opening. The opening is closed if theconnection is defined to be initially open in the compartment connection table andvice versa.

If WRCOEF and ARCOEF values are not given, a default value 1.0 will be used instead. Note that KSUM is not usedin flooding simulation.

If HLEAK and HCOLL are not given, a dummy value 9999 m will be used in order to prevent unwanted collapsingof closed openings. Default ARATIO is 0 (1 before Release 2009.1). Using opening table will reset also HLEAK andHCOLL as 0 as default.

Examples:

OPEN, R070009-PS-SB1, channel


180 (272)


POS, (112.62, 0, 0.5)TYP, UNPROTECTEDCONN, R070009-SB, R070009-PSAREA, 0.6525WRCOEF, 0.6HCOLL, 0HLEAK, 0OK

OPENING PIPE ‘air pipe to R1001S’GEOMOBJ PIPECURVECONN R1001S,SEAAREA 0.2ARCOEF 0.6OTYPE PIPEOK

OPENING DOOR ‘A-class fire door’GEOMOBJ CORRIDOR/X=#45CONN R1,R2WRCOEF 0.6HCOLL 4.0HLEAK 0.0ARATIO 0.05OK

Openings can also be defined in the opening table. This way it is easier to do modifications in the openings. Note that asecond row is needed for pipes and “opening lines” in order to define the co-ordinates of the other end of the pipe/line.

The normal model table used for openings does not contain all needed columns and for simulation purpose theOPE*SIMMODEL model table is recommended instead.


181 (272)


16.2.2 Pipes

Pipes can be defined in the following way:

OPEN, CROSS-PIPECONN, R070009-PS, R070009-SBPOS, (100, -20, 1), (100, 20, 1)WRCOEF, 0.7AREA, 0.1OTYPE, PIPEOK

The WRCOEF value for a pipe can be calculated in the same way as the flow reduction coefficient “F” in the IMOResolution MSC.245(83), i.e. the "revised A.266".

POS defines the co-ordinates for the inlet and outlet of the pipe. The opening type must be specified, i.e. OTYP PIPE, orotherwise the opening is treated as a line and this will cause false results and likely problems with the simulation.

In flooding simulation the pipe must always have a length.


182 (272)


16.2.3 Opening lines

It is possible to define large openings as lines so that the given area is divided to a line that connects the given points. Thewidth of the “line” is taken as constant. The water flow through this kind of opening is calculated by integrating over theline, thus giving more accurate results than with a “point” opening. This definition is recommended e.g. for doors.

Note: co-ordinates for both end points of the line must be given.

Definition is similar to the pipes, but now OTYPE LINE should be used for clarification.

If the opening is defined as a geometric object (GEOMOBJ), a representative "opening line" is automaticall created forcalculation. For visualization and checks the service function DA.SIMOPENING() can be used to create a correspondingcurve.

16.2.4 Changing the opening status during flooding

It is possible to define a closing time for an opening. This is applicable only if the opening is defined to be initially open inthe compartment connection table. If the opening is initially closed the opening status is changed to open at the given time.

The time is given with the command TSPAN T TSP, where T is the time after the start of the simulation when the closingis started and TSP is the time span that it takes to close the opening. Both values are given in seconds.

If openings are given in a table, two additional columns TIME and TSPAN are needed. TIME is a string (e.g. 3M or 180S)and TSPAN is given in seconds.

16.3 Air flow simulations

Air flows can be simulated in a similar manner than water flows. Air is considered as compressible perfect gas with adensity of 1.293 kg/m3 in the atmospheric pressure of 101.325 kPa.

Air pipes can be modeled as shown below. Note also that discharge coefficient for air is ARCOEF, and it should be givenwhen airflow through the opening is possible (i.e. at least one of the rooms in the connection is not “fully vented”).

OPEN, AIRPIPE-PSCONN, R070009-PS, SEAPOS, (121, 22, 7), (121 22, 27)ARCOEF, 0.5AREA, 0.1OTYPE, PIPEOK

"SEA" is used to represent also the atmosphere above the sea level outside the ship.

Also a VENTSTATE column must be added to the arrangement table. Use following values:

■ VENTSTATE = -1, in rooms where air compression is possible■ VENTSTATE = 1, in all other rooms where, these are assumed to be ”fully vented”■ VENTSTATE = 0 (default), i.e. not defined, a full ventilation is assumed

Very small rooms (e.g. in a cross-duct) should always be modeled as “fully vented” since very small air pockets do nothave significant effect on the flooding process but may rarely cause some convergence problems with simulation routine.

16.4 Compartment Connection table

Compartment connection table defines the rooms that are connected by different openings.


183 (272)


■ Definitions in both directions■ two rows are needed for a two-way connection

■ Column OPEN defines if the opening is open in the initial damage stage (Y/N).■ Remember to define the compartment connection table in the arguments of the DAM task■ Service function DA.CONNCHECK(opens,cconn,hull,resarr,exparr,tol,'SIM') should be used

to check that the given openings and compartment connections are properly defined (FLOODING_SIMULATIONmanager application does this automatically)

An example of the compartment connection table is shown below:

The FLOODING_SIMULATION manager application can create the compartment connection table automatically fromthe given opening table.

16.5 Damage definition

The damage can be defined with two different methods:

■ defined rooms are flooded and open to sea, progressive flooding through internal openings is calculated in timedomain

■ damage holes are modeled as openings; simulation starts from the intact condition

Example:

DAM name

...possible damage case in the start of the simulation...

PHA, TSTEP=0.5SOK

The damage openings can be modeled in the same way as the other openings, or some rooms can be considered as “opento sea” and listed in the damage definition. In the latter case, the damaged rooms are flooded when the simulation starts.


184 (272)


16.5.1 Time step

■ Recommended time step is usually about: 0.1s ... 2s, depending on the flooding case■ For the cases with fast flooding (and/or air compression) a time step between 0.1s ... 0.5s is recommended. Longer

time steps can be used for fully vented rooms with slow flooding.■ If the time step is too short the calculation time can be very long. If the time step is too large, there might be

problems with calculations. Results may be inaccurate or the equations can not be solved■ Suitable time step can be found by doing simulations with different time steps and plotting the results into the same

graph. For example, simulation is calculated with time steps 0.25s, 0.5s and 1s. If there is no notable differencebetween these results, it is recommended to use the longest time step.

■ Plotting the results is also useful, because it may indicate if too long time step was used. For example, if there issome unexplained steps in the curve, etc.

■ When a suitable time step is sought, a shorter maximum time (MAXT) can be used. For example run the simulationonly for the first 60 seconds. This saves time and the differences influenced by too long time step can still be foundout.

A simple way to use variable time step (.e.g. a shorter time step in the beginning) is to define several stages:

DAM DAMVSTEPSTA, 1 PHA, TSTEP=0.2S MAXT=2MSTA, 2 PHA, TSTEP=0.5S MAXT=28MOK

16.6 Calculation

Calculation is started with the following command:

CAL INI/DAM SIM EQL MAXT=10m

With the following options:

■ EQL is an option that makes the simulation solve the equilibrium for every phase, but does not calculate all theparameters, such as GZ curve, for every phase.■ This decreases the calculation time and hence it is recommended to use this option when the GZ curve or similar

results are not needed.■ Note that GZ curve is needed for the evaluation of the s-factor

■ MAXT=… sets the maximum simulation time. It is recommended that some value is given in order to avoid never-ending simulations (default is 1 hour)

■ FINTIME=... start time of the final stage. S-factor for SOLASII-1 will be calculated acc. to formulas of the finalstage after the given time limit (in seconds). Applicable only if GZ curve is calculated (not with the EQL option)

It is highly recommended that an increased tolerance (e.g. !INTOL 0.0001) is used for the simulations in order to improvethe convergence of the iteration and to get smooth curve also for the history of the heel angle.

The following options can also be useful for storing the results of the simulation:

■ RTAB=… write the results into a given table■ SINT=n write only the results from every n:th time step to the RTAB-table

Further options are available for advanced users:

■ WSPECT=... defines a table with wave spectrum data for repeating a previously generated wave realization (see !EXP DA.WSPECTRUM)


185 (272)


■ CCR=… defines the convergence criterion [mm], the default value is 0.1 mm. Smaller values are recommendedfor very slow progressive flooding or very small compartments. A larger value (up to 0.5?) can be used if only fastflooding of relatively large rooms are simulated.

■ RLX=… sets the applied under-relaxation coefficient, default is 0.5. Values between 0.01 and 0.95 can be used.The smaller value results in slower computation time but it may improve the convergence for problematic cases. Alarger value can sometimes be applied in order to decrease the computation time but there is a risk that the iterationwill not converge.

■ MXIT=… sets the maximum number of iteration rounds, default is 10 000, which should be enough for all cases.■ CPC allows solution of fully coupled pressure correction equations. This is likely to improve the convergence in

a case, where air compression and airflows are significant. But it also increases the computation time. This optionshould be used when most of the rooms in the model are not fully vented.

Examples:

CAL INI/DAM SIM EQL MAXT=10m CCR=0.05 RLX=0.4 MXIT=5000

CAL INI/DAM SIM MAXT=10m FINTIME=0 RTAB=results SINT=5

16.7 Dynamic roll motion■ It is possible to solve dynamic roll motion by replacing the SIM with DSIM in the calculation command:

■ CAL INI/DAM DSIM MAXT=3m DYNPAR=dynsimpar

■ Other degrees-of-freedom (trim and draft) are quasi-stationary■ Note that GZ curve (and s-factor) cannot be solved with dynamic roll motion■ The option DYNPAR=… can be used to give additional input data

■ if this is not given, rough estimates will be used instead■ it is highly recommended that the natural roll period (TPHI) and critical damping ratio (RLD) are given in this

table

An example of the DYNPAR-table is given below with explanations. for simulation, only the columns ID and COEF(quantities) are necessary. The column NOTE can be used for additional information or explanation.

The recognized parameters are:


186 (272)


■ TPHI/TROLL: natural roll period [sec], on the basis of model tests, seakeeping calculations, etc. This should alwaysbe given in order to achieve realistic results. If this is not given (TPHI=0), the natural roll period is estimated on thebasis of the parameters ADROL and KXX.

■ ADROL: added mass ratio, relative to the mass (or inertia) of the ship. If TPHI is given, this is used to take intoaccount the increased added mass due to the floodwater. Default value is 0.15.

■ RLD: critical damping ratio (typically between 0.02 and 0.2 for conventional ships). Only linear damping is takeninto account. Default is 0.03, but a specific value should always be given, e.g. on the basis of roll decaying test.

■ KXX: radius of inertia per beam of the ship (default value is 0.3). If TPHI is given, this is not used at all.■ FWDAMP: (0.0 or 1.0) defines whether additional damping due to the flooding is taken into account (1.0=default)

or not (0.0).

Usually a little shorter time step is needed for the calculation of dynamic roll motion. The maximum allowed step is 5seconds, but it is highly recommended to use a time step that is shorter than TPHI/20.

16.8 Waves

16.8.1 Definitions

Since Release 2009.1 it is possible to take into account the effect of waves in the calculation of the inflow of water fromthe sea (or from the rooms that are open to sea). This is done by correcting the effective pressure head of the sea levelwith the time dependent wave amplitude.

As a default, in irregular seas each simulation creates a unique wave realization on the basis of the given wave spectrum.Thus different runs with the same parameters give at least slightly different results.

The definition of the waves is given in a table with the DYNPAR option. The parameters are:

■ SPECTRUM: applied wave spectrum type■ 0 = sinusoidal waves■ 1 = JONSWAP■ 2 = ITTC (two parameter) spectrum

■ HWAVE: significant wave height (m)■ TWAVE: wave period (sec), must be at least 8-times longer than the applied time step■ WAVEDIR: (optional) wave direction, 90.0 or -90.0 deg. The wave comes from the port side if angle is positive

and the orientation is left handed or angle is negative and the orientation is right handed. Otherwise the wave comesfrom the starboard side. Value 0.0 (default) means that wave profile is not used in drawing.

The calculation is based on the assumption of zero ship speed and beam seas. The wave forces are not included in thecalculation of the ship motions (floating position). The wave direction (WAVEDIR) does not affect the calculation but itwill be used with the command DRW FLOAT for drawing the wave profile unless a zero angle is given (default).

If simulation is carried out with the waves (HWAVE>0) the wave profile will be drawn instead of the still water levelwith DRW FLOAT command. It is important to give the right direction of the waves (WAVEDIR) in the DYNPAR tablein order get realistic wave profiles for the flooding case.

The waves are used only for the calculation of water inflow/outflow, not in the hydrostatic calculation.


187 (272)


Wave profile as a boundary condition for flooding simulation

Wave effects can also be combined with the simulation of dynamic roll motion (DSIM), in which case the parameters ofship dynamics are also given in the same table.

The allowed wave height and period are limited on the basis of the reference dimensions due to the applied simplifications.In practice, this means that:

■ HWAVE maximum is MIN(4.0m ; 0.5*ZDWL)■ Maximum wave length LWAVE=9.81*TWAVE**2/(2.0*PI) is 1.5*LREF■ The minimum wave period is 1.0 sec

16.8.2 Wave spectrum / post-processing

After a flooding simulation in waves, the applied wave spectrum can be stored in a table with the service functionDA.WSPECTRUM. The spectrum can then be plotted e.g. in the DIAG task, using the columns WFREQ and WSPECT.Note that the the values in the columns WAMPLC and WPHASE, generated with the option ’ALL’ are random numbersthat are used to repeat exactly the same wave realization in another simulation.

The time history of the wave amplitude (used in the pressure head of the sea level) can be listed with LIS DRES by addingWAMPL in the LQ settings. Plotting can be done by PLD TRES with PQ TRES ETIME WAMPL.

It may be useful to repeat a previous simulation case with exactly the same wave realization, e.g. for confirming the resultsor in order to compare different designs. First, the wave spectrum from the previously performed simulation must be storedas a table with the service function DA.WSPECTRUM, using the additional option ALL (see !EXP DA.WSPECTRUMfor details). This wave spectrum table is then taken into use in new simulation with the option WSPECT in the calculationcommand:

CAL INI/DAM SIM MAXT=10m DYNPAR=dyntable WSPECT=wavetable

Note that the if also DYNPAR table is given, the all wave parameters are based on the WSPECT table and the wavedefinitions in DYNPAR table are ignored. However, ship related parameters are used normally.

16.9 Simulation time

Simulation will last as long as it takes to find the equilibrium or until the maximum calculation time (MAXT) is reached.Too long calculation times should not be used because the water levels may start to oscillate between two rooms. Thisoscillation can be just few millimeters and the simulation is still continued.

Simulation is stopped if the ship capsizes or if there is no notable difference between the time steps for 30 s. Dynamicsimulation (DSIM) can be continued after the flooding has stopped, especially if the roll damping is small.

When the simulation ends, a notice containing the reason (e.g. capsize of maximum time) is shown in the command log.If the simulation is interrupted due to erroneous input data or a convergence problem, an error message is shown instead.


188 (272)


16.10 Checking the simulation results

The simulation results should checked carefully. The manager application offers handy tools for this purpose.

16.10.1 Visualization

Different phases (time steps) should be drawn in a suitable setup to check the progress sequence of flooding, using thecommand:

DRW FLO INI/DAM PHA=...DRW FLO INI/DAM ETIME=...

A simple animation can be done by drawing phases in a loop. In this case a short puase is needed between the drawcommands.

16.10.2 Diagrams and lists

Various diagrams and lists can be used for analysing the results of a flooding simulation.

It is recommended to check that all rooms eventually fill up completely or to the sea level (unless there is an air pocket inthe room). If the equilibrium was not reached, do another simulation with longer simulation time.

Check the volumes of water (LIS DCOM)

Draw curves of the volumes of water and the floating position, check that these are realistic:

POO TRES, ETIME, VOL/ROOMNAMEPLD TRES INI/DAM

Note that the roomname is given as a qualifier in the POO TRES command. Similarly, also flow rate in a specified openingcan be plotted as a function of the elapsed time.

Eption ETIME=t can be used with LIS, DRW and PLD commands. It fetches the combination of STAGE and PHASEthat is closest to the given elapsed time after the start of the simulation.

16.10.3 List of flooding events

When flooding through an opening starts or a new room is flooded, a flooding event is stored in the results. Furthermore,leaking and collapsing of closed openings are recorded in the events. These flooding events can be listed with thecommand:

LIS FEVE INI/DAM

Options OPE=(op1,op2,..) or ROOM=(r1,r2,..) can be used to limit the listing to specified openings or rooms.The option ETIME=t lists only events at the given time after the start of the flooding (elapsed time).

A flooding event is raised e.g. when:

■ a new room is flooded■ flooding through an opening starts or stops■ a closed opening is immersed (but not flooding)■ a closed opening starts to leak or collapses■ open door is closed, or a closed door is opened

16.11 Typical user errors and problem areas

Some typical user errors are listed below:

■ Arguments are defined incorrectly (arrangement, opening arrangement, cconn table)


189 (272)


■ Compartment connection table■ Opening definitions (location of the openings, area is zero, etc.)■ Too long time step for modeling the phenomenon■ If the same initial/damage case is calculated again the results will not change unless either initial or damage case is

updated■ Unrealistic values are used (for example, 500 m2 damage defined to a relatively small room)

Typical problems areas and some hints for solving them are listed below:

■ There might be problems in the simulations if (full) tanks are damaged. However, BW and FW tanks might workbecause these tanks have approximately the same densities.■ The mixing of different liquids are not included at the moment

■ Down-flooding might cause problems, especially if down-flooding opening areas are large. For example, if the rateof in flooded water is 1 m3/s and the rate of water flowing out from the room is 5 m3/s, the equilibrium might notbe found. Usually a shorter time step will help.

■ The water plane area in a flooded room changes fast as a function of the z-coordinate.■ This may cause notable error in the results if the applied time step is long.

■ Arrangement should not have IPERM column, because NAPA Flooding Simulation can not deal with these, yet.■ Simulations in NAPA are done with a quasi static assumption. Methods suitability must be checked case by case.

For instance, if there are some unexplained steps in the results curve.■ Dynamic roll motion can be solved (with a simplified approach) by using the calculation option DSIM instead of

SIM■ Also wave induced flooding can be calculated but not the wave induced motions of the ship

■ If there are significant oscillations in the water levels near the final equilibrium condition and air compression isincluded (VENTSTATE=-1), it might be useful to try fully coupled pressure-correction equations by adding theoption CPC to the calculation command. Note that this is not recommended if the number of rooms (int he CCONNtable) is very large.

■ In order to increase the calculation time and to avoid convergence problems, it is highly recommended that verysmall rooms (such as parts of a cross-flooding channel) are modeled as fully vented.

■ If the results are still unconvincing, the suitability of the method for the case must be checked.

16.12 Further reading on the theoretical background

The principles of the simulation method are presented in detail in:

■ Ruponen, P.: Pressure-Correction Method for Simulation of Progressive Flooding and Internal Air Flows,Schiffstechnik – Ship Technology Research, Vol. 53, No. 2 2006, pp. 63-73.

■ Ruponen, P.: Progressive Flooding of a Damaged Passenger Ship, Doctoral Dissertation, Helsinki University ofTechnology, TKK Dissertations 94, 2007.

The validation of the method and a case study on progressive flooding have been presented in:

■ Ruponen, P., Sundell, T., Larmela, M.: Validation of a Simulation Method for Progressive Flooding, Proceedingsof the 9th International Conference on Stability of Ships and Ocean Vehicles, STAB2006, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil,25-29.9.2006, Vol. 2, pp. 607-616.

Some practical examples can be found in:

■ Ruponen, P., Routi, A-L.: Time Domain Simulation of Cross-Flooding for Air Pipe Dimensioning, Proceedings ofthe 9th International Ship Stability Workshop, Hamburg, Germany, 30-31.8.2007.

■ Metsä, A., Ruponen, P. Ridgewell, C., Mustonen, P.: Flooding Simulation as a Practical Design Tool, Proceedingsof the Napa User Meeting 2008 (First presented in COMPIT'08)

■ Metsä, A., Ruponen, P.: Simulation of Accumulation of Water on Deck, COMPIT'2009 (also included in theProceedings of the Napa User Meeting 2009)


190 (272)


A brief summary of the simulation method and validation results is also described in:

■ Ruponen, P.: Simulation Method for Progressive Flooding, Proceedings of the Napa User Meeting 2006

17 DA Commands

17.1 Commands for definition

CGROUP -> Define criterion group

The command enters in a subtask which defines a criterion group.

CGROUP name text

name: name of group. Must not be name of any criterion.

text: descriptive text (optional).

CRITERION -> Define stability criterion

The command enters in a subtask which defines a damage stability criterion. For relevant criteria,see commands RCR and ICR.

CRIT name text

name: name of criterion. Must not be ALL or name of any criterion group.


DAMAGE -> Define damage case

Define the damage case with the given name and store it in the data base.

DAMAGE name text TAB=model WTARR GET=dam

name: name of damage.

text: (option) descriptive text of the damage. Text is used in result lists and plots.

TAB=model: (option) start definition by the help of the table editor. If the part '=model' is missing, the standardmodel table DAM*DEFMODEL is used, otherwise given model table (prefix DAM* assumed) isread from the data base. If the damage will redefined, previous contents of damage is loaded to thetable.

WTARR: (option, only in connection with the option TAB) show all nondamaged compartments from thewatertight arrangement at the end of the definition table. Default: only damaged compartments areshown in the the definition table.

GET=dam: load the given damage to the work area and continue its definition. If the damage name 'dam'begins with prefix 'DAM*',the damage is fetched from table DAM*dam.

DGROUP -> Define named group of damage cases

Define a named group of damage cases. This definition allows referencing to the group of damagecases instead of single cases.


191 (272)


DGROUP name ,text ;

FRBD -> Freeboard deck edge

Define a freeboard deck edge with the given name. The freeboard deck edge is defined by dividingthe length of the ship into one or several parts in the direction of the x-axis and applying onedefining method (polygon or curve) in each interval. There may be several freeboard deck edgessimultaneously defined. The optional text describes the freeboard deck edge in plain text and it isused in the result lists and plots.

FRBD name text

GEN Generate data for damage stability

The command generates data for different purposes.

GEN INI NAME=nn DCH=c AZI=(set) GRO=gname;

The command generates new initial conditions by multiplying the given one and adding to eachnew initial condition an azimuth angle. Names of the generated initial conditions are formed by therule

<name of parent condition><delimiter char.><azimuth angle>

NAME=nn: name of the parent initial condition (must exist)

DCH=c: (optional) delimiter character between the name of the parent condition and azimuth angle. Defaultnone.

AZI=(set): set of azimuth angles in standard NAPA format (deg). Note the brackets!

GRO=gname: (optional) generate initial condition group 'gname' containing all generated initial conditions.

Example:

GEN INI NAME=I1 DCH=* AZI=((0,90,10)) GRO=AZI.0-90

The command generates the initial conditions I1*0, I1*10,... I1*90 having azimuth 0 deg, 10deg, ... 90 deg. The initial condition group AZI.0-90 contains the conditions I1*0, I1*10,... I1*90.

GEN DAM SUB=subd, WTC=clim, SIDE=sd, ADJ=z, PREF=prf, STO=names,

OZD=name, BADV=way, HADV=way, LADV=way, BLIM=l, HLIM=l, LOCK=dam, STAGE=name, ADD=command, ALL, BOX, ACLASS=way, STYPE=(sta=type,sta=type,...) The command generates damages on the basis of the subdivision and the compartment limit table. Running of this command requires that there is a suitable subdivision and a compartment limit table based on the subdivision and the arrangement (see the documents how to define the subdivision and how to create the compartment limit table).

SUB=subd: (opt) name of the table defining the subdivision (without prefix). Default: the one found in thereference system (if any).

WTC=clim: name of the compartment limit table (without prefix). No default.


192 (272)


SIDE=sd: (opt) side of penetration. Alternative P or S. Default P.

ADJ=z: (opt) number of adjacent damaged zones. Default 1. If z is a single number, only damages ofz adjacent zones are generated. If z is of the form n-m, the program generates the damages ofn adjacent zones, the damages of n+1 adjacent zones, ... the damage of m adjacent zones. Forexample, ADJ=2 means 'only damages of two adj. zones' and ADJ=1-3 means 'damages of onezone, two adj. zones and three adj. zones'.

PREF=prf: (opt) beginning of the names of the generated damage cases. Default empty. prf should not exceed8 characters.

STO=name: (opt) name(s) of the table(s) where to store information about the generated cases (without prefix).Default DAM1 for the damages of one zone, DAM2 for the damages of 2 adjacent zones, DAM3for 3 adjacent zones and so on. If only one name is given, information of all generated damagecases is put into that one table. If there are more than one names given, as STO=(name1,name2,...),the option must be interpreted with the option ADJ=n-m; the first name is the storage of damagesof n adj. zones, the second one is the storage of damages of n+1 adj. zones,... and the last one is thestorage of damages of m adj. zones.

OZD=name: (opt) name of the table where one zone damages are stored (without prefix). Default DAM1. Thisoption is needed if the command generates only multiple zone damages.

BADV=way: (option) way how damage advances inward in multiple zone damages. Normally, the logitudinalsubdivisions are penetrated from b to b. This method may cause much damages but all possiblecontribution to A is available. An optional method is to advance in all zones parallel to the firstsubdivision, to the next one and so on, despite are the b-values same or not. The b-value of sucha damage is equal to the smallest b-value of all subdivisions having the same index. Note: it ispossible that all contribution to A is not available generating damages in this way. The alternativesof 'way':

B: advance by different b-values (default).

IND: advance by subdivision indices.

HADV=way: (option) way how damage advances upward in multiple zone damages. Normally, the horizontalsubdivisions are penetrated from h to h. This method may cause much damages but all possiblecontribution to A is available. An optional method is to advance in all zones parallel to the firstsubdivision, to the next one and so on, despite are the h-values same or not. The h-value of sucha damage is equal to the smallest h-value of all subdivisions having the same index. Note: it ispossible that all contribution to A is not available generating damages in this way. The alternativesof 'way':

H: advance by different h-values (default).


LADV=way: (option) way how damage advances downward in multiple zone damages. Normally, thehorizontal subdivisions are penetrated from h to h. This method may cause much damages but allpossible damages of lesser extent are generated. An optional method is to advance in all zonesparallel to the first subdivision, to the next one and so on, despite are the h-values same or not.Note: it is possible that all different damages of lesser extent are not generated in this way. Thealternatives of 'way':

H: advance by different h-values (default).


BLIM=l: (option) penetration limit of damages. Normally, the maximum transversal extent of damagesis from the shell to the center line. This option defines another tranversal maximum extent. Thepenetration limit may be between the shell and the center line, or beyond the center line. This


193 (272)


option is useful, for instance, if one wants to define only the damages outside B/5. The alternativesof 'l':

b: penetration limit is the given b-value (m). The b-value must be found inthe subdivision table and this form may not be used if one wants to use alimit not exixting in the table.

Ii: penetration limit is the i:th longitudinal subdivision.

surf: name of surface. The limit holds in every zone. Another way to definepenetration limit is to add columns PLIMIN and/or SLIMIT to thesubdivision table. By this way the limit may change from zone to zone.

'Y=ycoord': like surf but the surface is plane Y=ycoord.

HLIM=l: (option) limit of vertical extent of damages. Normally, the vertical extent of damages is up tothe maximum height of watertight hull. This option defines a lesser vertical extent beyond ofwhich compartments are not opened. From the point of view of probabilistic damage stability,the damage extending to the limit gets the v-factor 1-v. This option is useful, for instance, if thecompartments above Hmax are not opened. The alternatives of 'l':

h: vertical limit is the given height (m)

Ii: vertical limit is the i:th horizontal subdivision.

LOCK=dam: (option) damages that should not be regenerated. If the damage does not exist, it is normallygenerated. If the damage exists, its regeneration is skipped. 'dam' is a single name or a name list(name,name,...) where 'name' is name of a table (column DAM expected), name of a damagegroup or name of a damage.

STAGE=name: (option) name(s) of stage(s) of the generated damages. As default, the generated damagescontain one stage called '1'. The option renames this stage. If there are several names given, asSTAGE=(name1,name2,name3...), the first stage will have the name 'name1' and the program addsto the end of the damage the commands 'STAGE name2', 'STAGE name3' etc. This means that,there are in the damages, as many stages as the are names in the option, all stages being identical.This is usefull if there are activities based on the names of the stages (e.g. probabilistic dam.stability). If an additional stage is put in brackets [], the stage is optional. This means that the stageis added to the damage only if it opens new compartments. Does the stage open new compartmentsis checked from the compartment connection table (see column STAGE in the compartmentconnection, argument CCONN). This feature is useful e.g. in defining cross flooding stages. Asdefault, number of phases in stages is zero. Another number of phases may be assigned by addingto the end of the name slash and a number, e.g. FINAL/5. Syntax [#n]/m, where n,m=1,2,.., isreserved for stating that the A-class stage number n has m phases. Syntax [#*]/m states that all A-class stages have m phases.

ADD=command: (option) add the given damage definition command to the end of every damage. ExampleADD='ROOM HOPPER'.

ADD=(command,zone_selection):(option) add the given damage command to the end of damage belonging to a limited set of zones.The zone selection is any set of zone numbers Zi or zone ranges Zi-j. The zones are either positiveor negative integers, e.g. Z3, Z4-6, Z-5, Z-4-7. If nothing is specified in the ADD command, or, ifall specified zone numbers are negative, it is assumed that all (other) zone numbers belong to theselection as positive numbers. The command is added to the damage if any damaged zone appearsas positive number in the zone selection but none of damaged zones appears as negative number inthe zone selection. Examples:

ADD=('command',Z3,Z7-11) command is added to the damages

where any of zones 3,7,8,9,10,11 is damaged.


194 (272)


ADD=('command',Z-2-5,Z-9) command is added to the damages

where none of zones 2,3,4,5,9 is damaged.

ADD=('command',Z2-12,Z-9) command is added to the damages

where any of zones 2...12 is damaged but not 9.

ALL: (option) do not discard identical lesser extent damages. Normally the identical lesser extentdamages having the same control number are discarded but, if this option is specified, the programcalculates all damages.

BOX: Normally the rooms are selected according to the data in the compartment limit table (optionWTC). If this option is specified, the rooms totally or partly (at least 10 cm) inside the penetrationbox are selected. The penetration box is defined by x1, x2, height of the horizontal subdivisionlimiting damage upwards (if any) and downwards (if any) and the longitudinal subdivisionlimiting depth of penetration inwards.

ACLASS=way: (option) the program generates all scenarios how progressive flooding may proceed throughA-class boundaries. The A-class boundaries should be marked in the compartment connectiontable by letter 'A' in the column CLASS. If 'way' is DAM, the program generates the scenariosas separate damages adding #n, n=1,2,..., to the name of the parent damage. If 'way' is STA, theprogram adds the scenarios to the damage as separate stages, stages having names #n, n=1,2,... Thelast stage is the largest one, i.e. having the greatest number of damaged compartments.

STYPE=(sta=type,sta=type,...):define type of equation of s in different stages. This option allows the user to deviate from thedefault calculation rule of the s-factor. If some stage is missing in this list, the default rule will beapplied in that stage.

sta: name of stage or '#*', any additional A-class stage, or *LAST, the laststage. *LAST overrules other settings specified for the last stage.

type: type of equation: FIN, use the equation of the final stage; INT, use theequation of the intermediate stage; CRI, check the relevant criteria andassign s=0 if some criterion is not met.

GEN MAXWS cases surface sco-opt HEEL=a glo ATOL=tol S>sval,

NOCHECK RANGE=limits CTOL=tol PTOL=tol OFFSET=val

GEN MAXWS TAB=ctab surface sco-opt HEEL=a glo ATOL=tol S>sval,

NOCHECK RANGE=limits CTOL=tol PTOL=tol OFFSET=val The command generates themaximum water surface, i.e. the highest water level within the ship which is combined from allwater lines included in the damages of the option 'cases'. The maximum water surface may begenerated locally or globally. The local surface is generated separately for each compartmentoccuring in some damage taking the water lines only from those damages where the compartmentis flooding. The global surface is combination of all water lines in all damages in the range of thewhole ship. The maximum water surface is a geometric object of type facet surface and it is storedin the data base. This task does not provide any output about the surface, it is purposed to be usedin the functions of the geometry and drawing tasks.

cases: combinations of initial conditions and damages 'inits/damages'

TAB=ctab: (option) cases given in a table. The table should have a column CASE.

ctab: name of table without prefix (TAB* assumed).

surface: name of the surface to be generated (should not be name of any existing object because it will beoverwritten)


195 (272)


sco-opt: (option) options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE and NOT restricting the set of waterlines (see e.g. !EXPL DRW GEN)

HEEL=a: (option) use water lines at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium.

angle: constant heeling angle. If the GZ curve is calculated to both sides, thesign of the angle is taken into account as such, otherwise the angle isinterpreted as abs(angle) degrees from zero to the direction of the GZcurve.

EQ+a: from the steady equilibrium 'a' degrees towards greater list.

EQ-a: from the steady equilibrium 'a' degrees towards zero.

EQ+range: from the steady equilibrium towards geater list by range taken from acolumn occuring in the table 'ctab', e.g. EQ+RANGESOL.

hcolumn: take the angles from the column 'hcolumn' occuring in the table 'ctab'.

glo: (option) generate global surface or local surface.

L: generate local surface (default)

G: generate global surface

LO: generate local surface so that water lines are taken from from thosedamages where the compartment is not flooding.

LB: like option L but the water lines are taken from those damages where thecompartment is on the border between the damaged and intact ship.

S>sval: (option available only with TAB=ctab) select only cases having s-factor greater than the givenvalue sval. This option works only if the table contains column SFAC.

sval: limiting s value 0...1.

ATOL=tol: (option) With this option, the water lines are grouped so that within each group the normal vectorsdiffer less than the given angle tolerance 'tol'. When generating the maximum water surface, eachgroup of water lines is replaced by the highest water line. This simplifies the generation task andmakes it more reliable but less accurate. As a default, the grouping is not done.

tol: angle tolerance in degrees, e.g. 0.1 deg. If problems occur in generation,repeat the task with a tolerance. The tolerance should be as small aspossible.

NOCHECK: omit up-to-date check of the results

RANGE=limits: range of the generated global surface. The default range is the standard 'geometry range' of NAPA.

CTOL=tol: (option) With this tolerance the user can control the connection of points when the facets areformed. Should be used only if problems occur. Only used with global surface.

tol: a real number that controls how far the points can be and still be treated asequal. Default value is 0.001.

PTOL=tol: (option) This tolerance controls the distance at which points are treated as being outside plane.Should be used only if problems occur. Only used with global surface.

tol: the distance at which which a point is treated as being located in plane.Default value is 0.000005.

OFFSET=val: (option) Generate offset surface. Only with global surface.


196 (272)


val: extra draught that is added to every water plane. Value in meters.

GEN OPE tab

The command generates an opening table. This means that all openings stored in the data base asstand-alone descriptions are moved to the given opening table.

tab: name of receiving table without prefix OPE*. Existing table will be emptied in the beginning. Thetable will be stored in the data base at the end.

IGROUP -> Define named group of initial conditions

Define a named group of initial conditions. This definition allows referencing to the group ofinitial conditions instead of single ones.

IGROUP name ,text ;

INIT -> Define initial condition

Define the initial condition with the given name and store it in the data base. The initial conditiondefines the initial floating position of the ship, its center of gravity and liquid loads. The optionaltext describes in plain text the initial condition and it is used in result lists and plots.

INIT name ,text ;

MARGIN -> Margin line

Define a margin line with the given name. The margin line is defined by dividing the length ofthe ship into one or several parts in the direction of the x-axis and applying one defining method(polygon or curve) in each interval. There may be several margin lines simultaneously defined.The additional parameter "DEFAULT" connected to the name marks this margin line to be usedas the default margin line, where the margin line name is not explicitly stated. The optional textdescribes the margin line in plain text and it is used in the result lists and plots.

MARGIN name/DEFAULT ,text ;

MOMENT -> Define heeling moment curve

The command enters in a subtask which defines a heeling moment curve. The heeling momentcurves are referred in definition of stability criteria.

MOMENT name text

name: name of heeling moment curve.


OCGROUP -> Define named group of old stability criteria (old)

Define a named group of stability criteria. This definition allows referencing to the group ofcriteria instead of single ones.

OCGROUP name ,text ;

OCPO Define checkpoints for printing height of margin line from sea (old)

At the given checkpoints (x), the program prints height of the margin line from the sea and amountof the wetted deck.


197 (272)


OCPO x, x, ...

x : x-coordinates in standard format.

OCRIT -> Define criterion (old)

Create a criterion or change an existing one.

OCRIT name ,text ;

OGROUP -> Define named group of openings

Define a named group of openings. This definition allows referencing to the group of openingsinstead of single ones.

OGROUP name ,text ;

OMOMENT -> Define external moment (old)

External moments are used only in connection with calculating criteria of type RESLEVER. Themoments do not affect on the floating position of the ship. It is also possible to plot the momentcurve in the GZ-drawing as additional information.

OMOMENT name text;

name : name of the moment curve, text : descriptive text (optional).

OPENING -> Define opening

These data define an opening in the ship through which water can run into the ship or between therooms connected by it. The openings are used in two ways in the DA-subsystem: in progressiveflooding calculations the openings have effect on spreading of the flood water in the ship, in theother parts of the system the openings have only effect on the stability criteria. The optional textdescribes the opening in plain text and it is used in the result lists and plots.

OPENING name ,text;

OSUB -> Define subdivision (old)

Define the subdivision of the ship fulfilling the requirements of the IMO regulations for cargoships or passenger ships. Note! The command OSUB enters to the old definition function. The olddefinitions are used by the old functions of probabilistic damage stability. A subdivision suitablefor the new method to calculate probabilistic damage stability should be generated by a specialtype table (see the model table SUBD*MODEL in the NAPA data base and the explanation !EXPSUB).

SUBDIVISION name/DEF ,text ;

name: name of subdivision. The subdivision can be made default by adding the option /DEF to the name. text: descriptive text (optional).

RGR -> Define room group

Define a room group.

RGR name;


198 (272)


STDHEELS Define standard set of heeling angles

This set of heeling angles is stored in the project data base, system data base or NAPA data base.

STDHEELS a1,a2,...;

STDHEELS DB1 a1,a2,...;

Store the set in the project data base.

STDHEELS

STDHEELS DB1

Show the set stored in the project data base.

STDHEELS SYSDB a1,a2,...;

Store the set in the system data base.

STDHEELS SYSDB

Show the set stored in the system data base.

STDHEELS NAPADB a1,a2,...;

Store the set in the NAPA data base.

STDHEELS NAPADB

Show the set stored in the NAPA data base.

SUBD -> Define subdivision

The task makes the table calculation ready for defining the subdivision of the ship. Thesubdivision may be used in the automatic damage definition and it is required in the probabilisticdamage stability.

SUBD name

Enter table calculation, assign the prefix SUBD* and fetch the table into the work area. If the tableis not existing the model table is loaded. Note! At exit from the task, the user himself has to savethe definition.

name: name of the subdivision.

17.2 Argument commands

AAS Automatic argument storing and restoring

The command puts on the mode that, at every exit of DA, the current arguments are stored in thegiven set and, next time the user enters DA, the same arguments are restored. The mode is workingfor that user who is active at the call of the command. Every user may have own set of argumentsfor storing and restoring or many or all users may share the same set.

AAS name

Put on the automatic storing and restoring mode and register the given set for the user who iscurrently active.

name: name of the argument set used for storing. The name may be used also in the command ARG.


199 (272)


AAS OFF

Put the mode off for the active user.

ARG Argument handling

The command lists, stores and restores calculation arguments.

ARG;

List current arguments.

ARG SAVE name text;

Save the current arguments in the project data base as named set. See also CAT ARG, DEL ARGname and COPY ARG name ver/proj.

name: name of the set. The arguments of the set called 'STD' are automaticly assigned every time the userenters DA (default argument set).

text: (optional) descriptive text. This text will be shown by CAT ARG.

ARG GET name;

Assign arguments from the stored set.

name: name of the set.

ARG CAT

List catalog of stored argument sets.

ARG UNS name;

Unsave argument set.


ARG COPY name vers/proj;

Copy argument set from another version and/or project.


vers: name of version.

proj: name of project. If '/proj' is missing, the set is copied from another version of the current project.

ARG LIST name;

List arguments of the given set without assigning them.

ARRANGEMENT Change arrangement

Use the given arrangement when fetching room parameters or plotting backgrounds. The defaultarrangement is that registered for DA in SM.

ARR name;

Use arrangement 'name'.

ARR OFF;


200 (272)


Use arrangement registered in SM.

CCONN Compartment connections

Often there is need to combine rooms so that, if one room is flooded, water is spreading also toother ones. Answer to this need is the argument CCONN, compartment connections. Compartmentconnections is a table which defines the compartments or rooms which are connected together inflooding process.

There are two applications of the table: 1. To define watertight compartments consisting of several rooms. The compartment is assumed to be surrounded by watertight bulkheads and decks but the bulkheads and decks between the rooms are not watertight causing all rooms to be flooded if any of them is flooded. 2. To define connections between watertight compartments or rooms. If the connection is open, water may spread through it from one watertight compartment to another. If the connection is closed, the compartments are flooded separately. The compartment connections are checked every time the user or the program is defining damages. If a compartment or room is damaged and it appears in the table, the compartments which are connected to it are added automaticly to the damage so that water makes a common surface within them (they form a temporary combined object). There is up-to-date check for the connections: if in command CALC the results are younger than the connection table, the damage is redefined and the results are recalculated if the changes in the table cause changes in the damage. This feature may be used, for example, defining easily condition 'watertight door open/closed'.

CCONN name

The compartment connections are defined in the table TAB*name.

The table has to contain at least the column COMP. Every row of this column defines one watertight compartment consisting of the named geometric rooms. The names are separated by commas or spaces. In the optional column WTCOMP, one may name the watertight compartments. The name must not be name of any geometric room defined in DEF. These names may be used in damages or in the column CONN of this table (see below), not in the column COMP. The optional column CONN is reserved for definition of connections between compartments. If there is a name, let say 'A', on a row of column CONN, there is an _one-directional_ connection from 'A' to the room(s) stated in the column COMP. 'A' may be a name stated in the column WTCOMP or name of a geometric room. If 'A' is a geometric room and it is a member of a wt-compartment, all other member rooms of the compartment are connected to the room(s) of COMP, too. Also in COMP, it is not necessary to state all members of the wt-comartment, one is enough. Two-directional


201 (272)


connection requires two rows, one row for each direction. The optional column OPEN defines the status open/closed of the connection. If there is 'N' in the column OPEN, the connection of that row is currently closed, otherwise the connection is open. The optional column STAGE controls when the connection will open. A name in the column states that the connection opens in the beginning of the specified stage. If the column is missing or the string is empty, the connection opens in the beginning of flooding. If the stage is not defined in the damage, the connection remains closed. All rooms which are directly or undirectly connected, no matter how long the chain is, are flooded together.

CCONN OFF

Deactivate connections.

Example:

WTCOMP COMP CONN OPEN STAGE

----------------------------------------------

WT11 R10 R20 R21

R40 R41 WT11 Y

R30 R31 R20 Y CROSS

R41 R42

R43 R42 Y

R50 R51 R60 Y

R43 R401

If WT11 is given in the command ROOM of damage definition, so

- R10, R20 and R21 are flooded because they are members of WT11

- R40 and R41 are flooded because there is an open connection

from WT11

- R30 and R31 are flooded in the beginning of stage CROSS

because there is an open connection from R20 which is

flooded as member of WT11

- R42 is flooded because it forms the same wt-compartment with

R41 which is flooded through an open connection from WT11

- R43 is flooded because it is flooded through an open


202 (272)


connection from R42 wich forms the same wt-compartment with R41

which is flooded through an open connection from WT11

- R401 is flooded because it forms the same wt-compartment with

R43 which is flooded through an open connection from R42

which forms the same wt-compartment with R41 which is flooded

through an open connection from WT11

Outcome is the same if, instead of WT11, R10, R20 or R21

is given.

CGM Change GM

Same as CHANGE GM. (See !EXPL CHA)

CGM gm;

CGM MAXREQ;

CGM OFF;

CHANGE Change GM

CHANGE GM gm

The GM-value defined by the initial condition is changed to the given one. Changing of GMaffects on printed and plotted results causing no recalculation of stored results.

CHANGE GM MAXREQ

The maximum GM-requirement of the old criteria is used as GM. Not supported by the newdamage stability criteria.

CHANGE GM OFF

Return to use the normal GM-value got from the initial condition.

FORCE Set handling method of heeling angles

The command forces the program to handle argument heeling angles in a desired way:

FORCE alt;

alt :

SB : force listing to SB

PS : force listing to PS

BOTH : calculate both sides whenever the case is symmetric (GZ=0 at the upright). Check is made foreach stage and phase separately

AUTO : automatic side selection.

HEELS Argument heeling angles


203 (272)


Use the given set of heeling angles in calculations of GZ-curve. If this command is not given, thesystem uses the standard set.

HEELS a1,a2,...;

Use the given set.

HEELS DB1

Use the set from the project data base.

HEELS SYSDB

Use the set from the system data base.

HEELS NAPADB

Use the set from the NAPA data base.

HEEL

Show the current set.

HULL Hull form for calculation

Use the given hull in calculations. This command allows the user to make calculations withdifferent hull forms, e.g. various extent of enclosed superstructures included.

HULL name;

ICR Irrelevant criteria

Remove the given criteria from the set of relevant criteria.

ICR crit,crit,...

crit: name of criterion or name of criterion group.

ICR ALL

All criteria are irrelevant, i.e. the set of relevant criteria is empty.

IRO Openings not taken into account in this run

The given openings are not relevant. Compare with the command ROP.

IRO op, op,...;connecting

IRO op.group;

IRO ALL;

All relevant openings.

IRO EXTERNAL

All relevant openings connecting the sea to a compartment.

IRO INTERNAL

All relevant openings connecting two compartments.

IRO PIPE


204 (272)


All relevant openings of type pipe (OTYPE PIPE).

IRO SUB sel.crit.

If the opening arrangement is active, the command selects the subset from the openingarrangement table acc. to the selection criterion and makes the openings irrelevant. For theavailable selection criteria, see the explanation of the command SUBSET of table calculation.

LQ select quantities

Select quantities to be printed. The following selections are available:

MARG - definition of margin line ROPE - definition of openings POIN - definition of special points INIT - initial conditions DDAM - definition of damage cases DRES - summary of results FLO - floating position GZ - stability curves LIQL - liquid loads DCOM - damaged compartments DROP - relevant openings DPOI - special points DFRB - freeboard DMRG - margin line DSUM - two dimensional summary table DPRO - lateral profile. DLIM - GM and KG limit curves DCRT - criterion table DLDT - loading condition table DMGM - minimum GM and maximum KG table PSUM - summary of subdivision index PRES - comprehensive table about probabilities LMRG - T and TR limits for immersion of the margin line LOPE - T and TR limits for immersion of the openings CRE - compressed results of initial condition and final stage OFL - estimate of volume of cargo flown out of damaged rooms FEVE - flooding simulation events The following qualifiers are available for LQ DRES and LQ PRES: FRBZONE/ang: freeboard in the middle of zone(s) at an heel angle ang RESFLD/UN : reserve to downflooding through unprotected openings RESFLD/WE : reserve to downflooding through weathertight openings OPEN/UN : critical unprotected opening (the one resulting RESFLD/UN) OPEN/WE : critical weathertight opening (the one resulting RESFLD/WE) AMAXGZ/R : angle where max. GZ, GZMAXR, occurs. The following qualifiers are available for LQ GZ: IMRES/UN : min. reserve to immersion of unprotected openings OPNAME/UN : name of the unprot. opening having minimum reserve IMRES/WE : min. reserve to immersion of weathertight openings OPNAME/WE : name of the weathertight opening having minimum reserve IMRES/WA : min. reserve to immersion of watertight openings OPNAME/WA : name of the watertight opening having minimum reserve IMRES/name : reserve to immersion of the given opening OPNAME/name: name of the given opening GRF/1 : grounding force at the first contact GRF/2 : grounding force at the second contact


205 (272)


The following qualifiers are available for LQ DROP and LQ DPOI: IMMR/a : reserve to immersion at angle 'a' IMMR/EQ+a : reserve to immersion at angle 'eq + a' IMMR/Z : reserve to immersion measured parallel to the z-axis of the ship IMMR/Za : reserve to immersion at angle 'a' measured parallel to the z-axis of the ship IMMR/ZEQ+a : reserve to immersion at angle 'eq + a' measured parallel to the z-axis of the ship The following qualifiers are available for LQ DMRG and LQ DFRB: IMMR/a : reserve to immersion at angle 'a' XIMM/a : x where the min. reserve occurs at angle 'a' IMMR/EQ+a : reserve to immersion at angle 'eq + a' XIMM/EQ+a : x where the min. reserve occurs at angle 'eq + a' The following qualifiers are available for LQ INIT, LQ DRES and LQ PRES: GRF/1 : grounding force at the first contact GRF/2 : grounding force at the second contact XCNT/1 : x of the first contact XCNT/2 : x of the second contact YCNT/1 : y of the first contact YCNT/2 : y of the second contact ZCNT/1 : z of the first contact ZCNT/2 : z of the second contact DEPTH/1 : depth at the first contact DEPTH/2 : depth at the second contact

OICR Irrelevant criteria (old)

The given old criteria are not relevant.

OICR crit, crit,...;

OICR crit.group;

OPARR Opening arrangement

A table based way to define all openings available in the task. The opening arrangement is atable with prefix OPE*, each row defining an opening. If an opening arrangement is active, allseparately defined openings are ignored as well as the commands OPENING, EDI OPE, DEL OPEand COPY OPE. The commands CAT OPE, DES OPE, ROP, IRO and OGROUP work normally.

OPARR name

Activate the table OPE*name as an opening arrangement.

name: name of table without prefix OPE*.

OPARR OFF

Deactivate the opening arrangement (the openings defined by the task OPEN become available).

Columns of the arrangement:

ID: identification of the opening

DES: description of the opening


206 (272)


WT: watertightness of opening. Type of opening regarding its severity in progressive flooding. Thealternatives:

UNPROTECTED must not submerged

WEATHERTIGHT partly watertight

WATERTIGHT totally watertight

UNNOPROGRESSIVE (in DA only) unprotected but in the stage PROGRESSIVE no newcompartment is flooded through it.

WEPROGRESSIVE (in DA only) weathertight but in the stage PROGRESSIVE newcompartment may be flooded through it.

REFX,REFY,REFZ:x-, y- and z-coordinate of the opening (check point of immersion).

FR: x-coordinate of opening as frame number

CONN: Pair of compartments connected by the opening. The syntax comp1,comp2 defines the connectionin both directions, the syntax comp1 -> comp2 defines one-directional connection from comp1 tocomp2. Either of the names may be SEA. In DA, the current relevancy of the opening is checkedby the following logic: The opening is relevant if (provided it is not watertight)

- it leads from the sea to an intact compartment

- it leads from a damaged compartment to an intact compartment

- connection information is missing

The opening is irrelevant if

- it leads to a damaged compartment

- it connects two intact compartments

- it leads to the sea and the connection is one-directional

- it leads from an intact compartment and the connection is one-directional

OTYPE: type of opening as construction, like door, escape, pipe etc.

STAGE: flooding stage where the opening is taken into account. The column defines the stage(s) wherethe opening is taken into account in calculation of probabilistic damage stability for SOLAS II-1.The factor s will be zero if the opening is immersed in the specified stage (default: the final stage).Alternatives: 'name of stage', ALL (all stages) or FINAL (the last stage).

COL: Fillig colour(s) of opening in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA. Up to four logicalfill codes col1 col2 col3 col4 may be given : col1 = opening has become irrelevant and above thewater line, default GREEN; col2 = opening is relevant and above the water line, default GREEN;col3 = opening has become irrelevant and is under the water line, default RED; opening is relevantand under the water line, default RED.

SIZE: size of the square marker in plotting tasks DRW FLO and DRW OPEN of DA. A precedingasterisk defines the size directly in the dimensions of the drawing otherwise it is in the ship scale.

TPX,TPY,TPZ: Text position in x-, y- and z-sections relative to the center of the marker representing the opening.The text position is defined by direction (one of the alternatives below) and optional distance. Thedistance is in the ship scale or directly in the dimensions of the drawing if the distance begins withan asterisk. The following alternatives are available:

AC dis: above, centered, synonym N dis


207 (272)


AR dis: above, to the right, synonym NE dis

L dis: to the left, synonym E dis

UR dis: under, to the right, synonym SE dis

UC dis: under, centered, synonym S dis

UL dis: under, to the left, synonym SW dis

R dis: to the right, synonym W dis

AL dis: above, to the left, synonym NW dis

O: over

OPTION Set options

By this command the user can set various options which control calculation and output.

OPTION opt,opt,...;

Options:

NOPERM: Do not replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities in floodedconditions.

PERM: Replace steel reductions of damaged liquid load rooms by permeabilities in flooded conditions(default).

PROGR: Study progressive flooding through unprotected openings.

WEPROGR: Special case: As PROGR but progressive flooding occurs through ALL unprotected ANDweathertight openings that are immersed in the final equilibrium. No other openings will beconsidered in the calculation of progressive flooding, i.e. there will be no steps beyond theequilibrium caused by immersion of openings.

WEPROGR2: Special case 2: As WEPROGR but progressive flooding occurs through unprotected openingsbeyond the equilibrium causing steps in the GZ curve.

NOPROGR: Studying of progressive flooding not allowed (default).

NOLOG: Do not print flooded rooms and heeling angles in the calc. log.

LOG: Print whole calculation log (default).

CDISP: Print and plot the results with reference to the constant displacement method (default).

VDISP: Print and plot the results with reference to the variable displacement method.

DB: Keep results in the data base removing them from the memory immediately after use. This optionensures large runs also in small computers (default).

MEM: Keep results in the memory during whole run without removing them after use. This option maybe used if connection to the data base is slow and there is enough memory space in the computerto keep all results in the memory at the same time.

CDIR: calculate GZ curve in the constant direction specified by the azimuth angle (default).

VDIR: calculate GZ curve in the variable weakest direction.

WDIR: calculate GZ curve in the constant weakest direction, i.e. in the direction where the resistance isthe minimum at the steady equilibrium.


208 (272)


HDIR: calculate GZ curve in the constant heeling direction, i.e. in the direction where the vertical ispointing to at the steady equilibrium.

INDIV: all rooms open to sea are filling individually

COMM: rooms open to sea are filling with common surface provided they are not marked to floodindividually (default)

ORCR Relevant criteria (old)

The command defines the old criteria to be applied in this run.

ORCR crit, crit,...;

ORCR crit.group;

POO Set output options for diagram plotting

This command controls the graphic result produces by PLD GZ, PLD DLIM, PLD DCRC, PLDDMGM and PLD DMGM. For the parameters of the command, see !EXPL POO/GEN. Thesubject is GZ, DLIM (default), DCRC, DMGM or DPRO.

PQ Select quantities for diagram plotting

This command controls the quantities to be included in PLD GZ, PLD DLIM, PLD DCRC, PLDDMGM,PLD DPRO and PLD TRES.

PQ subj selection

subj: (opt) subject, using the symbols listed above. Default=DLIM.

selection: the syntax is the same as in the standard command (see !EXPL PQ/GEN).

The following qualifiers are available for PLD GZ:

IMRES/UN : min. reserve to immersion of unprotected openings IMRES/WE : min. reserve to immersion of weathertight openings IMRES/WA : min. reserve to immersion of watertight openings IMRES/name : reserve to immersion of the given opening

The following qualifiers are available for PLD TRES:

AIRFLO/OPE : air flow velocity in the opening WFLO/OPE : volumetric water flow in the opening VOL/ROOM : volume of floodwater in the room

Note that the flow direction in WFLO and AIRFLO depends on the specified Connection so thatfor CONN R1,R2 the flow R1->R2 is positive.

RCR Relevant criteria

Define the set of relevant criteria. The command replaces the current set by the given set ofcriteria. Note that definition of damage cases may contain changes to this set.

RCR crit,crit,...

crit: name of criterion or name of criterion group. If the criterion or group cannot be found in theproject data base, it is tried to find in the system data base.


209 (272)


RCR ALL

All criteria stored in the data base are relevant.

RCR

The command without parameters lists the set of relevant criteria.

ROP Relevant openings

The command selects the openings which are relevant in this run. See also command IRO, makeopenings irrelevant.

ROP op, op,...;

ROP op.group;

ROP ALL;

All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement.

ROP EXTERNAL

All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement connecting the sea to a compartment.

ROP INTERNAL

All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement connecting two compartments.

ROP PIPE

All openings in the data base or in the opening arrangement of type pipe (OTYPE PIPE).

ROP SUB sel.crit.

If the opening arrangement is active, the command selects the subset from the openingarrangement table acc. to the selection criterion. For the available selection criteria, see theexplanation of the command SUBSET of table calculation.

SET Setup for arrangement drawings

The command defines setup for arrangement oriented drawings. The setup remains valid (alsobetween different runs) until redefined. For details, see !EXPL SET/G20.

SWH Significant wave height

The significant wave height will be used, when the program calculates the amount of assumedaccumulated seawater as a function of the wave height and the residual freeboard.

SWH h

h: significant wave height (m).

SYTOL Change symmetry tolerance

The cases, having GZ at the upright greater than the symmetry tolerance, cannot be forced to heelto the direction they do not spontaneously start to go (forced by FORCE SB, FORCE PS or SIDESB, SIDE PS in dam. definition). If the ship is forced to the side it does not spontaneously goand GZ at the upright is less than the symmetry tolerance, the GZ curve of the case is changedsymmetric (GZ at the upright 0 and rest of the curve corrected accordingly). When changing thesymmetry tolerance greater, be sure this can be done safely without losing too much accuracy!


210 (272)


SYTOL tol;

tol: tolerance (m). Default value 0.001.

TOO Table output options

The lists MARG, ROPE, POIN, INIT, DDAM, DRES, FLO, GZ, LIQL, DCOM, DROP, DPOI,DFRB, DMRG, DSUM, DPRO, DLIM, DCRT, DLDT, DMGM, PSUM, PRES, LMRG, LOPE,CRE and OFL are controlled by TOO. See !EXPL TOO/GEN.

TRLIM Change trim limit

Normally, if the ship trims over 80 degrees, it is considered lost. It takes much time to iterate thefloating position beoyond the 80 degrees limit. If there are many damages leading to the case 'shiptrims upside down', the user may save time by assigning a smaller trim limit.

TRLIM tr

tr : (degrees) trim limit where iteration stops and the ship is considered lost. Default 80 deg. tr mustnot exceed 88 deg or be negative.

USE Make data current

The command makes different data current for different purposes. If the parameter 'name' ismissing, the command shows the current data.

USE IMODATA name;

Make the named data set current for calculation of subdiv. index of cargo ships.

USE INIT name;

Make the initial condition current for instant damage stability.

USE DAMAGE name;

Make the damage case current for instant damage stability (to be used when calling FLOOD orNEW).

USE STACOL table

Use the given table as colouring standard of stages. Tabe should contain the columns STAGE fornames of stages and LFCODE for logical fill codes. If another column LFCODE is defined, thelogical fill codes in it will be used for the secondary flooded rooms (flooded because of an openconnection in the compartment connection table).

WTARR Define 'watertight' arrangement

Select arrangement that forms the 'watertight' arrangement. Only rooms that are part of thisarrangement can be defined as damaged rooms in the damage definitions. The automatic damagecase generation is based on this arrangement.

WTARR name/DEF

name = the name of the arrangement as defined in SM. DEF (optional) defines that thearrangement should be used as default WTARR in DA

WTARR NONE

Switches off the effect off WTARR


211 (272)


17.3 Calculation of cases

ASG Assign variables

The command assigns variables of different subjects. The subject is either same as that of thecommand LIST (OBJ, REF, EXPL, HDP, ARG, MARG, ROPE, POI, INIT, DDAM, DRES, FLO,GZ, LIQL, DCOM, DROP, DPOI, DMRG, DFRB, DLIM, DMGM, DLDT, DCRT, DPROF,OFL), or EXT or GZL.

ASG OBJ assign variables related to the current argument hull ASG REF assign main dimensions of the ship ASG EXPL subj assign explanation texts of the quantities selected by LQ subj. ASG HDP subj do ASG REF, ASG OBJ and ASG EXPL. ASG EXPL is done only if the option subj is given. ASG ARG assign arguments

ASG MARG X=(x,x,...) D=d

Assign definition points of the current margin line.

X=(x,x,...): (opt) assign points at given x's. Default all.

x: a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step).

D=d: assign points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aft end, if d isnegative, the intervals start from the fore end.

ASG ROPE OPE=(op,op,...) SOP=(s1,s2)

Assign definition data of the relevant openings.

OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) restrict the set of openings to the given ones or to the given type(s). Default all relevant.

op: name of opening, name of opening group or type of opening UNP, WEA,WAT or UNN. If there is only one element in the brackets, the bracketsmay be omitted.

SOP=(s1,s2): (opt) sort openings acc. to given properties X (=x-coordinate), Y (=y-coordinate), Z (=z-coordinate), A (=alphanumeric) or T (=type of opening). If merely SOP is given, program assumess1=A. If only one property is given (SOP=s1 accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to beA. If this option is missing, the order is that defined by the command ROP.

s1: primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted

s2: secondary property for sorting openings having the same position afterthe primary sorting.

ASG POI POI=(p,p,...) SOP=(s1,s2)

Like ASG ROPE but, instead of the openings, the object of assigning is the special points. Thesorting alternative T (type) is not available.

ASG INIT init GLO


212 (272)


Assign data about initial conditions. Note that many quantities are not assigned before the initialconditions are calculated together with a damage case. To get calculated quantities, one has to use,instead the parameter 'init', the parameter 'init/damage'.

init: (opt) name of a single initial condition, name of an initial condition group or init/dam. Default= initial condition(s) given by the command SEL or those used in the previous CALC, output orASG command.

GLO: (opt) assign x-, y-, and z-coordinates in the global coordinate system. Default = ship coordinatesystem.

ASG DDAM dam

Assign definition data of damage cases.

dam: (opt) name of a single damage case or name of a damage case group. Default = damage case(s)given by the command SEL or those used in the previous CALC, output or ASG command.(Instead of 'dam', one may use also the form 'init/dam').

ASG DRES cases sco-opt GLO

Assign summary data of calculated results.

cases: (opt) case-parameter 'init/dam'.

sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output.

GLO: (opt) x, y, z in the global coord. system. Default ship coord. system.

ASG FLO cases sco-opt

Assign floating position and related quantities.



ASG GZ cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...)

Assign stability curve and related data as function of calculation heeling angles. The contents ofthe variables is the last curve appearing in the selected cases.


sco-opt: (opt) options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT selecting the one curve from the setof all curves.

OPE=(op,op...):calc. reserve to immersion for the given openings.

op: name of opening, name of opening group or ALL. If there is only oneelement in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted. Default all relevantopenings.

ASG LIQL cases sco-opt GLO


213 (272)


Assign liquid load distribution in the equilibrium floating position.



GLO: (opt) x, y, z in the global coord. system

ASG DCOM cases sco-opt GLO

Assign distribution of inflooded water in the damaged compartments in the equilibrium floatingposition.



GLO: (OPT) x, y, z in the global coord. system. Default ship coordinate system.

ASG DROP cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n

Assign quantities related to the relevant openings.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope.

OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) assign the given ones or the given type(s) or all. Default all relevant.

op: name of opening, name of opening group or type of opening UNP, WEA,WAT or UNN or ALL. ALL means all openings from the arguments. Thedefault set is all opening that are relevant in the damage case and stage. Ifthere is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted.

SOP=(s1,s2): (OPT) sort openings acc. to given properties I (=immersion angle), R (=reserve to immersion), X(=x-coordinate), Y (=y-coordinate), Z (=z-coordinate), A (=alphanumeric), T (=type of opening).If merely SOP is given, program assumes s1=I, s2=A. If only one property is given (SOP=s1accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A. If this option is missing, the order is thatdefined by the command ROP.

s1: primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted.

s2: secondary property for sorting openings having same position after theprimary sorting.

MAXNR=n: (opt) assign only n openings. If the option SOP is missing, n openings first immersing areassigned. If the option SOP is given, n first openings from the sorted order are assigned. Defaultall.

ASG DPOI cases sco-opt POI=(p,p,...) SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n, CURVE=name(x-coord)

Like ASG DROP but, instead of the openings, the object of assigning is the special points.

CURVE=name(x-coord):

intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special points at the intersection points and addthem the set of relevant points.

name: name of a geometric curve or freeboard deck edge


214 (272)


x-coord: x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to givecoordinates: x1, x2, x3,..., explicit set; D=step, equally spaced values overthe x-range of the curve; xarr, values provided by a calculator array.

ASG DMRG cases sco-opt

Assign quantities related to the current margin line.


sco-opt: (OPT) options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output.

ASG DFRB cases sco-opt

Like ASG DMRG but, instead of the margin line, the object of assigning is the freeboard deckedge.

ASG DLIM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

Assign the minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of draught or trim (=function of initial condition).


sco-opt: (opt) options STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output.

CRIT=(c,c...): (opt) restrict the set of relevant criteria to the given ones.

c: single criterion or group. If only one name is given, the brackets may beomitted.

INTACT: (opt) take into account contribution of GM and KG requirements of initial conditions. Default not.

ASG DMGM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

Assign the minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of initial condition anddamage case.





INTACT: (opt) take into account contribution of GM and KG requirements of initial conditions. Default no.

ASG DLDT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

Assign status as function of loading condition (initial condition).




215 (272)



INTACT: (opt) take into account also initial conditions. Default no.

ASGT DCRT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) INTACT

Assign requirement, attained value, status, minimum GM and maximum KG as function of initialcondition, damage case, stage, phase, side and criterion.





INTACT: (opt) take into account also intact stages (stage before flooding). Default no.

ASG DPROF case

ASG DPROF case MOM=name

ASG DPROF case CRIT=name

Assign information about lateral profile. The first alternative is for the profile defined as argument (command PROF in CR-D), the second one is for the profile defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the profile defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF).

ASG OFL case;

Assign an estimate of volume of cargo flown out of damaged rooms. The estimate is based on thefloating position of the ship in the final stage and the extent of damage given in the damage casedefinition (command EXTENT).

ASG EXT dam

Assign the extreme coordinates of the damage case.

dam: name of a damage case.

ASG GZL cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...)

For helping selection of good common ranges for plotted GZ curves, this command assignsvariables giving the overall minimum and maximum coordinate values of all curves appearing inthe corresponding plot command PLD GZ.


sco-opt: (opt) options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the set of curves.



216 (272)



CALCULATE Calculation of damages

The command starts calculation of damages. Flooding of compartments happens in the waydescribed in definition of the damages. The results of every stage and phase are stored in the database for future use. This command causes calculation of damages if the results cannot be foundin the data base or they are out of date. The stored results are utilized by the list, plot and assigncommands.

CALC init/dam FORCE CONT PREV INTERM EQP PROGR EQL MAXTIME=time LL CROSS=t

RHO=r SINT=n PRIPERM=sel FINTIME=t SIM DSIM DYNPAR=tab RTAB=restab

Calculate initial condition - damage case combinations.

init/dam: (opt) set of initial condition - damage case combinations to be calculated. The default set isthat defined by the command SEL CASE or that given in the previous CALC, LIST, PLD orDRW command. In the option 'init/dam', 'init' is name of an initial condition or name of an initialcondition group and 'dam' is name of a damage or name of a damage group.

FORCE: force recalculation of damages even they are up to date.

CONT: calculate each stage and phase so that calculation starts at the equilibrium angle of the previousstage or phase and proceeds from this angle.

PREV: as CONT but, if the case was previously calculated, the starting angle of the first stage and phaseis the equilibrium angle at the end of flooding of the previous calculation.

INTERM: store results in the data base after each intermediate phase and stage. This option makes it possibleto study the results in some other process even if calculation is unfinished.

EQP: start calculation of every stage and phase by first calculating the final floating position and afterthat the other angles of heel. Calculation will be activated only if the damage contains breaches.

PROGR: calculate the cases assuming progressive flooding through the openings as defined in thecompartment connection table.

EQL: calculate only equilibrium floating position, not GZ curve

MAXTIME=time: if calculation proceeds in time steps, this option sets the maximum time limit for time prediction.If equilibrium is reached before the time limit, calculation stops when flooding ends.

time: time limit in seconds e.g. MAXTIME=1800s, in minutes e.g.MAXTIME=30min or in hours e.g. MAXTIME=0.5h.

LL: calculate damages as specified in Load Line Convention

CROSS=t: if the cross-flooding time of the last stage exceeds the given time t, the program adds to the end ofthe case a new stage which corresponds to the cross-flooding situation at time=t. Cross-floodingtime is calculated according to Resolution MSC.245(83) and the cross-flooding arrangementis defined in the compartment connection table (argument CCONN). The added stage is calledCROSS<time>s, e.g. CROSS600s.

t: one time value or a serie of times (t1,t2,...) in seconds. In case of severaltimes, each time generates one additional stage provided it does notexceed the total cross flooding time.


217 (272)


RHO=r: use the given sea water density (t/m3) instead of the value from the reference system.

SINT=n: store every n:th phase in the data base. This option is useful if there is very large number of phasesand the floating position of the ship is not changed much between phases (e.g. in simulation withshort time step).

PRIPERM=sel: select primary source of permeability PERM/IPERM.

PERM: primary source is column PERM of the ship model.

IPERM: if existing, primary source is column IPERM of the ship model (default).

FINTIME=t: start time of the final stage. S-factor for SOLASII-1 will be calculated acc. to formulas of the finalstage after the given time limit. Useful e.g. in simulation.

t: elapsed time in secods.

SIM: calculate the case using the quasi-static simulation method.

DSIM: calculate the case using the dynamic simulation method for heeling. Trim and draft are consideredto be quasi-static. See DYNPAR option for the definition of dynamic parameters. If that optionis not used, it is assumed that ADROL=0.15 KXX=0.3 and RLD=0.03. Note that DSIM oftenrequires a shorter time step than SIM.

DYNPAR=tab: table for parameters used in dynamic simulation. The table should contain column ID foridentification of parameters and column COEF for values of parameters. Example:

ID COEF NOTE TPHI 20.0 Natural roll period (s) ADROL 0.15 Added mass ratio RLD 0.03 Critical (linear) roll damping KXX 0.30 radius of inertia per beam of the ship FWDAMP 1.00 Damping due to flooding (1.0 or. 0.0) Note that TPHI overrides ADROL and KXX.

RTAB=restab: store results in the given table immediately after calculation of each phase.

restab: receiving table. The quantities to be stored are those having predefinedcolumn in the table. The quantities available are the same as in LQ DRESexcept those needing calculation of mass distribution (flooded water,liquid loads).

INERTIA: use inertia method for balancing.

CALC TAB=tab FORCE

Calculate damages as specified in the column CASE of the given table.

TAB=tab: name of the table where to find the column CASE. If the name is without prefix, TAB* isassumed. The column CASE should contain initial conditions and damage cases in the form 'init/dam' where 'init' is name of an initial condition and 'dam' is name of a damage case.

FORCE: force recalculation of damages even they are up to date.

CALC TAB=tab STO=tab SRULE=r PRULE=r RRULE=r VRULE=r SKIP=lim PONLY

Calculate damages as specified by a table and associated probability data s, p, r, v and a.


218 (272)


TAB=tab: name of, so called, summary table. If the name is without prefix, TAB* is assumed. The tablemust have contents suitable for calculation of probibilities (see the chapter 'Probabilistic damagestability' in the documents of DA).

STO=tab: (opt) name of table where to store the probability data. If the name is without prefix, TAB* isassumed. If this option is missing, only the damages are calculated, not the probabilities.

SRULE=r: (opt) rule how to calculate s. The alternatives of r are:

SOLASII-1: SOLAS Chapter II-1, part B-1 (default)

S2009: synonym for SOLASII-1

REG25: the SOLAS regulations for cargo ships

A265: the IMO regulations for passenger ships A.265

M574: MSC/Circ.574

macro: name of a macro.

PRULE=r: (opt) rule how to calculate p. Default: the rule of s. The alternatives are same as for SRULE.

RRULE=r: (opt) rule how to calculate r. Default: the rule of s. The alternatives are same as for SRULE.

VRULE=r: (opt) rule how to calculate v. Default: the rule of s. The alternatives are same as for SRULE.

SKIP=lim: (opt) skipping limit of damages. Default 0. The probability data of the damages having p lesserthan lim are not stored in the table.

PONLY: (opt) calculate only p-, r- and v-factors, not s-factor.

CALC PROB TAB=tab RSI=r MINGM FIX=(init,init,...)

Calculate the required and attained subdivision index R and A.

TAB=tab: name of table where to find probability data of the damages. If the name is without prefix, TAB*is assumed. The table of this argument should be generated by the commands 'CAL TAB=sumSTO=tab...' and 'SEL CASE TAB=tab STO=tab ONLY=...'.

RSI=r: (opt) rule how to calculate the required subdivision index R. Default: the rule used in calculationof s. The alternatives of r are:

REG25: the SOLAS regulations for cargo ships (default).

A265: the IMO regulations for passenger ships A.265.

M574: MSC/Circ.574 (in this case R is equal to Amax).

macro: name of a macro.

r: value of R, 0<r<1.0.

MINGM: (opt) start calculation of the minimum GM values which result in A = R.

MINGM=r: (opt) calculate minimum GM so that A = r*R separately for each draught (initial condition), e.g.A=0.9R.

MINGM=(init1=r1,init2=r2,...):(opt) like MINGM=r but different r values are used for different draughts.

FIX=(init,init,...):(opt) change and/or fix GM of initial conditions. If 'init' is of the form 'name=gm', GM of theinitial condition is changed to 'gm' and it is kept fixed during iteration of min. GM. If 'init' is justname of the initial condition, GM is fixed to its initial value during iteration of min. GM.


219 (272)


17.4 Listing functions

LF line feeds

The commad adds one or several empty lines. For other alternatives, see !EXPL LF/GEN.

LIST List results

The command produces alphanumeric output from the previously calculated cases. The case-parameter has exactly the same meaning as in the "CALCULATE"-command.

Listing according to standard macro is done by LIST .id, macro alternatives are got by LIST .CAT and LIST .id ? gives explanations of a given macro. The division of lists will disappear in the future when all lists are modernized. If a damage case is calculated for a set of calculation heeling angles ranging over zero, listing of an old list for such a case is prevented. The command LIST handles the new lists. The old lists are handled by the command OLIST.

General list components

LIST OBJ list data about the current argument hull LIST REF list main dimensions of the ship LIST EXPL subj list explanation texts of the quantities selected by LQ subj. The possible subjects can be listed for example by command !EXPL LIST +

Example: LIST EXPL DRES

LIST HDP subj list standard header page, i.e. the components

REF, OBJ and EXPL together in this order. The

component EXPL is listed only if the option

subj is given.

The possible subjects can be listed for example

by command !EXPL LIST +

Example: LIST HDP DRES

LIST ARG list arguments

Components listing definitions

LIST MARG NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt

List definition points of the current margin line. The list is a table controlled by LQ MARG, !FORM and table output options.

NOH: (opt) do not print header line.


220 (272)


X=(x,x,...): (opt) list points at given x's. Default all.

x: a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step). Series ofof values have to be given with double apostrophes e.g. X=((0 20 2) 50 70(100 140 2))

D=d: list points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aft end, if d isnegative, the intervals start from the fore end.

t-opt: (opt) standard table output options.

LIST FRBD NOH X=(x,x,...) D=d t-opt

List definition points of the current freeboard deck edge. The list is a table controlled by LQFRBD, !FORM and table output options.


X=(x,x,...): (opt) list points at given x's. Default all.

x: a single coordinate value (x or frame) or a series (min,max,step). Series ofof values have to be given with double apostrophes e.g. X=((0 20 2) 50 70(100 140 2))

D=d: list points at intervals of d meter. If d is positive, the intervals start from the aft end, if d isnegative, the intervals start from the fore end.


LIST ROPE OPE=(op,op,...) NOH SOP=(s1,s2) t-opt

List definition data of the relevant openings. The list is a table controlled by LQ ROPE, !FORMand table output options.

OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) restrict the set of openings to the given ones or to the given type(s). Default all relevant.

op: name of opening, name of opening group or type of opening UNP, WEA,WAT or UNN. If there is only one element in the brackets, the bracketsmay be omitted.

NOH: (opt) no header line(s).

SOP=(s1,s2): (opt) sort openings acc. to given properties X (=x-coordinate), Y (=y-coordinate), Z (=z-coordinate), A (=alphanumeric) or T (=type of opening). If only one property is given (SOP=s1accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A. If this option is missing, the order is thatdefined by the command ROP.

s1: primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted



LIST POI POI=(p,p,...) NOH SOP=(s1,s2) t-opt

Like LIST ROPE but, instead of the openings, the object of listing is the special points. Thesorting alternative T (type) is not available.


221 (272)


LIST INIT init NOH GLO t-opt

List data about initial conditions. The list is a table controlled by LQ INIT, !FORM and tableoutput options. Note that many quantities are not assigned before the initial conditions arecalculated together with a damage case. To get calculated quantities, one has to use, instead theparameter 'init', the parameter 'init/damage'.

init: (opt) name of a single initial condition, name of an initial condition group or init/dam. Default= initial condition(s) given by the command SEL or those used in the previous CALC or outputcommand.


GLO: (opt) list x-, y-, and z-coordinates in the global coordinate system. Default = ship coordinatesystem.


LIST DDAM dam FOCC DEF NOH SEP t-opt

List how damage cases are defined. The list is a table controlled by LQ DDAM, !FORM and tableoutput options.

dam: (opt) name of a single damage case or name of a damage case group. Default = damage case(s)given by the command SEL or those used in the previous CALC or output command. (Instead of'dam', one may use also the form 'init/dam').

FOCC: (opt) show first occurrence of compartment. This option shows each damaged compartment onlyonce, in that stage where it first occurs in damage definition. Normally all compartments areshown in all stages where they are damaged.

DEF: (opt) show compartments in all stages where they explicitly occur in damage definition.

NOH: (opt) do not print header lines.

SEP: (opt) Print each damage case as a separate table inserting an intermediate header between eachdamage case. Default one combined table.

t-opt: (OPT) standard table output options.

Components listing calculated results

LIST DRES cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO NOH t-opt

List summary of calculated results. The list is a table controlled by LQ DRES, !FORM and tableoutput options.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXPLIST GEN).

SEP=level: (opt) level of separation, level is either INI, DAM, CASE, STAGE, PHASE or SIDE. Default onecombined table.

GLO: (opt) x, y, z in the global coord. system. Default ship coord. system.




222 (272)


LIST FLO cases sco-opt SEP=level NOH t-opt

List floating position and related quantities. The list is a table controlled by LQ FLO, !FORM andtable output options.






LIST GZ cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op...) HEEL=a NOH t-opt

List stability curves as function of calculation heeling angles. The list is a table controlled byLQ GZ, !FORM and table output options. The available qualifiers are IMRES/UN, IMRES/WE,IMRES/WA, IMRES/oname, OPNAME/UN, OPNAME/WE, OPNAME/WA and OPNAME/oname.


sco-opt: (opt) options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LIST GEN).



HEEL=a: (opt) add to the list values interpolated at an angle 'a'. Alternatives of a:


EQ: steady equilibrium.





LIST LIQL cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO HEEL=a ROOM=name NOH t-opt

List how liquid loads are distributed in the tanks in the equilibrium floating position. The list is atable controlled by LQ LIQL, !FORM and table output options.



223 (272)




GLO: (opt) x, y, z in the global coord. system

HEEL=a: (opt) calculate the load distribution at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium.




ROOM=name: restrict listing to the given room only

NOH: (opt) no header line(s)


LIST DCOM cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO HEEL=a ROOM=name NOH t-opt

List how inflooded water is distributed in the damaged compartments in the equilibrium floatingposition. The list is a table controlled by LQ DCOM, !FORM and table output options.





HEEL=a: (opt) calculate the water distribution at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium.







LIST CSTA cases sco-opt SEP=level GLO HEEL=a ROOM=name NOH t-opt


224 (272)


List state of compartments regarding distribution of liquid loads and flooded water. The list iscombination of LIST LIQL and LIST DCOM and it is controlled by LQ CSTA, !FORM and tableoutput options.





HEEL=a: (opt) calculate the water distribution at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium.







LIST DROP cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) SEP=level NOH,

SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n t-opt

List relevant openings. The list is a table controlled by LQ DROP, !FORM and table outputoptions. The available qualifiers for IMMR are IMMR/a, IMMR/EQ+a, IMMR/Z, IMMR/Za andIMMR/ZEQ+a where 'a' is an angle and Z stands for the reserve measured parallel with the z-axisof the ship.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope (see !EXP LISTGEN).

OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) list the given ones or the given type(s) or all. Default all relevant.



NOH: (OPT) no header line(s).

SOP=(s1,s2): (OPT) sort openings acc. to given properties I (=immersion angle), R (=reserve to immersion), X(=x-coordinate), Y (=y-coordinate), Z (=z-coordinate), A (=alphanumeric), T (=type of opening).If merely SOP is given, program assumes s1=I, s2=A. If only one property is given (SOP=s1


225 (272)


accepted instead of SOP=(s1)), s2 is assumed to be A. If this option is missing, the order is thatdefined by the command ROP.

s1: primary property acc. to which the openings are sorted.


MAXNR=n: (opt) list only n openings. If the option SOP is missing, n openings first immersing are listed. If theoption SOP is given, n first openings from the sorted order are listed. Default all.


LIST DPOI cases sco-opt POI=(p,p,...) SEP=level NOH,

SOP=(s1,s2) MAXNR=n t-opt CURVE=name(x-coord)

Like LIST DROP but, instead of the openings, the object of listing is the special points.

CURVE=name(x-coord):

intersect curve at given x-coordinates, generate special points at the intersection points and addthem to listing.

name: name of a geometric curve or freeboard deck edge

x-coord: x-coordinates where to intersect the curve. There are three ways to givecoordinates: x1, x2, x3,...explicit set; D=step, equally spaced values overthe x-range of the curve; xarr, values provided by a calculator array.

LIST DMRG cases sco-opt NOH t-opt

List behaviour of the margin line. The list is a table controlled by LQ DMRG, !FORM and tableoutput options. The following qualifiers for the quantities IMMR and XIMM are available:IMMR/a, XIMM/a, IMMR/EQ+a and XIMM/EQ+a, where 'a' is an angle.


sco-opt: (OPT) options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LIST GEN).



LIST DFRB cases sco-opt NOH t-opt

Like LIST DMRG but, instead of the margin line, the object of listing is the freeboard deck edge.

LIST DLIM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH INTACT t-opt

List minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of draught or trim (= function ofinitial condition). The list is atable controlled by LQ DLIM, !FORM and table output options.


sco-opt: (opt) options STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LISTGEN).



226 (272)




INTACT: (opt) take into account contribution of GM and KG requirements of initial conditions. Default not.


LIST DMGM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH INTACT t-opt

List minimum GM and maximum KG requirements as function of initial condition and damagecase. The list is a table controlled by LQ DMGM, !FORM and table output options.








LIST DSUM cases arg1,arg2 sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH,

INTACT t-opt

List minimum GM requirement, maximum KG requirement and status as function of initialcondition and criterion or initial condition and damage case or damage case and criterion in theform of two dimensional table. The table is controlled by LQ DSUM, !FORM and table outputoptions.


arg1,arg2: (opt) select table arguments, arg1 for rows and arg2 for columns. + at the end of arg1 adds to thetable an extra column containing the global minimum, maximum or status value of each row. + atthe end of arg2 adds to the table an extra row containing the global minimum, maximum or statusvalue of each column.

LOAD,CRIT: table(s) as function of initial condition and criterion

CRIT,LOAD: as above but rows and columns interchanged

T,CRIT: table(s) as function of draught and criterion

CRIT,T: as above but rows and columns interchanged

TR,CRIT: table(s) as function of trim and criterion

CRIT,TR: as above but rows and columns interchanged

T,TR: table(s) as function of draught and trim

TR,T: as above but rows and columns interchanged

LOAD,DAM: table(s) as function of initial condition and damage case


227 (272)


DAM,LOAD: as above but rows and columns interchanged

DAM,T: table(s) as function of damage case and draught

T,DAM: as above but rows and columns interchanged

DAM,TR: table(s) as function of damage case and trim

TR,DAM: as above but rows and columns interchanged

DAM,CRIT: table(s) as function of damage case and criterion

CRIT,DAM: as above but rows and columns interchanged

sco-opt: (opt) options STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LISTGEN).






LIST DLDT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) NOH INTACT t-opt

List status as function of loading condition (initial condition). The list is a table controlled by LQDLDT, !FORM and table output options.





INTACT: (opt) take into account also initial conditions. Default no.


LIST DCRT cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c,...) SEP=level INTACT,

NOH t-opt

List requirement, attained value, status, minimum GM and maximum KG as function of initialcondition, damage case, stage, phase, side and criterion. The list is a table controlled by LQDCRT, !FORM and table output options. Quantity MOMNT may be equipped with a numericqualifier, MOMNT/a, where 'a' is heeling angle (deg) where to calculate the moment value (defaulta=0).





228 (272)




INTACT: (opt) take into list also intact stages (stage before flooding). Default no.



LIST A265 cases LSA=xa LSF=xf B=b2 N1=n1 N2=n2

List required intact GM-values to fulfill the stability criteria of IMO Resolution A.265,Regulation 5. The layout and contents of the list is fixed. The program assumes one compartmentflooding (max. heel 7 degrees) unless otherwise stated by the damage definition commandCOMP. For calculation of 'immersion of the relevant bulkhead deck except in way of floodedcompartments' the program uses the argument FRBD and the extreme x-coordinates of thedamaged compartments unless no other extension is stated by the damage definition commandEXTENT.


LSA=xa: (opt) aft terminal of Ls. Default minimum x of the current hull

LSF=xf: (opt) forward terminal of Ls. Default minimum x of the current hull

B=b2: (opt) breadth B2 (reg.1 (d) (ii)). Default extreme breadth of the current hull

N1=n1: (opt) number of persons N1. Default 0.

N2=n2: (opt) number of persons N2. Default 0.

LIST DPROF case FLP=(t,tr,heel,az) NOHEADER tab-opt

LIST DPROF case MOM=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,az) NOHEADER tab-opt

LIST DPROF case CRIT=name FLP=(t,tr,heel,az) NOHEADER tab-opt

List information about area exposed to the wind. The first alternative is for the model defined as argument (command PROF or WMOD in CR-D), the second one is for the model defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the model defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF). Quantity selection by LQ DPRO.

FLP=(t,tr,heel,az):(opt) in connection with wind models only. Position how the structure is floating: t=draught,tr=trim angle along stability axis, heel=angle around stability axis, az=angle of stability axis. Seecommand WMOD for the viewing direction. If FLP is given, 'case' is ignored.

NOHEADER: (opt.) do not print header line(s).

LIST PSUM PTAB=tab SEP NOH NOA NOTAB t-opt

List summary about the required and attained subdivision index. The summary list containssome general data, required subdivision index, attained subdivision index and table showing


229 (272)


contribution of each draught (each line of the summary input table) to the attained subdivisionindex. The table is controlled by LQ PSUM, !FORM and table output options.

PTAB=tab: name of table where to find the probabilities of the damages (same as the table occurred in thecommand CAL PROB). If the name is without prefix, TAB* is assumed.

SEP: (opt) if, in the column INIT of the summary input table, there are initial condition groups insteadof single initial conditions, the option opens the groups printing all initial conditions on separatelines. Default: one line in the input table corresponds one line in the output table.

NOH: (opt) skip the header lines and the general data lines. Default: print all.

NOA: (opt) if the option is given, the lines showing R and total A are not printed.

NOTAB: (opt) do not print the table showing distribution of A.

t-opt: standard table output options.

LIST PRES PTAB=tab SRULE=r PRULE=r RRULE=r VRULE=r SKIP=lim,

SEP GLO NOH t-opt

The command makes a combination list about results of damage stability and probabilities ofdamages. The list is controlled by LQ PRES, !FORM and table output options.

PTAB=tab: name of table based on which the list is printed. 'tab' is name of a summary table, name of theresult table 'restab' of the command 'CAL TAB=sum, STO=restab...' or name of the result table'restab' of the command 'CAL PROB TAB=restab...'. If the name is without prefix, TAB* isassumed.

SRULE=r PRULE=r RRULE=r VRULE=r SKIP=lim: (opt) these options are needed only if listing is notbased on the result table, i.e. 'tab' of the option PTAB is a summary table. The options have thesame meaning as in the command 'CAL TAB=...', see !EXP CALC.

SEP: (opt) list all stages and phases on separate lines. Default: one line per init/dam corresponding thestage and phase giving the minimum s.

GLO: (opt) x, y, z in the global coord. system. Default ship coord. system. Because all quantities of LISTDRES are supported by LIST PRES, also this option is available.



LIST LMRG cases sco-opt NOH t-opt

The command lists estimate of the greatest draught or trim in each intact condition that still keepsthe margin line dry. The calculation method is approximative; only one aspect (draught or trim) ischanged in each equilibrium condition, the others are kept constant. To get a more accurate value,one should redefine the initial condition with the limiting value, recalculate the cases and list thelimit again. When, after recalculation, no significant change is occurring, the limit is accurateenough.

Note. The draught and trim values are iterated independently of each other; the greatest draughtis calculated in the trim condition of the intact ship and the greatest trim is calculated for the shiphaving the draught of the initial condition.

Note! This list is only a tool for the user to search the limit values. The list gives a prediction howthe ship floats during and after flooding when its intact condition (draught or trim separately) is


230 (272)


changed. Therefore the user should always check each quantity separately by redefining the initialconditions with the limiting values, recalculating the cases and checking the immersion reserve.

In general, it is difficult accurately to predict how the damaged ship floats if the initial condition ischanged. Therefore accurate limits need normally more than one iteration carried out by the user.





LIST LOPE cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) NOH t-opt

The command lists estimate of the greatest draught or trim in each intact condition that still keepsthe openings dry. The calculation method is approximative; only one aspect (draught or trim) ischanged in each equilibrium condition, the others are kept constant. To get a more accurate value,one should redefine the initial condition with the limiting value, recalculate the cases and list thelimit again. When, after recalculation, no significant change is occurring, the limit is accurateenough.

Note. The draught and trim values are iterated independently of each other; the greatest draughtis calculated in the trim condition of the intact ship and the greatest trim is calculated for the shiphaving the draught of the initial condition.

Note! This list is only a tool for the user to search the limit values. The list gives a prediction howthe ship floats during and after flooding when its intact condition (draught or trim separately) ischanged. Therefore the user should always check each quantity separately by redefining the initialconditions with the limiting values, recalculating the cases and checking the immersion reserve.

In general, it is difficult accurately to predict how the damaged ship floats if the initial condition ischanged. Therefore accurate limits need normally more than one iteration carried out by the user.



OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) list the given ones or the given type(s) or all. Default all relevant.




LIST EQT cases sco-opt alt

The command lists report of equalization time acc. to Regulation A.266. The layout of the list isfixed and the cross-flooding arrangements should be defined in the compartment connection table.

cases: (opt) case-parameter 'init/dam'

sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LIST GEN).


231 (272)


alt: listing alternatives:

FULL: full equalization time (default)

HEEL=a: from an angle a degrees to the upright

MARG: from the margin line immersion to the upright

STAGE=name: between the given stage and the previous stage (default the last stage).

LIST DEQT cases sco-opt t-opt

The command lists the same things than LIST EQT but in the form of a table. The list is controlledby LQ DEQT, !FORM and table output options.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LIST GEN).


LIST PROB PTAB=tab

The command lists contents of the probability result table. The contents is listed as such withoutany modification or up-to-date check. Quantity selection by LQ PROB.

PTAB=tab: name of the result table (generated by CAL TAB=... or CAL PROB).

LIST FEVE cases sco-opt OPE ROO SIM EVTYPE ETIME NOH t-opt

The command lists events that took place during the flooding simulation. The applied options limitthe data that is listed.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE and PHASE restricting the scope of output (see !EXP LIST GEN).

OPE=(ope,ope,...):(opt) list the given opening(s). Default is all

ope: name of opening, name of opening group If there is only one element inthe brackets, the brackets may be omitted.

ROO=(room,room,...):(opt) list the given opening(s). Default is all

room: name of room/compartment, if there is only one element in the brackets,the brackets may be omitted.

SIM: (opt) events that are related to the simulation process

EVTYPE=(evt,evt,...):(opt) list the given event types

evt: start of the event type text If there is only one element in the brackets, thebrackets may be omitted.



Scope options sco-opt

The scope of results is normally defined by the case-parameter 'init/dam' or by the command 'SEL


232 (272)


CASE...'.Results of all possible combinations of initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling sides are listed or plotted unless the sets of initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling sides are not restricted by the specific options, sco-opt. If the 'case' parameter is missing in the command, the scope of results is defined by the command SEL, or if no such command is given, by the 'case' parameter which was last given in a calculation or output command. The options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT are scope options and they restrict the scope of results to be listed or plotted in one command. The options have the following form and meaning: INIT=ini : restrict output to the given initial INIT=(ini,ini,...) condition(s); ini is either name of an initial condition or initial condition group. DAM=dam : restrict output to the given damage DAM=(dam,dam,...) case(s); dam is either name of a damage case or damage case group. STAGE=sta : restrict output to the given stage(s); STAGE=(sta,sta,...) the stage before flooding is called INTACT, the progressive stage is called PROGRESSIVE and the stage accumulating water is called ACCWATER. The name *LAST means the last stage of the damage case no matter what its name is. PHASE=pha : restrict output to the given phase(s); PHASE=(pha,pha,...) the intermediate phases are called 1,2,... and the last phase of the stage is called EQ (equilibrium phase of the stage) or LAST (or *LAST). SIDE=side : restrict output to port side (side=PS) or to starboard side (side=SB). ETIME=t restrict output to the given time(s); ETIME=(t1,t2,...) the elapsed time is converted to corresponding stage and phase, time can be given as a string (e.g. 1m or 60s) or as a number (in seconds); applicable only for flooding simulation results NOT=no : no -> INTA, do not list or plot NOT=(no,no,...) results of the stage 'before flooding' INTE, do not list or plot results of the intermediate phases (others than EQ) EQ, do not list or plot results of the equilibrium


233 (272)


phases of stages LAST, do not list or plot results of the last stage PROG, do not list or plot results of the stage PROGRESSIVE

NL open new list

The command makes the subsequent output an independent list. It also allows a number of optionsto be set regarding headers, margin etc. See !EXPL NL/GEN.

NL opt

NP new page

The command causes the subsequent output to start on a new page. See !EXPL NP/GEN.

OLIST List results (old)

The command produces alphanumeric output from the previously calculated cases. The case-parameter has exactly the same meaning as in the "CALCULATE"-command.

Note! There are two categories of lists at the moment:

- old lists which are not able to handle the stability criteria

created in the CR subsystem nor calculation heeling angles ranging from negative angles to positive angles at the same time

- new lists which are purposed to handle new stability criteria

created in CR and which are able to handle calculation heeling angles ranging from negative angles to positive angles at the same time The division of lists will disappear in the future when all lists are modernized. If a damage case is calculated for a set of calculation heeling angles ranging over zero, listing of an old list for such a case is prevented. The command OLIST handles the old lists. The new lists are handled by the command LIST.

OLIST oldlist case ...

The lists SUMMARY, GMTSUM, KGTSUM, ALL, HYD, GMR, CRES, REPORT DCHECKand IMO do not support the new way to handle stability criteria and extension of the range ofcalculation heeling angles to both sides SB and PS at the same time.

OLIST SUMMARY case; Produces summary list of the given calculation case(s). OLIST GMTSUM case NAME=name; List GM-T-summary for selected initgroup/damagegroup case. The task stores the GM limit curve in the data base to be used in other subsystems. The option NAME=name defines the name of the stored curve (default name is GM-LIMIT-CURVE). OLIST KGTSUM case NAME=name; List KG-T-summary


234 (272)


for selected initgroup/damagegroup case. The task stores the KG limit curve in the data base to be used in other subsystems. The option NAME=name defines the name of the stored curve (default name is GM-LIMIT-CURVE). OLIST ALL case AREA=range MAXROP=nr List the comprehensive result list of the given case(s). If the option AREA=range is given, the program writes out maximum GZ and area of positive GZ within the given range.

AREA=range: (optional) define range for max. GZ and area. There are four alternatives for range:

EQ+ang: from the equilibrium (first intercept) ang degrees forward

EQ-ang: between the first intercept and angle 'ang'

ang1-ang2: from ang1 to ang2

ang1+ang2: from ang1 ang2 degrees forward.

MAXROP=nr: (optional) list data about nr most critical opening, default all. The relevant openings are sorted acc.to the angle of immersion and nr most critical are listed.

OLIST HYD = subgroup of ALL, GM requirements missing.

OLIST GMR = subgroup of ALL, GZ-curves not printed.

OLIST CRES case scope;

List compressed results by means of the table output. See LQ for the quantities available.

scope: (optional) scope of listing. Default = the final stage.

STAGES: list quantities for all stages. Use the quantity STAGE to distinguishdifferent stages.

PHASES: list quantities for all stages and phases. Use the quantities STAGE andPHASE to distinguish different stages and phases.

OLIST REPORT case NOR MAXROP=nr

MAXROP=nr: (optional) list data about nr most critical opening, default all. The relevantopenings are sorted acc. to reserve to immersion and nr most critical are listed.

List a short report on each calculation case given by the case-parameter. If the program can find in the project data base a text element under the name 'init-damage', e.g. I1-D10, it is added to the report as such.

The option NOR makes the list in Norwegian.

OLIST DCHECK case;

Print a short list about masses before flooding and in the final stage.

OLIST IMO opt;


235 (272)


Print subdivision index list according to SOLAS Chapter II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1. You can finddata controlling calculation by calling DES IMO. Any of the items must not be undefined. Formore info about data items, see corresponding explanation texts.

MINGM : (opt) calculate minimum intact GM which assures compliance with R.

TYPE print text in the list

The command generates a text line in the list.

TYPE text

text : contents of the line.

17.5 Plotting functions

DRW Arrangement oriented drawing

This command draws sections of components of arrangements or otherwise selected objects,according to the last SETUP command. The setup determines the way of drawing (=intersectionto use), the layout and possibly rules for what objects belong to given parts. Filling, adding ofidentifications etc. is specified separately by commands ID, FILL or command options.

Plotting according to standard macro is done by !ADD .id, macro alternatives are got by !ADD .CAT and !ADD .id ? gives explanations of a given macro.

DRW parts objects options

DRW of the drawing task. See !EXPL DRW/GEN or !EXPL DRW/G21.

The special alternatives of DRW for the DA-subsystem are:

DRW parts MARG PEN=p ZRANGE=rng CLOSE=OFF

The command shows how the current argument margin line is defined. In the y-projection, thewhole margin line is shown. In the x-projection, the intersection points of the margin line and thesection are illustrated by by circle markers (size controlled by text height). In the z-projection,that part of the margin line is shown, which is within the range of the section. The range of the z-section is 0.2 m below the section and 2 m above the section or that given by the oprion ZRANGE.

parts: (opt) specifies what parts of the setup are concerned. Default all.

n: the n:th part of setup

n,m: parts n to m of setup

PEN=p: (opt) logical pen code for margin line in y- and z-projections.

ZRANGE=rng: range of the z-section. Default 0.2 m below and 2 m above the section.

(z1,z2): lower and upper limit of the range

dz: range is dz meters below and above the section.

CLOSE=OFF: (opt) the drawing is not opened or closed to make it possible to add other drawing components toit.

DRW parts OPEN OPE=(op,op,...) XRAN=xrng YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng,


236 (272)


IDO=i CLOSE=OFF The command shows how openings are defined. In different parts, only the openings that are within the range of the section are shown (see options XRAN, YRAN and ZRAN).




OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) restrict the set of openings to the given ones or to the given type(s).

op: name of opening, name of opening group or type of opening UN, WEor WA. If there is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may beomitted. Default all relevant openings.

XRAN=xrng: range of the x-section. Default 2 m on both sides of the section.

(x1,x2): limits of the range in ascending order (m).

dx: range is dx meters on both sides of the section.

YRAN=yrng: range of the y-section. Default whole breadth of the ship.

(y1,y2): limits of the range in ascending order (m).

dy: range is dy meters on both sides of the section.

ZRAN=zrng: range of the z-section. Default 0.2 m below and 2 m above the section.

(z1,z2): limits of the range in ascending order (m).

dz: range is dz meters on both sides of the section.

IDO=i: i=ON, show id. of openings; i=OFF show openings without identification. Default = ON.


DRW parts FLO cases STAGE=INTACT

The command shows how initial conditions are defined. For more information, see the commandDRW FLO, plot floating position.

DRW parts DAM damcases FFIL=code STA=st ASTA=st CLOSE=OFF SEP=s PENE

The command shows how damage cases are defined i.e. damaged compartments in different partsof the setup. Optionally, the compartments that may be flooded through openings in the stagePROGRESSIVE, are shown in the same drawing if the parameter 'damcases' is replaced by thecase parameter 'init/dam'.




damcases: (opt) name of a single damage case, name of a damage case group or init/dam for showingcompartments that may be flooded progressively.


237 (272)


FFIL=code: (opt) logical fill code for damaged and progressively flooded compartments. If 'code' is ofform (code1,code2), the first code of for the damaged compartments ant the second one for theprogressively flooded compartments.

STA=st: (opt) show compartments that are damaged in the given stage 'st' and in the stages before it.Default all compartments in all stages.

st: name of stage.

ASTA=st: (opt) show only the compartments that occur explicitly in the specified stage.

st: name of stage.


SEP=s: (opt) s=ON, all plots are separate drawings; s=OFF, all plots are subdrawings. Default = OFF.Note that this option is ignored if CLOSE=OFF.

PENE: add penetration to the drawing if damage definition has any.

DRW parts FLO cases sco-opt SIDE=s OPEN=(op,op,...) XRAN=xrng,

YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng IDO=i HEEL=h MARG=pen ROT=r CLOSE=OFF, SEP=s GROUND=g WDFI=code FFIL=code WLPE=code LFIL=l AFIL=code The command shows the floating position, margin line and openings in any stage and phase of flooding.





sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE and NOT restricting the scope of output (see !EXP DRWGEN).

SIDE=s: (opt) in y-projections, plot the water line on the gives side(s); s=PS, s=SB or s=(PS,SB). Default:intersection line of the water plane and y-section.

OPEN=(op,op,...):(opt) add the given openings to the floating position drawings.

op: name of opening, name of opening group, type of opening UN, WE,WA or ALL (all relevant openings). If there is only one element inthe brackets, the brackets may be omitted. The openings are shown indifferent parts as explained in the command DRW OPE.

XRAN=xrng: range of the x-section. Default 2 m on both sides of the section. Only the openings that are locatedwithin the the range are shown.


dx: range is dx meters on both sides of the section.

YRAN=yrng: range of the y-section. Default whole breadth of the ship. Only the openings that are located withinthe the range are shown.



238 (272)


dy: range is dy meters on both sides of the section.

ZRAN=zrng: range of the z-section. Default 0.2 m below and 2 m above the section. Only the openings and thatpart of the margin line which are located within the range are shown.


dz: range is dz meters on both sides of the section.

IDO=i: (opt) i=ON, show id. of openings; i=OFF show openings without identification. Default ON.

HEEL=a: (opt) plot the floating position at an angle 'a' instead of steady equilibrium.




MARG=pen: (opt) add the current margin line to the floating position drawings. pen is logical pen code forthe line in y- and z-projections. If pen is omitted, the line is green. The margin line is shown indifferent parts as explained in the command DRW MARG.

ROT=r: (opt) r=ON, rotate the ship, keep the waterline horizontal; r=OFF, rotate the waterline, keep theship horizontal. Default = ON.

CLOSE=OFF:(opt)

the drawing is not opened or closed to make it possible to add other drawing components to it.

SEP=s: (opt) s=ON, all plots are separate drawings; s=OFF, all plots are subdrawings. Default = OFF.Note that this option is ignored if CLOSE=OFF.

GROUND=g: (opt) g=ON, plot ground (if any); g=OFF, do not plot ground. Default = ON provided DA forgrounded ship is installed.

WDFI=code: (opt) logical fill code for wetted deck in z-projections. Default = no fill.

FFIL=code: (opt) logical fill code for inflooded water. Default FLW.

WLPE=code: (opt) logical pen code for waterline. Default red. If code is OFF, the waterline is not plotted at all.

LFIL=l: (opt) l=ON, fill liq. load tanks with colour code of loads; l=OFF, no filling. Default = ON.

AFIL=code: (opt) logical fill code for accumulated water. Default RED.

DRW FLO cases LFIL=ON

For example, this command shows liquid loads. See the command DRW FLO, plot floatingposition.

DRW FLO cases FFIL=FLW

For example, this command shows damaged compartments and inflooded water. For moreinformation, see the command DRW FLO.

DRW FLO cases OPE=ALL


239 (272)


For example, this command shows openings. See the command DRW FLO, plot floating position.

DRW FLO cases MARG

For example, this command shows the margin line. See the command DRW FLO, plot floatingposition.

DRW parts MAXW cases sco-opt SIDE=s OPEN=(op,op,...) XRAN=xrng

YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng IDO=i HEEL=h MARG=pen CLOSE=OFF WDFI=code, WLPE=code The command plots the maximum water surface, i.e. the highest water level that is combined from all water lines included in the given cases 'init/dam'. The generated water surface is stored in the data base under the name MAXWS(init/dam).

Options: as in DRW FLO (SEP not available).

DRW parts SUBD NAME=tab XRAN=xrng YRAN=yrng ZRAN=zrng PEN=p,

HSD=c CLOSE=OFF The command shows the surfaces of the subdivision.




NAME=tab: (opt) name of table where to find the subdivision (name without prefix). Default: name from thereference system (if any).

XRAN=xrng: (opt) range of the surfaces in the y- and z-sections. Default: the length of the zone(s) the surfacebelongs to.


YRAN=yrng: (opt) range of the surfaces in the x- and z-sections. Default: breadht of the ship.


ZRAN=zrng: (opt) range of the surfaces in the x- and y-sections. Default: height of the ship.


PEN=p: (opt) logical pen code for the surfaces.

HSD=c: (opt) Colour for plotting the subdivision draught, e.g HSD=RED



The scope of results is normally defined by the case-parameter 'init/dam' or by the command 'SEL CASE...'.Results of all possible combinations of initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling


240 (272)


sides are listed or plotted unless the sets of initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling sides are not restricted by the specific options, sco-opt. If the 'case' parameter is missing in the command, the scope of results is defined by the command SEL, or if no such command is given, by the 'case' parameter which was last given in a calculation or output command. The options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT are scope options and they restrict the scope of results to be listed or plotted in one command. The options have the following form and meaning: INIT=ini : restrict output to the given initial INIT=(ini,ini,...) condition(s); ini is either name of an initial condition or initial condition group. DAM=dam : restrict output to the given damage DAM=(dam,dam,...) case(s); dam is either name of a damage case or damage case group. STAGE=sta : restrict output to the given stage(s); STAGE=(sta,sta,...) the stage before flooding is called INTACT, the progressive stage is called PROGRESSIVE and the stage accumulating water is called ACCWATER. The name *LAST means the last stage of the damage case no matter what its name is. PHASE=pha : restrict output to the given phase(s); PHASE=(pha,pha,...) the intermediate phases are called 1,2,... and the last phase of the stage is called EQ (equilibrium phase of the stage). SIDE=side : restrict output to port side (side=PS) or to starboard side (side=SB). NOT=no : no -> INTA, do not list or plot NOT=(no,no,...) results of the stage 'before flooding' INTE, do not list or plot results of the intermediate phases (others than EQ) EQ, do not list or plot results of the equilibrium phases of stages PROG, do not list or plot results of the stage PROGRESSIVE

EDR End of drawing

Finish the current drawing.

EDR S : finish the current drawing, start a new one and restore


241 (272)


the previous SETUP.

EDR R : as S, but also redraw the arrangement base drawing.

FIGURE Insert figure into the result list

The command allows a stored drawing or currently made graphic output to be added to the outputlist.

FIG * SIZE du dv, pos

This form inserts the last graphic component made in DA. In order to make this possible, graphicoutput must be directed to the intermediate file (!GR F or !GR +F), and the drawing concernedmust be either currently open, or closed but without a new being opened. The result from thePLOT command is always closed, while the command EDR is needed for plots made by DRW andSETUP.

FIG name ...

This form inserts a drawing stored in the data base. For more detailed information about this form,see !EXPL FIG/GEN.

FILL Filling control

By this command one can control how the rooms are filled in the PLOT DAM- and DRW-drawings. The command is the same as in the drawing task and more information you can get by !EXPL FIL/G22.

ID Make identification markings

The command is the same as in the drawing task. For more information, see !EXPL ID/G22.

PLD Plot diagram

This command produces graphic output using the general diagram output module. The quantitiesto be included are controlled with command PQ while the graphic result can be controlled withcommand POO.

Plotting according to standard macro is done by !ADD .id, macro alternatives are got by !ADD .CAT and !ADD .id ? gives explanations of a given macro.

PLD GZ cases sco-opt OPE=(op,op,...) MAX=nr SEP=level POO p-opt

The command plots stability curves as function of calculation heeling angles. Note that thequalifiers UN, WE, WA and 'oname' are available for the quantity IMRES.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT that restrict the extent of output (see !EXPPLD GEN).

OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) add the given openings to the drawings.

op: name of opening, name of opening group, type of opening or ALL. Ifthere is only one element in the brackets, the brackets may be omitted.Default all relevant openings.

MAX=nr: (opt) show in the diagram nr the most critical openings (those immersing first). Default allrelevant.


242 (272)


SEP=level: separate curves into different drawings as subdrawings. Default: all curves are subdrawings in onedrawing.

INI: each initial condition forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that initial condition are its subdrawings

DAM: each damage case forms an individual drawing and all curves belongingto that damage case are its subdrawings

CASE: each calculation case init/dam forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that case are its subdrawings

STAGE: each stage in each case forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that combination are its subdrawings

PHASE: each phase in each stage and case forms an individual drawing and allcurves belonging to that combination are its subdrawings

SEP: each curve forms an individual drawing

POO: (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow.

p-opt: (opt) standard plot output options.

PLD DLIM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c...) SEP=alt INLIM=iname,

NAME=name INTACT POO p-opt This command draws the GM and/or KG limit curves. The quantities T, TR and DISP may be used as arguments. The quantities GM and KG are the actual GM- and KG-values of the loading conditions selected by the argument command LOAD in CR and the quantity LCOND contains the names of the selected loading conditions. The quantities GM, KG and LCOND are available for marking loading conditions in the diagram (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG).


sco-opt: options STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT that restrict the extent of output (see !EXP PLD GEN).

CRIT=(c,c...): (opt) restrict the set of relevant criteria to the given ones. c is either a single criterion or a group. Ifonly one name is given, the brackets may may be omitted.

SEP=alt: (opt) plot limit curves separately. Default: plot combined curve. Note! This option works properlyonly if there is an explicit range in POO of the plot.

SEP=DAM: Plot one limit curve for each damage case. The names of damage casesare available from the short header.

SEP=CRI: Plot one limit curve for each criterion. The names of criteria are availablefrom the short header.

SEP: Plot all curves separately, i.e. one curve for all combinations of damagecases, stages, phases, sides and criteria.

INLIM=iname: (opt) add the limit curve of intact stability to the drawing; iname = name of the limit curve madein the environment INTACT. Default none. Remember to select also the corresponding quantitiesGMLIMIN and KGLIMIN.


243 (272)


NAME=name: (opt) save the limit curve in the secondary data base under the given name, default GM-DALIM.Tor KG-DALIM.T for the functions of draught and GM-DALIM.TR or KG-DALIM.TR for thefunctions of trim.

INTACT: (opt.) take into account contribution of initial conditions to the limiting values.

POO: (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow.

p-opt: (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.

PLD DCRC cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c...) crt=(o,o...)... OPE=(op,op...),

MAX=nr SEP=level INTACT POO p-opt

The command makes criterion check plots, i.e. drawings where criterion dependent additions aredrawn on the stability curve background (stability curves drawn for the actual GM). For helpingthe user to add desired texts to the plots, the command assigns two array variables: CRPLDSTRfor strings and CRPLDVAL for numeric values.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT that restrict the extent of output (see !EXPPLD GEN).

CRIT=(c,c...): (opt) restrict the set of relevant criteria to the given ones. c is either a single criterion or a group. Ifonly one name is given, the brackets may be omitted. Default all.

crt=(o,o...): (opt) control for additions and extra markings. These options overrule the control data given indefinition of criteria. Because additions depend on the type of the criterion, every criterion typehas own set of options. The type of criterion 'crt' is one of the following alternatives: MAXGZ,MAXHEEL, MINAREA, MINGM, POSMAX, DOWNFLD, RANGE, VSTAB, RESFRB,RESMRG, RESFLD, ARATIO1, ARATIO2, RESDYN, DYNARM, GZRATIO. The options 'o'must be selected from the following set:

TH=h: text height of additional markings. Default that one selected by diagramplotting.

PEN=p: select pen code for additions, p=logical pen code. Default P1011.

HPEN=p: select pen code for auxiliary lines (usually horizontal), p=logical pencode. Default P1011.

ID=c: conrol for (numeric) identification; c=ON, add standard identification(default); c=OFF, no identification; c='text', use the given text.

ARROW: draw pointers as arrows. Default bare line.

U=u: horizontal coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line. Default:line is vertical.

V=v: vertival coordinate for the starting point of the pointer line.

FLL=c: raster code for area filling, c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

FLA=c: raster code for filling area 'a', c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

FLB=c: raster code for filling area 'b', c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

FLC=c: raster code for filling area 'c', c<0 means colour. Default 1001.

IDA=c: conrol for identification area 'a'. See ID= for alternatives.


244 (272)


IDB=c: conrol for identification area 'b'. See ID= for alternatives.

IDC=c: conrol for identification area 'c'. See ID= for alternatives.

The following table shows the criterion types and the available options, + = available, - = not available. TH PEN HPEN ID ARROW U V FLL FLA FLB FLC IDA IDB IDC MAXGZ + + + + + - - - - - - - - - GZRATIO + + + + + - - - - - - - - - MAXHEEL + + - + + + + - - - - - - - MINAREA + - - + - - - + - - - - - - MINGM + + + + + - - - - - - - - - POSMAX + + + + + - - - - - - - - - DOWNFLD + + - + + - - - - - - - - - RANGE + + + + + + - - - - - - - - VSTAB + + - + + + + - - - - - - - RESFRB + + + + + - - - - - - - - - RESMRG + + + + + - - - - - - - - - RESFLD + + + + + - - - - - - - - - ARATIO1 + - - - - - - - + + - + + - ARATIO2 + - - - - - - - + + + + + + RESDYN + - - - - - - - + + - + + - DYNARM + + + + + - - - - - - - - -

OPE=(op,op,...):(opt) add the given openings to the drawings.


MAX=nr: show nr openings first immersing. Default all.

SEP=level: separate curves into different drawings as subdrawings. Default: all curves are subdrawings in onedrawing.

INI: each initial condition forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that initial condition are its subdrawings

DAM: each damage case forms an individual drawing and all curves belongingto that damage case are its subdrawings

CASE: each calculation case init/dam forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that case are its subdrawings

STAGE: each stage in each case forms an individual drawing and all curvesbelonging to that combination are its subdrawings

PHASE: each phase in each stage and case forms an individual drawing and allcurves belonging to that combination are its subdrawings

CRIT: each criterion in each phase, stage and case forms an individual drawingand all curves belonging to that combination are its subdrawings


245 (272)


SIDE: each curve forms an individual drawing

SEP: each curve forms an individual drawing

INTACT: (opt.) add initial conditions to the set of drawings.

POO: (opt) delimiter needed if plot output options follow


PLD DMGM cases sco-opt CRIT=(c,c...) crt=(o,o...)... OPE=(op,op...),

MAX=nr SEP=level INTACT POO p-opt The command makes minimum GM check plots. The check plots are same as those made by PLD CRC but the background is drawn for the minimum GM.

PLD DPRO case POO options

PLD DPRO case MOM=name POO options

PLD DPRO case CRIT=name POO options

The command plots the lateral profile and the waterline of the loading condition. The first alternative is for the profile defined as argument (command PROF), the second one is for the profile defined in connection with the given moment (parameter PROF=) and the third one is for the profile defined in connection with the given criterion (type MINGM, REQ BY PROF). Note that the quantities ZCG and ID are available for marking in the drawing the center of area of the part above the waterline and below the waterline (use POO-options MARK, NOCURVE and TAG). The waterline which divides the lateral area into two parts is taken from the initial condition.

case: (opt) case-parameter 'init/dam'.


options: (opt) standard plot output options in addition to or replacing those given with command POO.

PLD DRES cases sco-opt POO p-opt

The command plots different quantities as a function of x. The argument x-coordinates comefrom the damages; x of the damage is in the middle of its extent. The function value at x is theminimum or maximum of all values occuring at the same x. All damages having the middle pointof the extent closer than LREF/100 to each other, get the same x. The maximum is selected for thequantities T, TR, TRX, TRA, TRXA, HEEL, HEELX, MINGM, MINGM0, MMS and WFL, theminimum is selected for the other numeric quantities. The alphanumeric quantities are selectedaccording to the corresponding numeric quantities: DCRI by MINGM, FLOPEN by FA, FLUNOPby FAUN, FLWEOP by FAWE, OPEN by RESFLD and IMOSEV by SFACC. SEVERITY is theworst severity and STAT is the worst status occurring at the x.


sco-opt: options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT restrict the extent of output (see !EXPPLD GEN).



246 (272)



PLD TRES ini/dam POO p-opt

The command plots different quantities of one damage as function of time (quantity ETIME). Theresults are available if the damage is calculated by simulation or the phases are defined by timesteps.

ini/damage: calculation case




The scope of results is normally defined by the case-parameter 'init/dam' or by the command 'SEL CASE...'.Results of all possible combinations of initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling sides are listed or plotted unless the sets of initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and heeling sides are not restricted by the specific options, sco-opt. If the 'case' parameter is missing in the command, the scope of results is defined by the command SEL, or if no such command is given, by the 'case' parameter which was last given in a calculation or output command. The options INIT, DAM, STAGE, PHASE, SIDE and NOT are scope options and they restrict the scope of results to be listed or plotted in one command. The options have the following form and meaning: INIT=ini : restrict output to the given initial INIT=(ini,ini,...) condition(s); ini is either name of an initial condition or initial condition group. DAM=dam : restrict output to the given damage DAM=(dam,dam,...) case(s); dam is either name of a damage case or damage case group. STAGE=sta : restrict output to the given stage(s); STAGE=(sta,sta,...) the stage before flooding is called INTACT, the progressive stage is called PROGRESSIVE and the stage accumulating water is called ACCWATER. The name *LAST means the last stage of the damage case no matter what its name is. PHASE=pha : restrict output to the given phase(s); PHASE=(pha,pha,...) the intermediate phases are called 1,2,... and the last phase of the stage is called EQ (equilibrium phase of the stage). SIDE=side : restrict output to port side (side=PS) or to starboard side (side=SB). NOT=no : no -> INTA, do not list or plot NOT=(no,no,...) results of the


247 (272)


stage 'before flooding' INTE, do not list or plot results of the intermediate phases (others than EQ) EQ, do not list or plot results of the equilibrium phases of stages PROG, do not list or plot results of the stage PROGRESSIVE

PLOT Plot according to macro

PLOT .id

Plot according to standard macro. For alternatives, use PLOT .CAT. For explanations of a givenmacro, use PLOT .id ?.

TEXT Add text to drawings

This command adds text into the PLOT DAM- and DRW-drawings. The command is the same asin the drawing task and more information you can get by !EXPL TEXT/G21.

TH text height

The height of texts not controlled otherwise is defined by this command. Without parameter, thecurrent height is displayed. The command affects only on texts produced by TEXT, ID and DRW.

TH height;

height: height of text in the ship scale. A preceding asterisk defines text height directly in the dimensionsof the drawing.

17.6 Administration and auxiliary functions

CATALOG Produce a catalog list

The command produces a catalog of stored data

CATALOG type;

type :

DAMAGE : damage cases

INIT : initial conditions

CRIT : stability criteria

OPENING : openings

MARGIN : margin lines

FRBD : freeboard deck edges

DGROUP : damage groups


248 (272)


IGROUP : initial condition groups

RGROUP : room groups

OGROUP : opening groups

CGROUP : stability criteria groups

MOMENT : external moments

ARGUMENTS : argument sets

SUBDIVISION : subdivisions,

RESULT : calculated results. Searching of stored results

can be limited to those fulfilling the criterion INIT=init and/or DAM=damcase by adding these options to the end of the command, e.g. CAT RES INIT=T5.5.

IMODATA : control data for SOLAS II-1, Part B-1, Reg. 25-1.

COPY Copy data from the given project and version to the current one

The task fetches selected data from the given project and version and stores them to the currentproject and version. If copying is carried out in the current project from one version to another,project parameter is not needed.

COPY object parameters

The different objects and their parameters are listed below.

COPY INIT name vers/project

Copy initial condition(s). Name is either name of a single init or name of an init group.

COPY DAM name vers/project

Copy damage case(s). Name is either name of a single damage case or name of an damage group.

COPY MARGIN name vers/project

Copy margin line.

COPY FRBD name vers/project

Copy freeboard deck edge.

COPY OPENING name vers/project

Copy opening(s). Name is either name of a single opening or name of an opening group.

COPY CRIT vers/project

Copy stability criterion.

COPY IGROUP name vers/project

Copy initial group.

COPY DGROUP name vers/project


249 (272)


Copy damage group.

COPY RGROUP name vers/project

Copy room group.

COPY OGROUP name vers/project

Copy opening group.

COPY CGROUP name vers/project

Copy group of stability criteria.

COPY MOMENT name vers/project

Copy external moment.

COPY ARG name vers/project

Copy argument set.

COPY SUBDIVISION name vers/project

Copy subdivision.

COPY RESULTS init/dam vers/project

Copy results. Parameters init and dam are either single cases or groups. Note that init and damagedefinitions must exist in the receiving version/project.

DELETE Delete named data

Delete from the data base the named data of the given type.

DELETE type name;

type : data type : DAM,INI,OPEN,CRI,MAR,FRB,DGR,IGR,RGR,OGR,CGR,MOM, ARG, SUB,RESULT or IMODATA.

name : name of single data item or name of group in connection with DAM, INI, OPEN or CRI.

DELETE RESULT OBSOLETE

Deletes all obsolete results. The result description is if any of the following components is youngerthe the results or it is missing: hull, liquid load, sliding cargo or damaged compartments, initialcondition, loading condition if referred, damage, openings if mode is progressive. The obsoleteresults are maked with *** OUT OF DATE *** in CAT RES.

DELETE DAM dgr D DB1

This special case removes the duplicate damages from a damage group. The damages are identicalif their internal formats are identical, i.e. the damages are defined exactly in the same way. Theresult is a damage group having no duplicate damages. The text description of the group (DESDGR) shows the removed damages with preceding minus sign '-'.

dgr: name of the damage group

DB1: (optional) the duplicate damages are removed also from the data base.

DELETE DAM dgr DR DB1


250 (272)


This special case is otherwise same as the preceding one but the damages are considered identicalif the damaged rooms are same in corresponding stages.

DESCRIPTION Print stored data in input format

Print description of the named data of the given type (DAMAGE, INIT, OPENING,MARGIN, FRBD, CRIT, DGROUP, IGROUP, RGROUP, OGROUP, CGROUP, MOMENT,SUBDIVISION, IMODATA).

DESCRIPTION type name +

type : (opt) type of data as specified above. The type is not necessary if the name is unambiguous, i.e.there is only one type of data under the given name.

name : name is same than that given in connection with the DEFINE-task. If in the commands 'DESDAM name', 'DES INI name', 'DES OPE name' and 'DES CRIT name' name is a group name,descriptions of all damages, inits, openings or criteria included in the group is printed on thescreen. If type=IMODATA and name is missing, the default name STD is used.

+ : (opt) show additional information (hydrostatics and stability) for initial conditions. Thisinformation is available only if the initial conditions are up-to-date.

EDIT -> Edit stored data in input format

Edit description of the named data of the given type (DAMAGE, INIT, OPENING,MARGIN, FRBD, CRIT, DGROUP, IGROUP, RGROUP, OGROUP, CGROUP, MOMENT,SUBDIVISION, IMODATA).

EDIT type name;

type : (opt) type of data as specified above. The type is not necessary if the name is unambiguous, i.e.there is only one type of data under the given name.

name : name is same than that given in connection with the DEFINE-task. If in the commands 'DESDAM name', 'DES INI name', 'DES OPE name' and 'DES CRI name' name is a group name,descriptions of all damages, inits, openings or criteria included in the group can be edited at thesame time. If type=IMODATA and name is missing, the default name STD is used.

END End task

Finish task and return to the calling level (one level upwards).

RESCUE Rescue results

The task makes the results, which are not up to date, again available by the print- and plot-commands. The case-parameter in the command has the same meaning as in the CALCULATE-command.

RESCUE case;

SEL Select cases for output

The main purpose of the command SELECT is to assign array variables which tell to the user inthe form of name lists what initial conditions, damage cases, stages, phases and sides are includedin the extent of output and to give an opportunity to use these arrays in macros.

The secondary purpose is to activate calculation cases or different subgroups, i.e. instead of the output command options 'cases', 'INI=', 'DAM=', 'STAGE=',


251 (272)


'PHASE=' and 'SIDE=' one may use SELECT-commands (if SELECT is given, the corresponding command option overrules it). Note that, at first one has to select the calculation cases, i.e. all initial condition - damage case combinations one is aiming to list or plot, by the command SEL CASE. After this other alternatives of SEL are available.

SEL CASE init/dam ORD=o

The command activates the given set of calculation cases and assigns the following variables:

DASIGR : name of initial condition (group) 'init' DASDGR : name of damage case (group) 'dam' DASCASE : list of calculation cases, i.e. all combinations 'i/d' appearing in 'init/dam' DASINIT : list of all initial conditions appearing in 'init/dam' DASDAM : list of all damage cases appearing in 'init/dam' After this command one may select subgroups by the command SEL INIT, SEL DAM, SEL STAGE, SEL PHASE and SEL SIDE.

init/dam: normal case parameter occurring in calculation and output commands where 'init' is name of aninitial condition or initial condition group and 'dam' is name of a damage case or damage casegroup.

ORD=DAM: order DASCASE acc. to damage cases

ORD=INIT: order DASCASE acc. to initial conditions (default).

SEL CASE TAB=tab ONLY=s STO=tab1

The command activates the set of calculation cases that is specified in the column CASE of thegiven table and assigns the variables DASCASE, DASINIT and DASDAM.

TAB=tab: name of table where to find the column CASE. If the name is without prefix, TAB* is assumed.

ONLY=s: (opt) (connected to probabilistic damage stability) The option defines the criterion how to removethe extra cases from the table that is purposed to be used in calculation of the attained subdivisionindex.

MINS: select the cases having the minimum s and remove the others.

NOZ: select the cases having s>0 and remove those having s=0.

(MINS,NOZ): select the cases having the minimum s and s>0 at the the same time,remove the others.

(MINS,MAXHEEL): select the cases having the minimum s and, if there are many having thesame minimum s, among these select the one having the greatest heelangle.

(MINS,MAXHEEL,NOZ):as above but select the cases having s>0.

STO=tab1: (opt) name of table where to store the selected cases and related probability data. If the name iswithout prefix, TAB* is assumed. This option is used with the option ONLY. May be tab1=tab. Ifthis option is missing, the stripped table is not stored.


252 (272)


SEL CASE

List selected cases.

SEL CASE OFF

SEL CASE -

Deactivate selection and delete variables.

SEL INIT name,name,...

The command activates the subgroup of initial conditions and assigns the variable DASINIT.

name: name of a single initial condition or name of an initial condition group.

SEL INIT DAM=dam

The command activates the subgroup of initial conditions that are relevant in the damage case, i.e.defined within the damage case by the statement INIT. The command also assigns the variableDASINIT.

DAM=dam: name of a damage case.

SEL INIT

List selected initial conditions.

SEL INIT OFF

SEL INIT -

Deactivate selection and delete variable.

SEL DAM name,name,...

The command activates the subgroup of damage cases and assigns the variable DASDAM.

name: name of a single damage case or name of a damage case group.

SEL DAM INIT=ini

The command activates the subgroup of all damage cases belonging to the given initial conditionand assigns the variable DASDAM.

INIT=ini: name of an initial condition.

SEL DAM

List selected damage cases.

SEL DAM OFF

SEL DAM -



253 (272)


SEL STAGE name,name,...

The command activates the subgroup of the given stages and assigns the variable DASSTAGE.

name: name of a stage.

SEL STAGE DAM=dam

The command activates the subgroup of all stages belonging to the given damage case and assignsthe variable DASSTAGE.


SEL STAGE

List selected stages.

SEL STAGE OFF

SEL STAGE -


SEL PHASE id,id,...

The command activates the subgroup of the given phases and assigns the variable DASPHASE.

id: identification of a phase 1, 2, ... or EQ.

SEL PHASE DAM=dam STAGE=sta

The command activates the subgroup of all stages belonging to the given stage of the givendamage case and assigns the variable DASPHASE.


STAGE=sta: name of a stage in the given damage case.

SEL PHASE

List selected phases.

SEL PHASE OFF

SEL PHASE -


SEL SIDE SB PS

The command activates the given side(s) (PS, SB or both) and assigns the variable DASSIDE.

SEL SIDE

SEL SIDE OFF

SEL SIDE -


254 (272)



17.7 Subtasks and connection to other subsystems

CR -> enter stability criteria subtask (CR)

The command enters CR, copies the arguments HULL, HEEL, ROP, MARGIN, RHO andcalculation options from DA to CR. Returning to DA happens by calling DA, OK or END.

CROSS -> Calculate cross-flooding pipes (Res. MSC.245(83))

CROSS init/damage

The task calculates the cross-flooding time in the given initial condition - damage casecombination acc. to Res. MSC.245(83). The cross-flooding time can be calculated on thefollowing conditions:

1. The damage case contains at least two flooding stages, first of which is considered to be the situation before cross-flooding, and the last is the situation after cross-flooding. 2. The rooms connected by the cross-flooding pipe must be flooded in the studied damage case.

DR -> Enter to the drawing task

IMO -> Start calculation of subdivision index (IMO A.265)

Enter to the calculation block of the subdivision index according to the regulations of IMO A.265.Note! This command enters to the old function to calculate the subdivision index. For the newmethod, see the chapter 'Probabilistic damage stability' in the documents of DA.

LDA -> Enter LD to change the current initial condition

The command is purposed to let the user to change the current initial condition in the instantdamage stability mode without leaving DA. To make changing easy, a special data element shouldbe found in the project data base, see documents.

LDA;

SCAN -> enter list scanner (IOF).

For more details, see !EXPL SCAN/GEN. SCAN SEND just sends the list to the printer. Note: thecurrent result list will be closed.

SRV -> enter services subtask

TAB -> Enter table calculation task (TAB)

17.8 Data for subdivision and damage stability of cargo ships

B Breadth of the ship (Subdiv. index of cargo ships)

Breadth of the ship (25-2, 3).


255 (272)


B b;

IDGR Damage cases contributing to subdiv. index of cargo ships

Damage case group containing the cases contributing to the attained subdivision index A. NOTEthat the damage cases must contain COMP-data.

IDGR name;

name: name of damage case group made by DGR.

IIGR Initial conditions used in calc. of subdiv. index of cargo ships

Initial condition group containing two conditions corresponding the deepest load line and thepartial load line (reg. 25-2, 1.2 and 1.3).

IIGR name;

name: name of the initial condition group made by IGR.

LS Subdivision length (Subdiv. index of cargo ships)

Subdivision length of the ship (reg. 25-2, 2.1).

LS l;

NCOMP Max. number of adjacent compartments (Subdiv. index of cargo

ships) Mmax. number of adjacent compartments. This data guides automatic damage casegeneration and appears in lists as additional information.

NCOMP n;

XALS Aft terminal of Ls (Subdiv. index of cargo ships)

Aft terminal of Ls (reg. 25-2, 2.3).

XALS x;

These data belong to the old way to calculate subdivision index. See the chapter 'Probabilistic damage stability' for thenew method.

17.9 Commands related to Onboard-NAPA

FLOOD -> Enter instant DA and continue with the current case

The command starts or continues definition of the current damage case. One of the followingdamage cases is current: the case previously handled in instant damage stability, the case selectedby the USE DAM command, the case given as the command parameter or the default damagecase FLOOD_CASE. Successful running of instant DA needs an initial condition made current byUSE INIT and, if it is run in graphic input mode, there should also be a definition menu active (seedocuments).

FLOOD name;

name: (optional) name of the handled damage case. Default name, see above.


256 (272)


IAGR Set interactive graphic mode on.

The command sets the interactive graphic (graphic input) mode on. The mode is used in instantdamage stability allowing using of menus.

IAGR;

ICO Change colours in the result drawing of the instant DA

This command changes colours permanently in the result drawing of the instant damage stability.

ICO;

Display the current colour selection.

ICO STD;

Select the system standard.

ICO c1,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6,c7;

Select the colours explicitly. The parameters c1,...,c7 are integers, positive number meaningcolour, negative raster.

c1 : colour of the lines in the figure boxes,

c2 : background colour of the whole drawing window,

c3 : background colour of the figure boxes,

c4 : colour of the shadows of the figure boxes,

c5 : background colour of the text box,

c6 : colour of the shadow of the text box,

c7 : colour of the text in the text box.

ISET setup for instant damage stability

SETUP is used in the definition of the menu of instant damage stability. The command is the sameas in the drawing part of NAPA (see !EXPL SET/G20)

MENU Make a menu for instant damage stability

The command draws the plans from SETUP and the 'command buttons' in the same drawing.This drawing saved in the data base serves as a definition menu in instant damage stability. Seedocuments for detailed information.

MENU h;

The option h defines the vertical position of the 'command buttons' on the menu. H should bebetween 0 and 1 (default h=.8). (vertical position = h * window height measured from the drawingorigin).

NEW -> Enter instant DA to define a new damage case

The command works as FLOOD, but it makes the damage case empty before starting definition.

NEW name;


257 (272)


STOPIAGR Stop interactive graphic mode

The command sets the interactive graphic mode off. Used only in exceptional situations.

STOPIAGR;

XSECT Draw the x-section at given x in res. window of instant DA

The task redraws the x-section at the given x in the result window of instant damage stability.Default x is in the middle of the damage.

XSECT x;

18 DA Service FunctionsThe following service functions related to Damage Stability are available.

DA.DES() data in input format

The function gives data description(s) in input format. The result is stored in a string array.Function value: 0, not properly done; >0, reference of the string array. (DA.DES works as thecommand DES but the output media is different).

DA.DES(name,arr)

name: name of data description.

arr: (output) string array containing data in input format.

DA.DES(type,name,name,...,arr)

type: type of data. The alternatives are DAMAGE, INIT, OPENING, MARGIN, FRBD, CRIT,DGROUP, IGROUP, RGROUP, OGROUP, CGROUP and MOMENT.


arr: (output) string array containing data in input format.

DA.SEL() select cases for output

The function makes initial conditions, damages, stages, phases, sides and criteria available foroutput and activates a subset of them (function version of the command SEL). Every time thefunction is called, the following string arrays are assigned:

DAINITS - all initial conditions DACINIT - currently activated initial condition DADAMS - all available damages DACDAM - currently activated damage DASTAGES - all available stages in the current damage DACSTAGE - currently activated stage DAPHASES - all available phases in the current stage DACPHASE - currently activated phase DASIDES - all available sides in the current phase DACSIDE - currently activated side DACRITS - all available stability criteria in the current damage DACCRIT - currently selected criterion The function also assigns the string variable DAOPTS, which contains


258 (272)


the selection option 'CRIT=name' for the current criterion. The current criterion is activated by adding this option to the output command.

Funtion value: 0, selection made properly; -1, an error occurred.

DA.SEL('CASE',igr,dgr)

This alternative makes available all initial condition - damage case combinations including to theinitial condition group 'igr' and damage group 'dgr'. This alternative must be called before otheralternatives. The results of the function:

DAINITS : all initial conditions of 'igr' DACINIT : first initial condition of 'igr' DADAMS : all damages belonging to DACINIT (normally all of 'dgr') DACDAM : first damage of DADAMS DASTAGES : all stages of DACDAM DACSTAGE : last stage of DASTAGES DAPHASES : all phases of DACSTAGE DACPHASE : last phase (=EQ) DASIDES : all sides of DACPHASE. The spontaneous heeling side is in the first place. DACSIDE : the spontaneous heeling side of DACPHASE DACRITS : all criteria belonging to DACDAM (normally all from the arguments) DACCRIT : first of DACRITS DAOPTS : CRIT=name, where 'name' is the first criterion of DACRITS

igr: initial condition group or single initial condition

dgr: damage group or single damage.

DA.SEL('INIT',name)

Select the initial condition. The other selections remain unchanged provided they will be found inthe result description. If not, the default selections are done as in DA.SEL('CASE',igr,dgr).

name: name of initial condition.

DA.SEL('DAM',name)

Select the damage. The other selections remain unchanged provided they will be found in theresult description. If not, DAINITS will contain all initial conditions belonging to the selecteddamage, DACINIT will be the first initial condition of DAINITS and other default selections aredone as in DA.SEL('CASE',igr,dgr).

name: name of damage.

DA.SEL('STAGE',name)

Select the stage. The other selections remain unchanged provided they will be found in the resultdescription. If not, the default selections of DACPHASE, DASIDES and DACSIDE are done as inDA.SEL('CASE',igr,dgr).

name: name of stage. Note: also numbers as handled as characters.

DA.SEL('PHASE',name)

Select the phase. The selections of DASIDES and DACSIDE remain unchanged provided theywill be found in the result description. If not, they will be updated as in DA.SEL('CASE',igr,dgr).


259 (272)


name: name of phase. Note: also numbers as handled as characters.

DA.SEL('SIDE',name)

Select the side. The other selections remain unchanged.

name: name of side. Alternatives PS or SB.

DA.SEL('CRIT',name)

Select the criterion. The other selections remain unchanged. Because the criterion is notautomaticly activated in output by this function, the string variable DAOPTS containing theselection option for the criterion should be added to the output commands that handle singlecriteria.

DA.EXIST() check existence of data definition

The function checks whether the given data definition exists or not. The function returns 1 (exists),0 (does not exist) or -1 (error occurred).

DA.EXIST(type,name)

type: type of data. The alternatives are DAMAGE, INIT, OPENING, MARGIN, FRBD, CRIT,DGROUP, IGROUP, RGROUP, OGROUP, CGROUP and MOMENT.


DA.DSTRUCT() structure of calculated damage

The function shows the structure of the calculated damage case as three string arrays: stages,phases and sides. The arrays have the same number of elements. The function returns 0 if theinitial condition or damage is not found or the results are not calculated or they are not up-to-date,otherwise the funtion returns the index of the final equilibrium in the arrays.

DA.DSTRUCT('ini/dam',stages,phases,sides)

DA.DSTRUCT(ini,dam,stages,phases,sides)

ini: name of the initial condition

dam: name of the damage

stages: string array for the stages

phases: string array for the phases

sides: string array for the sides.

DA.CAT() catalog of stored data

The function gets a list of DA-specific data stored in the project data base. The function returns thereference to the output array or 0 if the task has beed failed.

DA.CAT(type,names)

type: type of data. The available alternatives are DAMAGE, INIT, CRIT, OPENING, MARGIN,FRBD, DGROUP, IGROUP, RGROUP, OGROUP, CGROUP, MOMENT, SUBDIVISION andARGUMENTS.

names: string array for the names (output).


260 (272)


DA.OBNSCALE() set scale

The function scales the DRW FLOAT - drawings in the onboard environment of DA. The defaultscale is so defined that the drawing passes to the drawing area with a small margin. The defaultscale may change between drawings.

DA.OBNSCALE(sec,scale)

sec: type of section X, Y or Z. X- , Y- and Z-sections may be scaled separately.

scale: scale as decimal number.

Example: X-sections are scaled to 1/500 by calling

DA.OBNSCALE('X',0.002)

DA.DAMDES() descriptive text, date and time of damage

The function returns the descriptive text of the damage and its creation date and time.

DA.DAMDES(name,arr)

name: name of damage

arr: (output) string array: elem. 1, descriptive text; elem. 2, date of creation in current daterepresentation; elem. 3, time of creation in current time representation.

DA.BREACH() breaches of damage

The function handles breaches used in damage definition.

DA.BREACH(name,arr)

Give all breaches of the damage in input format. The breaches are stored in a string array.


arr: (output) string array for breaches. Each element of the array represents one breach. The breachesare in input format.

DA.BREACH(name,cur,i)

Give i:th breach in curve representation.


cur: name of receiving curve.

i: index of the breach. The function returns the number of breaches as @nr=DA.BREACH(...).

@str=DA.BREACH(cur)

Change breach from curve representation to alphanumeric input representation.

cur: name of curve representing a breach

str: receiving string variable.

DA.COMMAND() run command in DA

The function enters the task DA, runs the given command (kwown in DA) and returns to thecalling level.


261 (272)


DA.COMMAND(da-command)

da-command: any command or set of commands separated by ;

DA.COMMAND('ENTRY')

Special meaning: enter DA and stay there waiting for commands. The command END returnsback to the calling level. This method runs many DA-commands much more effectively than thecommands one by one by the function DA.COMMAND.

DA.COMMAND(id,parameters)

The function runs one DA-command, identifier and parameters of the command given separately.

id: command identifier

parameters: string containing parameters and options.

DA.COMMAND(id,arr)

As above but the parameters given separately in a string array.

id: command identifier

arr: string array containing parameters and options.

Example: !CAL DA.COMMAND('CAL I1/D1; LIS DRES')

!CAL DA.COMMAND('LIS','DRES I1/D10')

!CAL DA.COMMAND('LIS','DRES','I1/D10')

@par=arr(3)

@par(1)='DRES'

@par(2)='I1/D10'

!CAL DA.COMMAND('LIS',ARR)

DA.PENETRATION()get intersection of penetration

The function intersects all breaches and structural holes at the given position and stores theintersections in the receiving curve. Function value: number of branches, 0=no intersection.

@nb=DA.PENETRATION(axis,coord,curve)

axis: axis of intersection: 1=x, 2=y, 3=z

coord: coordinate of the intersection plane: axis=1, x=coord; axis=2, y=coord; axis=3, z=coord

curve: name of receiving curve; created if not exists, previous contents erased.

DA.ASSIGN() quantity of result list as variable

The function fetches quantities from result lists and retuns the value(s) as variable. Contents ofthe variable is the same as in the corresponding column of the specified list. The variables areavailable provided they are calculated by the corresponding LIST- or ASG-command (ARG isexpection).

@var=DA.ASSIGN(type,quantity)

@n=DA.ASSIGN(type,quantity,arr)


262 (272)


The contents of column 'quantity' of list 'type' is assigned to @var or to array arr. @var will be anarray if the corresponding column has more then one item, arr is always an array. @n retuns thenumber of array elements in arr.

type: type of list (see the command LIST or ASG). The available types are: INIT, DDAM, DRES,LIQL, DCOM, CSTA, GZ, DLIM, DCRT, DLDT, DMGM, DROP, DPOI, DFRB, DMRG, DPROand ARG.

quantity: name of quantity available in the list (see LQ type ALT for the alternatives)

arr: receiving array.

Example: @DA.COMMAND('ASG DRES')

@GRF=DA.ASSIGN('DRES','GRF')

DA.CCONN() get connected compartments

The function resolves the compartments which are connected to the given one according to thecompartment connection table. Function value: number of connected compartments.

@ncomp=DA.CCONN(comp,cctab,conn,stat,aux)

comp: name of the compartment

cctab: (optional) name of the compartment connection table without prefix. If this argument is missing,the table in the current DA-arguments is used.

conn: string array for the connected compartments

stat: integer array for connection status: 1 = compartment is connected to the given one so that there isno watertight subdivision between them, 2 = compartment is connected to the given one throughopening(s).

aux: (optional)

DA.GROUPMEMBERS()members of a group

The function returns an array which contains names of the members in the given group.

@list=DA.GROUPMEMBERS(type,name,opt)

@n=DA.GROUPMEMBERS(type,name,arr,opt)

Function value, alt. 1: reference to the string array containing the names including to the group.Function value, alt. 2: number of group members.

type: type of the group. The following alternatives are available:

INIT: initial condition group

DAM: damage group

OPEN: opening group

CRIT: damage stability criterion group

ROOM: room group.

name: name of group

arr: receiving string array.


263 (272)


OPT: (optional) I = get names in internal data base format.

Example: @DAMS=DA.GROUPMEMBERS('DAM','DALL')

DA.DATEDEPEND()date dependencies of damage results

The function returns dates of all data the damage results are dependent on.

stat=DA.DATEDEPEND(ini,dam,dep,dat)

The function value stat gives status of the results: -1 = missing (case not calculated); 0 = out ofdate; 1 = up to date. If 'ini' or 'dam' is a group or both are groups, stat is -1 if any result is missing,stat is 0 if one of results is out of date and stat is 1 if all results are up to date. In case of groups,arrays 'dep' and 'dat' contain data of the oldest member of those having the same determiningstatus.

ini: name of initial condition or initial condition group

dam: name of damage or damage group

dep: string array containing internal data base names of data items the results are dependent on. Thearray is empty if the results are missing. An empty string in the array means that the results arenot dependent on that data type. The array elements are: 1. name of the result description itself 2.name of initial condition 3. name of referred loading condition if any 4. name of damage 5. nameof hull 6. name of arrangement 7. name of compartment connection table 8. name of freeboarddeck edge 9. name of wave 10. name of opening arrangement or 10... names of openings

dat: dates of elements in array 'dep'. If 'dat' is an integer array (arr(1)), the dates are returned in internalinteger format and if 'dat' is a string array the dates are represented in the current alphanumericformat. 0 or empty means that there is no such dependency.

idate=DA.DATEDEPEND(ini,dam)

This format returns the internal date of the youngest member the results are dependent on. idate ispositive if the results are up to date, negative if the results are out of date and zero if the results aremissing.

Example:

!CAL DEP=ARR(3)

!CAL DAT=ARR(1)

!CAL DA.DATEDEPEND('T6.2','D7-8PS',DEP,DAT)

DA.PHASE() select phase (onboard environment)

In the Onboard-NAPA environment, the command selects a new phase for output functions. Thefunction returns the phase treated previously.

old=DA.PHASE(new)

new: new phase number -1,0,1,2,..., 0 means the last equilibrium phase, -1 means before flooding(initial condition).

Example: @old=DA.PHASE(1)

DA.NPHASE() number of phases (onboard environment)

The function retuns the number of phases calculated in onboard environment.


264 (272)


np=DA.NPHASE()

np: number of intermediate phases not including the last equilibrium phase.

DA.GROUND() get curve representing the ground

The function returns a curve which represents the ground of the current flooding case.

cref=DA.GROUND(axis,coord,cname)

axis: intersection axis of the ground, X or Y

coord: coordinate of the intersection. In x-sections, the ground is shown only if the coordinate is withinthe range of the ground (exception -9999, ground is always shown). In y-sections the parameter isignored (ground always shown).

cname: name of curve description where to put the intersection. The previous contents of the descriptionwill be erased and the missing description will be created. The function returns the referencenumber of the curve.

Example: @cref=DA.GROUND('X',88.5,'GROUNDCURVE-X')

DA.SETUP() get setup currently used in DA

The function returns name of the description containing the current setup definition used in DA.

set=DA.SETUP()

set: name of description without prefix SETUP*. If the 'DA_RUNTIME ' refers to a setup which is notstored in the data base but temporarily stored in the description 'SETUP*DA_RUNTIME ' (notelast space).

DA.GENINI() Generate initial condition from the current loading

The function generates an initial condition for damage stability from the current loading conditionof LD. The function must be called in LD. Note: The generated initial condition is available forcalculation in DA but will not appear in any catalog.

DA.GENINI(name)

name: name of initial condition to be generated.

DA.GENDGR() Generate damage group

The function generates a damage group from a list of damages.

DA.GENDGR(name,damlist)

name: name of damage group to be generated

damlist: name of string array containing names of damages.

Example: @OK=DA.GENDGR('DALL','DLIST').

DA.BRECOMPS() compartments in way of damage

The function returns list of compartments which are in way of damage defined by a penetration(breach).

DA.BRECOMPS(breach,comps)


265 (272)


breach: name of table defining the breach

comps: receiving string array for compartments.

DA.DAMSTAGES()get stages of damage

The function returns list of stages in a damage.

n=DA.DAMSTAGES(damage,stages)

damage: name of damage

stages: receiving string array for stages.

DA.DAMCOMPS() get damaged compartments

The function returns list of damaged compartments in the given stage of damage.

DA.DAMCOMPS(damage,stage,comps)

damage: name of damage

stage: name of stage

comps: receiving string array for damaged compartments.

DA.GETHSD() get height of subdivision load line

The function returns height of the subdivision load line used in the given subdivision.

h=DA.GETHSD(sub)

sub: dm-reference number of subdivision table

DA.OPCOL() Colour code of opening

The function returns the colour code for the opening as used in drawings (see COLOUR inopening definition).

col=DA.OPCOL(opening,rel,stage,phase)

Colour of the opening in the floating position of the specified stage and phase.

opening: name of opening

rel: (optional) list of relevant openings. Defauld: relevant openings in arguments.

stage: (optional) number of stage, 0=last stage. Default 0.

phase: (optional) number of phase, 0=last phase of the stage. Default current.

col=DA.OPCOL(opening,rel,t,tr,heel)

Colour of the opening as result of reserve to immersion (dry/immersed).

opening: name of opening

rel: list of relevant openings

t,tr,heel: floating position of the ship, draught, trim, heel.

DA.OPDATA() Get definition data of opening


266 (272)


The function returns definition data of the opening.

val=DA.OPDATA(name,type)

n=DA.OPDATA(name,type,arr)

The first alternative returns number or string which is of single value type. The second alternativereturns data in an array 'arr' and the function value 'n' is the number of elements in the array (n=0means that data is not found). The second alternative may be used for any data type, single valuesor vectors, bur the first alternative may be used only for the single values.

name: name of opening

type: type of data, one of the following alternatives: X, Y, Z, POS, DES, WT, CONN, COL, SIZE, TPX,TPY, TPZ, AREA, WRF, HCOLL, HLEAK, ARATIO, OTYPE, X2, Y2, Z2, RATE LEN, DIAMand KSUM. The types POS, CONN, COL, CD, HCOLL and HLEAK are vectors. POS means theposition and its size is 3 or 6 depending on the number of definition points. X2, Y2 and Z2 arecoordinates of the other end, if any.

arr: receiving array. The type of array is string (arr(3)) for the string data (DES, TYPE, CONN, COL,TPX, TPY, TPZ) and real (arr(2)) for the number data.

DA.TIMESTEP() get time step of damage

The function returns the time step assigned to a damage in the specified stage.

tstep=DA.TIMESTEP(dam,stage)

Returns time step in seconds. Zero means no time step assigned.

dam: name of damage

stage: (optional) name of stage. If stage is missing, the function returns the time step of the last stage.

DA.BRCONVERT()convert representation of breach

The function converts representation of a breach from string(s) to a table or vice versa.

DA.BRCONVERT(strarr,tab)

Convert a breach definition from string(s) to table.

DA.BRCONVERT(tab,strarr)

Convert a breach definition from table to string(s).

strarr: string array

tab: name of table without prefix TAB*.

DA.CALCOPT() assign calculation options

The function sets the options controlling calculation of damages (see options of command CALC).

DA.CALCOPT(options)

options: options to be used in calculation of damages as one string.

DA.ARG() get value of an argument

The function returns the value(s) of an argument.


267 (272)


@var=DA.ARG(qnt)

@n=DA.ARG(qnt,arr)

qnt: quantity id of the argument. See the command ARG for the alternatives.

@var: receiving variable. If the argument has more than one element, the result is an array as storedinternally and must not be chaged

arr: receiving array. The function value n gives the number of elements in the array.

DA.ARG('SAVE')

Save current arguments in the data base.

DA.CRITSTAT() status of relevant criteria

The function returns the determining status of the current relevant criteria. The result of thefunction is colour code GREEN, YELLOW or RED. Status is green if all criteria are met withmargin (GM>MINGM+MARGIN), yellow if GM is between MINGM and MINGM+MARGINand red if GM is less than MINGM.

@stat=DA.CRITSTAT(init,dam,gm_margin)

@stat=DA.CRITSTAT(case,gm_margin)

@stat=DA.CRITSTAT(init,dam,gm_margin,opt)

@stat=DA.CRITSTAT(case,gm_margin,opt)

init: name of initial condition

dam: name of damage

case: calculation case init/damage (alternative of init,dam)

gm_margin: margin of GM

opt: (option) opt='n', return code as integer value: GREEN=2, YELLOW=1, RED=0. Default colour.

@stat: status code GREEN, YELLOW or RED or 2, 1 or 0 if option n specified.

DA.CONNECT() add/change compartment connection

Based on data in the opening, the function adds or changes a compartment connection in thecompartment connection table. The compartment connection table is that given in the arguments.The direction of the connection is defined by the opening so that the first room is the left one andthe second room is the right one.

@ok=DA.CONNECT(opening,status,opt)

opening: name of opening which defines the connection

status: open status

O: open

C: closed

R: reversed, i.e. change current status.

opt: options


268 (272)


B: use the same status in both directions (default)

L: use the status in the direction left to right

R: use the status in the direction right to left

N: do not make changes in the table administration.

DA.CONNCHECK()check compartment connections

The function checks if the connections defined by openings are correct and the openings are notin conflict with the compartment connection table. An opening is correct if its position is at thebulkhead between the compartments it is connecting.

DA.CONNCHECK(opens,cconn,hull,resarr,exparr,tol,sim)

opens: openings to be checked. May be an opening arrangement, an opening group, a single opening orcompartment connection table.

cconn: compartment connection table to be checked with openings. May be empty string.

hull: name of hull. Hull is needed for checking connections to the sea.

resarr: string array containing names of doubtful openings.

exparr: (optional) string array containing the likely reasons for doubtfulness

tol: tolerance. Connection is checked with a box surrounding the given point and having size 2*tol.

sim: (optional) check that the connections are suitable for flooding simulation (checks parameters area,wrcoef, hleak, hcoll, etc.)

DA.GETPHASE() get nearest stage and phase corresponding the given time

In the sequence of the stages and phases, the function searches for that stage and phase which isthe nearest one to the given time.

@p=DA.GETPHASE(time,stage)

time: time in seconds from the beginning of flooding

stage: (optional) name of the nearest stage

@p: number of the nearest phase.

DA.FLOPENING()create flooding opening

The function creates an opening that connects the sea to the given room and adds the connection tothe compartment connection table.

@op=DA.FLOPENING(name,x,y,z,rate,conn)

name: name of opening to be created

x,y,z: position of the opening

rate: flooding rate (m3/h)

conn: name of room connected to the sea by the opening

@op: reference number of the opening.


269 (272)


DA.SETALARM() set alarm limit

The function defines an alarm limit for the given quantity. An event is raised when the value ofthe quantity crosses the limit during calculation of the damage. Event DA*ALARMON (60002)is raised when the quantity crosses the limit from the safe side to the dangerous side and eventDA*ALARMOFF (60003) is raised when the limit is crossed to the opposite direction. Thequantities which may raise events are those being as columns in the result table specified by thecalculation option RTAB (CALC ini/dam ... RTAB=table).

DA.SETALARM(qnt,lim,opt)

DA.SETALARM(qnt,lim1,lim2,opt)

qnt: any numeric quantity in the given table (subset of the quantities available in LQ DRES)

lim: limiting value

lim1,lim2: lower and upper limit

opt: options

LT: alarm is on if the value is less than the limit (default)

GT: alarm is on if the value is greater than the limit

OUT: alarm is on if the value is outside the range (lim1,lim2)

IN: alarm is on if the value is inside the range (lim1,lim2)

ALL: raise event 60002 every time when the value is on the dangerous side.Default: raise event only once when the limit is crossed

REMOVE: remove the quantity from the alarm list.

DA.DRAWPENE() Draw penetration

The function draws penetration to the current setup drawing.

DA.DRAWPENE()

DA.STACOL() get colour of stage

The function fetches the (primary) filling colour of the stage from the currect colour standard.

@c=DA.STACOL(stage)

stage: name of stage.

DA.GETWLS() Get waterlines

The function fetches floating positions from the given set of initial condition - damage casecombinations.

DA.GETWLS(cases,heel,smin,tarr,trarr,hxarr,azarr,trarr,harr)

cases: initial condition - damage case combinations. The parameter Ã¬s either a table or expression init/dam, where 'init' is name of initial condition or initial condition group and 'dam' is damage ordamage group. Note: 'table', 'init' and 'dam' are case sensitive.

heel: angle of heel of the floating position. The following alternatives are available: angle, EQ, EQ+angle, EQ-angle and EQ+range (see !expl gen maxws, option HEEL=a). Default EQ.


270 (272)


smin: (optional) select only cases having s-factor greater than the given value smin. This option worksonly if the cases are in a table and the table contains column SFAC.

tarr,trxarr,hxarr:receiving arrays for draught, trim along x-axis and heel around x-axis.

azarr,trarr,harr:(optional) receiving arrays for azimuth, trim along azimuth axis and heel around azimuth axis.

DA.CROSSTIME()Calculate cross flooding time

The function calculates the cross flooding time for the given case, for the current compartmentconnection and for the given stage.

@time=DA.CROSSTIME(init,dam,heel,stage,alt)

init: initial condition

dam: damage

heel: (deg) the function calculates the time to bring the ship to the upright from the given angle ofheel (alternative UP or default) or the time to bring the ship to the given angle of heel from theequilibrium before cross flooding (alternative EQ) or the full equalization time (alternative FULL).

stage: (optional) name of stage for which cross flooding time will be calculated. Default is the last stage.Note that the name is case sensitive.

alt: (optional) alternative, default UP.

UP: heel -> upright

EQ: eq. before cross -> heel

FULL: EQ: eq. before cross -> upright.

DA.PROGWAYS() Get progr. floodings through A-class boundaries

The function returns all possile ways how progressive flooding may proceed through the A-classboundaries. Assuming that any A-class boundary from the compartment connection table mayor may not collapse under the pressure of water, there are many possible ways how water canprogress from the damaged rooms. The function gets them all.

@n=DA.PROGWAYS(dam,ways)

dam: name of damage

ways: name of description containing all different ways. Every record 1640 in the description 'ways'defines one way. If the description does not exists at the call, it will be created.

@n: number of different ways.

DA.DYNPARCHECK()check parameters in DYNPAR table

The function checks that the parameters in the DYNPAR table for flooding simulation withdynamic motion and/or waves are properly defined and not conflicting with each other. Relevantwarnings and/or errors are listed.

DA.DYNPARCHECK(table,opt)

table: name of the DYNPAR table

opt: (optional) type of the simulation: 0 = waves with quasi-static motions, 1 = dynamic roll motion


271 (272)


DA.WSPECTRUM()store wave spectrum in a table

The function stores the applied wave spectrum from the calculated case INI/DAM to a table forplotting or use as an input for simulation with the same wave realization.

DA.WSPECTRUM(ini,dam,table,all)

ini: init case

dam: damage case

table: name of the table that is created/updated

all: (optional) write complete data in order to reproduce exactly the same wave realization in anotherflooding simulation

DA.FLOWRATE() flow rate in opening

The function stores flow rate in the given opening as a function of time in array format. The flowdirection depends on the definition of the connection, so that for CONN R1,R2 the flow R1-R2 ispositive.

DA.FLOWEATE(ini,dam,ope,etarr,ratearr,type)

ini: init case

dam: damage case

ope: opening name

etarr: array for elapsed time

ratearr: array for flow rates

type: (optional) WAT for volumetric water flow m3/s (default) or AIR for air flow velocity m/s

DA.TIMETOSINK()time to sink

The function returns time to sink in seconds for a damage case that has been calculated withflooding simulation. If the ship does not sink or capsize during the simulation time zero isreturned.

@t=DA.TIMETOSINK(ini,dam,tab)

ini: init case

dam: damage case

tab: (optional) table that contains criteria for sink/capsize. The table should contain column ID foridentification of parameters and column COEF for the values, example:

ID COEF NOTE MAXHEEL 20.0 Max. heel angle (deg) MAXTRA 10.0 Max. trim angle (deg) STEADYHEEL 15.0 Max. steady heel angle during TSPAN TSPAN 60.0 time span (sec) for steady heel

DA.DUMPPHASE()dump one phase from the results to a separate damage


272 (272)


The function creates a new damage case on the basis of the given phase in the damage results. E.g.one time step of flooding simulation results can be dumped to a new damage for calculation of thestability curve at the given instance.

DA.DUMPPHASE(name,init,dam,sta,P=pha)

DA.DUMPPHASE(name,init,dam,sta,T=time)

name: name of the new damage case

init: initial condition of the calculated case

dam: damage case

sta: stage

P=pha: pha: phase number

T=time: time: elapsed time in seconds

DA.DAMDEF() Define damage case from a string array

DA.DAMDEF(arr)

arr: string array for commands

DA.SIMOPENING()Curve representation of opening in flooding simulation

The function creates a curve that represent the opening as it is treated in flooding simulation.Applicable only for the openings that are defined with a geometric object. Function returns thereference number of the curve in the runtime memory.

DA.SIMOPENING(ope,cur)

ope: name of the opening

cur: name of the curve

DA.TESTDGROUP()test group members

The function tests that all members of the group are existing and assigns to the group a new date ifthe test is successful.

DA.TESTDGROUP(name)

Function value: 1 = successful, 0 = failed.

name: name of damage group.

Documents

Damage Stability (DAM)